JP6630993B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a slot machine or a pachinko gaming machine in which a game medium is inserted, a reel is stopped after being rotated, and a game result is determined by a combination of symbols drawn on the reel displayed at that time. .

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a slot machine (turn-type gaming machine) has been known as one of gaming machines. In this slot machine, a player inserts a game medium such as a game medal and rotates a plurality of reels on which symbols are drawn by operating a start lever. Thereafter, the player operates the stop button to stop the torso, and depending on the combination of the stopped symbols (display result), a predetermined number of game medals or the like can be paid out. In addition, in the slot machine, various effects are performed in addition to the basic game, thereby improving the overall interest.
JP 2017-018540 A

  By the way, in this type of slot machine, individual basic operations such as accepting insertion of game media (game medals and the like), rotating a spinning drum (reel), effect control, stopping the spinning drum, and paying out game medals are performed in series. The operation is repeated. In any case, it is desirable that these operations are properly performed. However, when various situations occur in combination, unexpected operations may be performed. Therefore, it is effective to assume as many complex situations as possible and to determine in advance what kind of operation should be performed at that time.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can perform smooth control even when various situations are combined.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a plurality of reels (first to third cylinders and the like),
A plurality of stop switches (first stop button to third stop button, etc.),
Internal drawing means (such as a main CPU),
It is configured to execute power-off processing when power-off is detected,
A predetermined result is determined as the determination result of the internal drawing means, and when the remaining one predetermined reel which has not yet detected the operation of the stop switch among the plurality of reels is rotating, the predetermined reel is rotated. As a result of detecting the operation of the corresponding predetermined stop switch at a predetermined timing, the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped, and when the operation of the predetermined stop switch is no longer detected, the predetermined symbol combination is detected. Is configured to be able to provide a game medium corresponding to
The predetermined result is determined as the determination result of the internal drawing means, and when the remaining one predetermined reel which has not yet detected the operation of the stop switch among the plurality of reels is rotating, the predetermined result is determined. As a result of detecting the operation of the predetermined stop switch corresponding to the reel at the predetermined timing, the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped, and the operation of the predetermined stop switch is continuously detected. In a situation where the power is turned off, a reset wait process is executed by the power-off process, and then the power is turned on while the predetermined stop switch is operated, and the operation of the predetermined stop switch is detected. If so, the game medium corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is not given, and then the predetermined stop switch is operated. Being configured capable of imparting the game medium corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination when gone out,
The predetermined result is determined as the determination result of the internal drawing means, and when the remaining one predetermined reel which has not yet detected the operation of the stop switch among the plurality of reels is rotating, the predetermined result is determined. Despite detecting the operation of the predetermined stop switch corresponding to the reel at the predetermined timing, the predetermined symbol combination is not stopped in a situation where the plurality of reels are stopped due to detection of power-off. However, when the power is turned on thereafter and the operation of the predetermined stop switch is not detected, a game medium corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination can be provided. Machine.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of performing smooth control even when various situations are combined.

It is a perspective view of the slot machine concerning one example of the present invention. It is a perspective view of the slot machine in the state where the front door part was opened. It is a rear view of a front door part. It is a front view showing the inside of a case part. FIG. 3A is a block diagram schematically illustrating an electrical configuration of each control board, and FIG. 3B is an explanatory view illustrating an outline of a component configuration of a main control board. It is a perspective view showing a game medal selector. It is a perspective view which opens and shows a game medal selector. (A) is a chart showing detection modes of the insertion sensors 1 and 2 when a game medal is normally inserted, (b) is a chart showing other detection modes of the insertion sensors 1 and 2 that are not regarded as errors, and (c) is a chart. 5 is a timing chart showing a detection mode of a C0 error. (A) is a timing chart showing a detection mode of a C1 error, and (b) is a timing chart showing a detection mode of a CH error. 6 is a timing chart showing a detection mode of a CE error. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a memory map according to a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a process at the time of power-on in the main control board. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a setting change device process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the game progress main process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process of an internal lottery start. It is a flowchart which shows a process of a condition apparatus command set. It is a flowchart which shows a display determination process. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process in a main control board. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a power-off process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process of error management. It is a flowchart which shows a power return process. It is a flowchart which shows a game medal reception start process. (A) is a flowchart showing a blocker ON process, and (b) is a flowchart showing a blocker OFF process. It is a flowchart which shows an error display process. It is a flowchart which shows an input error set process. It is a flowchart showing a game medal management process. It is a flowchart which shows a storage input process. It is a flowchart which shows a game medal clearing process. It is a flowchart which shows an unrecoverable error process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a process of RWM initialization 2 in the second control. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a process of RWM initialization 3 in the second control. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a process of setting serial communication in a second control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the symbol stop signal output in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the symbol stop signal set in 2nd control. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a process of outputting a test signal in the second control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the input / output sensor abnormality set in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the input / output sensor abnormality clear in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the error check in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the set value error check in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a built-in random number check in 2nd control. It is a flow chart which shows processing of timer measurement 2 in the 2nd control. It is a flow chart which shows processing of game medal insertion check in the 2nd control. 43 is a flowchart showing a game medal insertion check process following FIG. 42. It is a flowchart which shows the process of game medal passing state update in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the input / output sensor abnormality check in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the processing of an input / output sensor abnormality check following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process of error display request data clear in 2nd control. It is a flow chart which shows processing of 8-bit random number inspection in the 2nd control. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a non-recoverable error process 2 in the second control. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of a management mode relating to a normal minimum game time, and (B) is a timing chart showing an example of a management mode relating to a minimum game time at a time of a recoverable error. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of a management mode relating to the minimum game time at the time of a non-returnable error, and (B) is a timing chart showing an example of a management mode relating to the minimum game time at the time of game medal clearing. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of a management mode relating to a minimum game time when a game medal is inserted, and (B) is a timing chart showing an example of a management mode relating to a minimum game time when a set value is confirmed. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the minimum game time and the signal output for a test. (A)-(c) is a chart which shows the 1st correspondence to the 3rd correspondence at the time of a power failure. (A)-(d2) is a chart showing the fourth to seventh measures when a power interruption occurs. (A), (b) is a chart showing a first correspondence and a second correspondence when an error occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the input / output sensor abnormality display processing in 1st control. (A) is a flowchart showing a basic operation according to the countermeasure pattern 1, (b) is a flowchart showing a countermeasure pattern 1-1 when a power-off situation occurs, and (c) is a power-off situation. It is a flowchart which shows the countermeasure pattern 1-2 concerning a case. (A) is a flowchart showing a basic operation according to the countermeasure pattern 2, (b) is a flowchart showing a countermeasure pattern 2-1 in a case where a state of rotation failure of the trunk occurs, and (c) is a flowchart of the rotation failure of the rotation trunk. It is a flowchart which shows the countermeasure pattern 2-2 regarding the case where a situation arises. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of a change in the rotation speed of the rotating body with respect to the countermeasure pattern 2 and the like; (b) is a timing chart showing a basic operation when the symbol is stopped with respect to the countermeasure pattern 3-2; 4 is a timing chart showing an operation when a rotation failure occurs with respect to 3-2. (A) is a flowchart showing a basic operation according to the countermeasure pattern 3, (b) is a flowchart showing a countermeasure pattern 3-1 in a case where a rotation failure has occurred, and (c) is a rotation failure state has occurred. It is a flowchart which shows the countermeasure pattern 3-2 concerning a case. (A) is a timing chart showing a countermeasure pattern 3-1-1A relating to a situation in which power interruption occurs during the third stop / press, and (b) is a countermeasure relating to a situation in which power interruption occurs during the third stop / press. It is a timing chart which shows pattern 3-1-1B. (A) is a timing chart showing a countermeasure pattern 4-7-1 relating to the door opening notification sound and payout sound, and (b) is a timing chart similarly showing a countermeasure pattern 4-7-2 relating to the door opening notification sound and payout sound. It is.

<Overview of the slot machine according to the present embodiment>

  Hereinafter, a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view illustrating an appearance of a slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The slot machine 10 is configured by combining a front door unit 11 shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and a housing unit 12 shown in FIG. The front door unit 11 is supported by the housing unit 12 via a hinge device, and can be locked in a state where the front door unit 11 is closed with respect to the housing unit 12.

  On the front side (front side) of the front door section 11, as shown in FIG. 1, an operation section 14 is disposed in the middle section in the up-down direction, and a turn display section 15 is disposed above the operation section 14. . Further, a game medal payout opening 16 opened in a rectangular shape and a receiving tray 17 for receiving game medals discharged from the game medal payout opening 16 are arranged below the front door portion 11. Direction part 18 is arranged above the. Further, below the operation unit 14, there is provided a translucent lower panel 19 on which a name unique to the model and a design image are drawn.

  The operation unit 14 includes a game medal slot 21, a game medal return button 22, a lock unit 23 (also referred to as a locking unit), a stop button unit 24, a start lever 25, and the like. Further, a main input unit 26 and a sub input unit 27 are provided above the operation unit 14, and the main input unit 26 has a clearing button and a one-sheet insertion button (so-called 1 BET Button), and a three-sheet insertion button (a so-called MAXBET button). Although not shown, the sub input unit 27 is provided with a cross key, a sub input switch, and the like.

  The game medal insertion slot 21 is for inserting a game medal as a game medium through a guide, and the game medal return button 22 is used to return a game medal retained by a game medal selector (described later). It is used for The lock portion 23 is used by inserting a predetermined key when the front door portion 11 is unlocked, and the stop button portion 24 is provided with three turning drums (first turning drum 51L, This is used when stopping the rotation of the second barrel 51C and the third barrel 51R).

  The stop button unit 24 is provided with three stop buttons (a first stop button 24L, a second stop button 24C, and a third stop button 24R). These stop buttons 24L, 24C, 24R are associated with each of the turning drums 51L, 51C, 51R, and by pressing the stop buttons 24L, 24C, 24R individually, the corresponding turning drums 51L, 51C, 51R. Is to stop. In the present embodiment, the first to third trunks 51L to 51R are arranged in the order of the first torso 51L, the second torso 51C, and the third torso 51R from the left when viewed from the front of the slot machine 10. The first stop button 24L, the second stop button 24C, and the third stop button 24R are arranged in this order from the left in the order of the stop buttons 24L, 24C, 24R. The start lever 25 is also used when rotating the rotating drum and determining a set value (described later).

  The clearing button in the main input unit 26 is used when paying out inserted game medals and clearing out game medals stored in a storage device (described later). The one-sheet insertion button is used to insert the stored game medals one by one, and the three-sheet insertion button does not exceed the number of the stored game medals and a specified number of insertions (described later). It is used when a maximum of three stored game medals are inserted in the range. The sub input switch in the sub input unit 27 is used for performing an operation related to the effect, and is used for switching display contents such as a liquid crystal screen provided in the effect unit 18 and for inputting the effect.

  Further, although not shown, the operation unit 14 is provided with various display units for displaying the contents of the game according to the presence / absence of light emission of an LED, the display mode of a 7 segment (7 segment) display, and the like. As various display units that show the status of the game, there are an acquired number display unit, a stored number display unit, a re-game display unit, an insertion display unit, a hit display unit, a game start display unit, an inserted number display unit, and the like. In the vicinity of these various display units, printing of characters and the like are performed so that it is possible to know what information display functions each display unit has. Further, among these display units, the acquired number display unit and the stored number display unit have a function of displaying numbers, characters, and the like using a 7-segment display, and the other display units are used to turn on LEDs. The predetermined information is displayed depending on the presence or absence and the lighting mode. And about the LED used as a light source in each display part, the acquired number display LED, the stored number display LED, the re-game display LED, the insertion display LED, the stop display LED, the game start display LED, the insertion number display It may be referred to as an LED.

  In addition, among the various display units, the acquired number display unit is used for displaying the number of game medals according to the acquired number, displaying when switching the setting, and displaying an error code according to the situation. Used. The stored number display unit displays the number of game medals stored in the storage device, and the re-game display unit displays the presence or absence of the operation of the re-game. Further, the insertion display unit displays that game medals can be inserted, and the hit display unit displays that it is time to clear the stored game medals. The game start display unit displays that operation of the start lever 25 can be accepted when the game can be started. Further, the inserted number display unit displays the number of inserted game medals, and displays the same number of game medals as the previous game at the time of the replay operation.

  The above-mentioned stop button unit 24 is provided with three stop buttons: a first stop button 24L, a second stop button 24C, and a third stop button 24R. The torso display section 15 is provided with a torso display panel 28 in which a rectangular display window is closed by a transparent panel, and the through-body display panel 28 is shown through FIG. 2 and FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, three rotating drums (reels) of a first rotating drum 51L to a third rotating drum 51R stored in the housing portion 12 can be visually recognized. In addition, the rendering unit 18 is provided with a liquid crystal display device and the like, and the rendering unit 18 performs display such as a rendering associated with a game.

  The front door section 11 is provided with various light sources (LEDs) used for effects. Although not shown, examples of the light sources for these effects include a three-sheet insertion display LED, a stop button LED, and a sub-input display LED. Among these, the three-sheet insertion LED illuminates the three-sheet insertion button arranged on the main input unit 26 from the inside, and is used for displaying the effect contents using the three-sheet insertion button. The stop button LED illuminates the stop buttons 24L, 24C, 24R from the inside, and is used for displaying the effect contents using the stop buttons 24L, 24C, 24R. Further, the sub-input display LED illuminates the sub-input switch arranged in the above-mentioned sub-input section 27 from the inside, and is used for displaying the effect contents using the sub-input switch.

  In addition to these, as the light source for the effect, although not shown, the upper part of the torso, the lower part of the torso, the side LED, the chance LED, the left wing LED, the lower left circle LED, the right wing LED, the lower right circle LED, upper left circle LED, upper LED, upper right circle LED, AR lamp LED, lower panel illumination LED, left mini LED, right mini LED, V-shaped LED, and the like. Any of the light sources is used for displaying the contents of the effect according to the arrangement and the function.

  FIG. 3 shows the rear side of the front door unit 11. On the rear side of the front door section 11, various substrates, devices for handling game medals, various sensors, and the like are arranged. Among them, various substrates include a sub-control board 31, an image control board 32, an image display connection board 33, an audio board 34, an effect ROM (ROM) board 35, a switch sensor board 36, a display board 37, a door relay terminal board. 38, a turning body lighting board 39, a lower panel lighting board 40, and the like.

  Among these, the sub-control board 31 is a board for controlling an effect image, various solenoids, various LEDs, and sound effects. The sub-control board 31 is housed in a dedicated board case, and is mounted on the front door section 11 by screwing the board case to the front door section 11.

  The image control board 32 mounts an audio board 34 and an effect ROM board 35 to be described later, relays between the sub-control board 31 and the image display connection board 33, and controls an image and sound effect for the effect. It is. The image control board 32 is housed in a dedicated board case, and is attached to the front door section 11 by screwing the board case to the front door section 11.

  The image display connection board 33 is a board that relays between the image control board 32 and the liquid crystal display of the rendering section 18, and is fixed by screwing into a screw hole provided in the front door section 11. . The sound board 34 is a board to which a ROM storing sound data for effects is attached, and is fixed to a screw hole provided in the image control board 32 by screwing. The effect ROM board 35 is a board to which a ROM storing image data for effect is attached, and is fixed by screwing into a screw hole provided in the image control board 32. The various roms may be fixed by pointing pins provided on the rom to sockets provided on a board to be mounted. Further, the various substrates may be fixed not only by screws but also by fitting a connector provided on the various substrates to a connector provided on a door, a case, a substrate, or the like of the other party. Such a substrate fixing method can be similarly applied to various types of substrates described below. Further, the image control connection board is not necessarily provided, and the image control board 32 may be directly connected to the rendering unit 18 and mounted.

  The switch sensor board 36 relays between the sub-control board 31 and two solenoids (a first solenoid and a second solenoid) to be described later, to display the effect contents by LEDs, or to switch and input a liquid crystal screen. Substrate. The switch sensor board 36 is fixed by screwing into a screw hole provided in a dedicated board case.

  The display board 37 is a board to which the above-mentioned acquired number display LED, stored number display LED, re-game display LED, insertion display LED, hit display LED, game start display LED, and insertion number display LED are attached, and a front door portion is provided. 11 is fitted and fixed to a hook provided on the hook 11. The door relay terminal board 38 is a board that relays between a main control board (to be described later), various sensors disposed at various parts of the front door unit 11, a blocker 47 (to be described later), and the display board 37. . The door relay terminal plate 38 is housed in a dedicated board case, and the board case is screwed to the front door section 11 to be mounted on the front door section 11.

  The turning body illumination board 39 is a board on which LEDs for illuminating the first to third bodies 51 </ b> L to 51 </ b> R are attached, and are fixed by being fitted into hooks provided on the front door unit 11. The lower panel lighting board 40 is a board having an upper and lower split structure to which LEDs for illuminating the lower panel 19 are attached, and is fixed by being fitted into a hook provided on the front door unit 11. The lower panel lighting board 40 is a board to which an LED is attached to illuminate the lower panel, and is fitted and fixed to a hook provided on the front door unit 11.

  Subsequently, as devices such as various sensors provided on the front door unit 11, a start lever sensor 41, a three-sheet insertion button sensor 42, a one-sheet insertion / clearing button switch 43, a game medal selector 44, a insertion sensor 45, a selector There are a passage sensor 46, a blocker 47, a game medal return passage 48, a stop button sensor 49, a speaker 50, and the like. Among them, the start lever sensor 41 is for detecting the operation of the start lever 25, and the three-sheet insertion button sensor 42 is for detecting the operation of the three-sheet insertion button.

  The one-sheet insertion / clearing button switch 43 is a device equipped with a one-sheet insertion button and a clearing button switch. The game medal selector 44 is a device to which a loading sensor 45, a selector passage sensor 46, and a blocker 47, which will be described later, are attached, and also a device for selecting whether or not the inserted game medals are within an acceptable range. The above-mentioned insertion sensor 45 is a sensor for detecting insertion of a game medal, and the selector passage sensor 46 is a sensor for detecting passage of a game medal. Further, the blocker 47 is a device for returning game medals according to the game state, and the game medal return passage 48 is a passage for returning game medals. The stop button sensor 49 is a sensor for detecting operation of the stop buttons 24L to 24R, and a plurality of speakers 50 are provided for outputting a sound effect.

  Although not shown, the front door unit 11 is provided with a solenoid 1, a solenoid 2, and a cross key board. The solenoid 1 and the solenoid 2 are devices for vibrating the sub input switch. The cross key board is a board for switching and inputting a liquid crystal screen. The board is housed in a dedicated board case, and the dedicated case is fixed by screws.

  FIG. 4 shows the front side of the housing 12. In the housing 12, a main control board 61, a setting unit 62, a game medal payout device (hopper) 63, a power supply unit 64, and the like are arranged. Among them, the main control board 61 controls the game by controlling input and output to and from the slot machine 10 and attaches a hitting switch, a setting display LED, a monitor LED, and the like, which will be described later, although the reference numerals are omitted. It is a substrate. The main control board 61 accommodates a board in a main board case 65 which is a dedicated board case, fixes the main board case 65 with a dedicated stopper, and mounts the main board case 65 on the housing 12. The setting display LED 66 displays a set value that defines theoretical ease of hitting (the degree of advantage of the player). The stop switch is set to either the upper side or the lower side to select either the stop function or the automatic clearing function, but in this embodiment, since the stop function and the automatic clearing function are not mounted, This hit switch is not used. Therefore, the hit switch does not affect the outcome of the game. Note that an IC tag sealing seal (not shown) is affixed to the main board case 65, and the IC tag sealing seal is a sealing paper having an IC tag embedded therein.

  Further, a door switch 60 is provided in the housing 12, and the door switch 60 is a switch for detecting opening and closing of the front door unit 11. The setting unit 62 is a box that stores a setting door switch 67, a setting key switch 68, and a setting / reset button 69 ("/" means "or"), which will be described later. Among these, the setting door switch 67 is a switch for detecting the opening and closing of a setting door that forms a part of the housing of the setting unit 62 and closes the setting unit 62. The setting key switch 68 is a switch for switching the setting and confirming the setting in the slot machine, and the setting / reset button 69 is a button for selecting the setting value or canceling the error. Note that the setting door switch 67 does not necessarily need to be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting / reset button 69 serving both as the setting button and the reset button is used, but they may be provided separately. Furthermore, the lock unit 23 is provided with a setting and reset function. For example, when the key inserted into the lock unit 23 is rotated rightward, the lock is released, and when the key is rotated leftward, It may function as a setting / reset switch. Further, one of the setting key switch 68 and the setting / reset button 69 shown in FIG. 4 may be provided separately from the setting unit 62. As such a device, for example, a setting key cylinder (not shown) having a setting key switch 68 is provided in the power supply unit 64 and a setting / reset button 69 is provided in the setting unit 62.

  Further, the housing unit 12 is provided with an external centralized terminal board 70, which is used to connect the medal insertion signal output, the medal payout signal output, the external signal output 1 to the external signal output 5 to the outside. It is a substrate that outputs and has monitor LEDs (seven) attached. The external centralized terminal board 70 is fitted into a hook provided on the housing 12 and fixed to the housing 12.

  The above-mentioned game medal payout device 63 is provided with a payout sensor (not shown; sometimes referred to as a “payout sensor”). The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the paid out game medals. It is.

  Further, the housing unit 12 is provided with a game medal auxiliary storage 71, which is a storage for storing game medals exceeding the storage capacity of the game medal payout device 63. It is. The game medal auxiliary storage 71 is provided with a full detection electrode (not shown), and this full detection electrode is an electrode for detecting a full state of the game medal auxiliary storage.

  The power supply unit 64 is a box that houses the power switch 72, and the power switch 72 is a switch for turning on / off the main power supply. By turning on the power switch 72 from OFF, predetermined power is supplied to various devices including the control board and the like via the power unit 64.

  The housing 12 is provided with the first to third trunks 51L to 51R described above. The winding drums 51L to 51R are devices for rotating a symbol drawn on the outer peripheral surface. A torso sensor (not shown) is provided inside each of the torso 51L to 51R, and the torso sensor indicates a reference position of the rotating torso on a portion of the torso provided as an index (hereinafter, referred to as an index). This part is sometimes referred to as an “index”).

  Further, although not shown, the casing 12 is provided with a BL (backlight) relay board, a turning body apparatus board, a backlight LED, an LED backlight board, and the like. Among these, the BL relay board is a board that relays between the sub-control board 31 and an LED backlight board, a torso sensor, and the like to be described later. The BL relay board is mounted on the housing 12 by storing the board in a dedicated board case and fixing the board case with a dedicated stopper.

In addition, the rotating body device substrate is a board that relays between the main control board 61 and a rotating body stepping motor (described later) and a rotating body sensor in order to rotate or stop each of the rotating bodies 51L to 51R. Further, the main control board 61 is a board that relays between the above-mentioned full detection electrode, the door switch 60, the game medal payout device 63, the external centralized terminal plate 70, and the power supply unit 64. The spinning device substrate is mounted on the housing 12 by storing the substrate in a dedicated substrate case and fixing the substrate case with a dedicated stopper. The backlight LED is disposed inside each of the rotating bodies 51L to 51R, and is an LED for illuminating the symbols on the rotating bodies 51L to 51R from the back. The LED backlight board is a board on which the above-mentioned backlight LED is mounted.
<Electrical basic configuration of various control boards>

  Next, the basic electrical configuration of the main control board 61, the sub control board 31, and the image control board 32 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5A, the main control board 61 stores a main CPU 81 for controlling the progress of the game, a program (game control program) used for game control of the main CPU 81, and various data. Various electronic components such as a main ROM 82, a readable and writable RWM 83 for temporarily storing data for control relating to the progress of the game, and an interface unit (not shown) are provided. In the present embodiment, two control programs of a first control program and a second control program are broadly provided as game control programs. And the control performed based on a 1st control program can be called 1st control, and the control performed based on a 2nd control program can be called 2nd control. In addition, the first control may be referred to as "control for providing for games", and the second control may be referred to as "control for not providing for games". These details will be described later.

  The sub-control board 31 stores a sub-main CPU 86 that performs control for effects based on a command from the main control board 61, a program (effect control program) used for effect control of the sub-main CPU 86, and various data. Various electronic components such as a sub-main ROM 87, a readable and writable RWM 88 for temporarily storing data for effect control, and an interface unit (not shown) are provided. Then, the sub-control board 31 receives a command (main command) transmitted from the main control board 61 and performs control based on the main command. Then, the sub-control board 31 transmits a command (sub-main command) for image display or sound (sound) output to the image control board 32.

The image control board 32 includes a sub-sub CPU 91 that performs image control based on a sub-main command from the sub-control board 31, an effect ROM 92 in which a program (image control program) used for image control of the sub-sub CPU 91 and various data are stored, Based on a command from the sub-sub CPU 91, a VDP 94 that controls image display using image data stored in the character ROM 93, a voice chip 96 that controls voice output using voice data stored in the voice ROM 95, Various electronic components such as a read / write RWM 97 that temporarily stores data for output and the like, an interface unit (not shown), and the like are provided. Here, the effect ROM 92 is mounted on the effect ROM board 35, and the audio ROM 95 is mounted on the audio substrate 34. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the sub control board 31 may supplement some or all of the functions of the image control board 32. For example, an audio ROM 95 may be provided on the sub-control board 31 to select and output audio data without passing through the image control board 32, or the sub-control board 31 may have a character ROM 93 and a VDP 94. The more specific operations of the main control board 61, the sub control board 31, and the image control board 32 will be described later.
<< Components related to main control board >>

  Subsequently, an outline of the component configuration of the main control board 61 will be described. The main control board 61 is a rectangular board-shaped wiring board having a printed wiring. In the present embodiment, a multi-layer (here, two-layer) structure is used. Further, a through hole for mounting a lead-type electronic component is provided at a predetermined portion of the main control board 61, and soldering such as a flow method is performed with the lead inserted into the through hole. Then, the lead-type electronic equipment is mounted on the main control board 61. The main control board 61 can mount not only lead type electronic components but also surface mount type electronic components.

  FIG. 5B schematically illustrates a mounting surface which is a front surface side of the main control board 61. On the main control board 61, a main CPU 81 which is a lead type packaged device is mounted. The mounting of the main CPU 81 is performed by inserting the lead of the main CPU 81 into a lead-type socket soldered to the main control board 61 and fitting it. Further, various electronic components 181 and various connectors 182 are soldered on the main control board 61, as shown in a part.

  Among them, the various connectors 182 are arranged along the peripheral edge (outer edge) of the main control board 61, and expose the connection port from the main board case 65 to the outside. The various connectors 182 are fitted with connectors provided on a harness from a board relating to an external device such as the above-described sub-control board 31, a turning body apparatus board, various LED boards, and the like. Used for electrical connection with various external devices.

  Reference numeral 183 in FIG. 5B indicates a non-mounting area where no connector is provided. The non-mounting area 183 is an area secured for mounting an emergency connector for connecting a testing machine at the stage of product development, and is used for the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment from the development stage to the commercialization. Is the area where the emergency connector has been removed. In the non-mounting area 183, the plate surface of the main control board 61 is exposed, so that a plurality of through holes 184 for inserting leads of the emergency connector can be visually observed. Further, since the mounting position of the emergency connector is at the peripheral portion of the main control board 61 as described above, the non-mounting area 183 is also located at the peripheral portion of the board outside the main CPU 81. Note that FIG. 5B shows only a part of the through hole of the emergency connector in order to avoid complicating the drawing.

  The emergency connector is used to connect to the main control board 61 a performance tester (not shown) used at the development stage, particularly at the stage of receiving public approval. More specifically, a test relay board (not shown) is connected to the emergency connector, and a performance tester is connected to the test relay board. Then, the test data signal extracted via the test relay board is input to the performance tester, and the performance tester converts the performance data of the slot machine 10 based on the input test data signal. get.

  The test relay board is not used at the stage of commercialization, and is not provided in the commercialized slot machine 10. A test drive circuit (test driver) is used to output the test data signal. The test driver is mounted on a test relay board. The area for mounting the driver is not provided on the main control board 61. Furthermore, constituent elements such as the shape, dimensions of each part, the number of pins, and the color of the emergency connector are different from any of the other various connectors 182, and are structurally different from those of the mating connector connected to the other connector. Connection is not possible.

  On the other hand, in the commercialization stage, the performance tester is not connected, so that the emergency connector is not mounted when the main control board 61 is manufactured. However, if the printed wiring of the main control board 61 and the game machine control program are changed in accordance with the non-installation of the emergency connector, the slot machine 10 that is commercialized and the slot machine at the time of the test are not changed. Conditions cannot be matched. Further, if an emergency connector is also left in the commercialized slot machine 10 so as not to change the conditions, a connector that can be fitted to the emergency connector is used for a device for fraud, and fraud is easily performed. It can be considered that

  Therefore, in order to take countermeasures against fraud by removing the emergency connector and to minimize the change in conditions, the printed wiring for the emergency connector is left in the same form as when the emergency connector is mounted . Solder is supplied to the through hole 184 for the emergency connector, and the through hole 184 for the emergency connector is closed by the solder over the entire length. By closing the through-hole 184 with the solder, it is possible to prevent illegal acts such as using the through-hole 184. Further, the wiring for the emergency connector can be electrically connected to another wiring (for example, a wiring for grounding) by soldering.

  Furthermore, at the time of soldering, it is conceivable that the solidified solder protrudes to some extent (for example, about 0.1 mm) from the substrate surface due to the surface tension of the molten solder. However, as described above, since the emergency connector is not mounted at the time of commercialization, the raised solder does not come into contact with the emergency connector or other electronic components. Note that the through hole 184 can be closed with a material other than solder (for example, a solder resist), but in this case, solder for closing the through hole 184 is unnecessary. It is also possible to leave the through hole 184 open without closing it. In this case, a material for closing the through hole 184 is not required.

Although not shown, the main board case 65 is formed by combining a box base having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape made of a transparent resin and a box cover also being made of a transparent resin and covering the opening of the box base. Have been. A hole for exposing the permanent connector 182 is provided in the box cover at a position corresponding to a mounting area of various types of the permanent connector 182 used after commercialization. At the position corresponding to the area 183, no hole for exposing the emergency connector is left, and the non-mounting area 183 is in a sealed state.
<Mechanism related to rotation of the torso>

  Next, a mechanism for rotating the first to third barrels 51L to 51R will be described. A reel tape is mounted on the outer peripheral surface of each of the winding drums 51L to 51R, and a predetermined number of symbols are drawn on the reel tape. In this embodiment, the number of symbols is 21 each. The sizes of all the torso are set to be the same, and the rotation axes are located in the same straight line. Further, each of the rotating drums 51L to 51R is connected to a rotating drum rotating device 54 shown in FIG. 4 and is integrated with the rotating drum rotating device 54, and the rotating shaft of the slot machine 10 is changed by the rotating drum rotating device 54. It is driven to rotate in the horizontal direction. Here, the arrangement of the symbols in the first to third trunks 51L to 51R and the control mode related to the symbol display will be described later. The number of symbols is not limited to 21, but may be 20 or 14, for example.

  The rotating body rotating device 54 is a device for rotating the first to third rotating bodies 51L to 51R, and operates by operating the start lever 25 to rotate the first to third rotating bodies 51L to 51R. It has the function of rotating.

  Although not shown, the rotating body rotating device 54 includes a rotating body stepping motor, a reel bush, a rotating body sensor, a rotating body device substrate, and the like, and includes a first control program and a second control program as described later. It is controlled by a computer program (game control program). Each of the first to third barrels 51L to 51R is unevenly mounted on a stainless steel shaft of the rotary body stepping motor via a cylindrical reel bush, and the rotary body stepping motor via a screw and a resin washer. Is fixed to the shaft. Then, the shaft of the rotating body stepping motor is used as the shaft of the first to third bodies 51L to 51R, and the rotating body stepping motor is fixed to a motor frame made of metal or the like by screws. The motor frame is inserted into a reel frame made of metal or the like serving as a skeleton of the above and fixed by a latch (here, a so-called snap latch provided with a plunger and a grommet). The first to third barrels 51L to 51R do not swing (do not swing in the rotational direction or the axial direction).

  When stopping the first to third barrels 51L to 51R, the rotating body rotating device 54 functions as a rotation stopping device. That is, the rotation stopping device has a function of stopping the rotating body and a function of displaying a combination of symbols. The function of stopping the torso is a function of stopping the torso corresponding to the pressed stop button when there is an individual pressing operation of the above-described stop buttons 24L, 24C, and 24R. In addition, the function of displaying the combination of symbols is such that the first to third trunks 51L to 51R are all stopped by the above-described function to stop the rotation trunks, and the first to third trunks 51L to 51R. This is a function to display the combination of symbols according to.

Further, the rotation stop device is composed of stop buttons 24L, 24C, 24R, a stop button sensor, a door relay terminal plate, a turning drum stepping motor, a turning drum sensor, and a turning drum device board, and under the control of the aforementioned game control program, It is activated when the player operates the stop button, and is not activated otherwise. Here, an index serving as an index of the rotation angle is formed on each of the rotating bodies 51L to 51R, and based on the positional relationship between the index and each of the symbols drawn on each of the rotating bodies 51L to 51R, the rotating body is formed. The position of the symbol when the rotation is stopped is controlled.
<Control of mechanism related to rotation of the torso>

  Each of the rotating drums 51L to 51R includes various data described below, namely, a rotating drum driving state number, a rotating drum driving pulse output counter, a rotating drum driving pulse switching number during acceleration, a symbol step number, and a symbol number (passing). Position), a symbol number (for a stop position), a rotation failure detection counter, a rotation driving pulse data search counter, a rotation start standby counter, and the like. The drive state of each rotating drum is checked by the rotating drum drive management module every interruption (2.235 ms), and excitation data is output according to the conditions.

  Among the various data described above, the rotating body drive state number has a value of 0 to 5, 0 is stopped or fluctuating, 1 is waiting for rotation start, 2 is decelerating, 3 is deceleration start, 4 indicates a constant speed, and 5 indicates an acceleration. Further, the drum drive pulse output counter indicates the number of interruptions for switching the excitation, and the number of rotation of the body drive pulse at the time of acceleration indicates the offset of the rise pattern (number of interrupts) table of the drum, and one symbol Step numbers indicate the number of steps in one symbol.

Furthermore, the symbol number (for the passing position) indicates the symbol number (0 to 20) passing through the middle row, and when the value is FFH (H represents hexadecimal notation), This indicates that the rotation sensor has not passed. The symbol number (for the stop position) indicates the symbol number (0 to 20) to be displayed in the middle row, and when the value is FFH, it indicates that the symbol number has not been set. The rotation body rotation failure detection counter is a counter for detecting a rotation failure of the rotation body, and outputs a value of the number of steps / 2 after passing the sensor. Also, when each of the rotating drums 51L to 51R passes through the rotating drum sensor, the rotating drum driving state number becomes "4" of "during constant speed".
<Game medal selector>
<< Configuration of the game medal selector >>

  Next, the aforementioned game medal selector 44 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3, the game medal selector 44 is on the open end side of the front door unit 11 (the left end side in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3) on the back of the front door unit 11, and It is attached to the almost middle part in the vertical direction. Further, the game medal selector 44 is located at a position directly below the torso display unit 15, and the game medal inserted into the game medal slot 21 (see FIG. 1) on the front of the front door unit 11 is displayed on the front. It is designed to be received behind the door unit 11.

  The game medal selector 44 has a rectangular box-like outer shape as shown in FIG. 6, and includes a main body 101, an opening / closing unit 102, and a hinge mechanism 103. The main body 101 is fixed to the front door section 11, and an opening / closing section 102 is mounted on the main body 101 via a hinge mechanism 103 so as to be openable and closable, as shown in FIG. The hinge mechanism 103 is disposed on the right side when viewed from the rear side of the front door section 11, and the opening / closing section 102 is attached to the hinge mechanism 103 around the axis of the hinge mechanism 103 extending vertically. It can be opened in the horizontal direction while resisting the elastic restoring force of the provided coil spring 104 and the like.

  When the opening / closing unit 102 is closed, a medal passage 105 having a width slightly larger than the thickness of one game medal is formed between the main unit 101 and the main unit 101. In other words, the medal passage 105 opens upward in a slit shape, and bends and branches at an intermediate position to face the game medal selector 44 (to the right as viewed from the back of the front door unit 11) or downward. It is growing. The upper end of the medal passage 105 serves as a game medal entrance (game medal entrance) 106. The opening serving as the game medal entrance 106 communicates with the game medal slot 21 described above. Further, a side exit (hereinafter, referred to as “first exit”) 107 of the game medal selector 44 is configured to be able to discharge game medals toward the game medal payout device 63 described above, and a lower exit (hereinafter, referred to as “first exit”). The “second exit” 108 can discharge the game medals toward the game medal payout exit 16 described above.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the bent portion 110 located in the middle of the medal passage 105 is provided with a deformed plate-shaped deceleration portion 111. The deceleration portion 111 is rotatable in the front-rear direction (front-rear direction of the front door portion 11) with the upper end side as a base end, and elastically projects into the medal passage 105 when no game medal passes. ing. When a game medal is inserted into the game medal insertion slot 21 and the inserted game medal contacts the speed reduction unit 111 while passing through the bending portion 110, the speed reduction unit 111 is pushed by the game medal and immerses in the main body 101. I do. Further, when the game medals pass and are released from the pressing force of the game medals, the speed reduction unit 111 projects again into the medal passage 105. Then, the game medals passing through the bent portion 110 change their course while being decelerated by contact with the deceleration portion 111, and head toward the downstream side of the bent portion 110.

  The above-described selector passage sensor 46 is provided downstream of the bent portion 110. The selector passage sensor 46 includes a first movable portion 112 having a rectangular plate shape. The first movable portion 112 is provided at a branch portion 113 of the medal passage 105 in a longitudinal direction and in a width direction (passing direction) of the medal passage 105. (In the radial direction of the game medal to be played). The first movable portion 112 is rotatable in the front-rear direction (the front-rear direction of the front door portion 11) with one side on the upstream side of the medal passage 105 as a base end. It protrudes into 105. However, when the game medals that have passed through the aforementioned deceleration unit 111 come into contact with the first movable unit 112, the first movable unit 112 is pushed by the game medals and enters the main body unit 101. When the game medal passes and is released from the pressing force, the first movable portion 112 projects again into the medal passage 105.

  The main body 101 has a built-in microsensor (not shown) for the selector passage sensor 46, and the presence or absence of the immersion operation of the first movable portion 112 is detected by the microsensor. In other words, when the first movable portion 112 is pushed and immersed by a game medal that enters the medal passage 105 and flows down, the operation of the first movable portion 112 is detected, and the output signal of the microsensor changes. I do. The main control board 61 uses the output from the micro sensor for the selector passage sensor to execute a control (such as FIG. 22 to FIG. 29) relating to insertion of a game medal as described later. You. Here, as a micro sensor for the selector passage sensor 46, various micro sensors such as a contact type and a non-contact type can be applied. In addition, the first movable portion 112 is configured such that foreign matter or the like flowing backward is caught (the foreign material cannot move from downstream to upstream of the first movable portion 112). This makes it possible to prevent the goto machine from being easily pulled out when a goto machine (a mechanical device used for so-called goto action) is inserted.

  In addition, a second movable portion 114 is provided on an upper portion of the upstream side of the first movable portion 112, and the second movable portion 114 also normally elastically protrudes into the medal passage 105 and is pushed by a game medal. In this case, the main body 101 is immersed. In this embodiment, the selector passage sensor 46 is constituted by the movable portions such as the first movable portion 112 and the second movable portion 114 and a detection unit such as a microsensor for the selector passage sensor 46. In the present embodiment, the selector passage sensor 46 is formed by the first movable portion 112 and the second movable portion 114. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only one of the two may be provided. It does not have to be the shape described above.

  The above-mentioned insertion sensor 45 is provided in a part of the medal passage 105 on the way from the selector passage sensor 46 to the above-described first outlet 107. The input sensor 45 is composed of two sensors, an input sensor 1 indicated by reference numeral 115 and an input sensor 2 indicated by reference numeral 116, and each input sensor is built in the main body 101. In the following, when the description is made with reference to the reference numerals in the figure for the input sensor 1 and the input sensor 2, the input sensor 1 (115) and the input sensor 2 (116) will be described.

  Each of the input sensor 1 (115) and the input sensor 2 (116) uses a non-contact type microsensor (not shown) built in the main body 101. Further, the insertion sensor 1 (115) and the insertion sensor 2 (116) are arranged at a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 to 10 mm) smaller than the diameter of the game medal (here, 25 mm) in the flowing direction of the game medal. The insertion sensor 1 (115) is located upstream of the medal passage 105 from the insertion sensor 2 (116).

  As the microsensor used for the input sensor 1 (115) and the input sensor 2 (116), a light-receiving microsensor is used, and a light projecting unit disposed obliquely above a black rectangular window 117. The light (detection light) emitted from 118 can be received. That is, a light emitting device (not shown) using an LED or the like is built in the light emitting unit 118. The positional relationship between the light emitting device and the closing sensor 1 (115) and the closing sensor 2 (116) is as follows. The detection light output from the light emitter is set so as to pass through the window 117 and enter the injection sensor 1 (115) and the injection sensor 2 (116).

  When the game medals flowing down the medal passage 105 block the detection light, the detection light stops entering the insertion sensor 1 (115) and the insertion sensor 2 (116), and the game medals are detected, and the insertion sensor 1 ( 115) and the output signal of the microsensor used for the closing sensor 2 (116) changes. Then, in the main control board 61 described above, using the outputs from the insertion sensor 1 (115) and the insertion sensor 2 (116), control relating to insertion of game medals as described later (FIGS. 29 etc.) are executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the insertion sensor 1 (115) and the insertion sensor 2 (116) are disposed at a position closer to the upper side of the medal passage 105, and for example, even if a plurality of game medals continuously pass. The upper gap between the game medals passes through the insertion sensor 1 (115) and the insertion sensor 2 (116). As a result, the game medals can be reliably detected one by one.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the opening / closing section 102 is provided with the above-described blocker 47. The blocker 47 is composed of a plate-shaped movable block 119 formed in an L-shaped cross section, a solenoid (not shown), and the like. The movable block 119 is provided with a shielding plate 120 projecting in the horizontal direction. Has been. Furthermore, the arrangement of the blockers 47 is such that when the opening / closing section 102 is in the closed state, most of the movable block section 119 is directed to the first outlet 107 rather than directly below the first movable section 112 in the selector passage sensor 46. The game medal is set to be located on the downstream side with respect to the game medal. The blocker 47 advances and retreats the movable block portion 119 in the front-rear direction (the front-rear direction of the front door portion 11) with ON / OFF driving of a solenoid (not shown).

  In this embodiment, when the solenoid is turned off, the blocker is turned off. When the blocker is turned off, the movable block portion 119 is retracted into the opening / closing portion 102, and the shielding plate portion 120 is pulled into the opening / closing portion 102. It is in the state that it was. When the blocker is OFF, the lower second exit 108 is open, and the game medal falls toward the second exit 108 without being directed to the first exit 107 and is guided to the second exit 108, It is returned to the tray 17.

  On the other hand, when the solenoid is ON, the blocker is ON. When the blocker is ON, the movable block portion 119 moves forward toward the main body 101 as shown in FIG. It is in a state of protruding into 105. When the blocker is ON, the lower second outlet 108 is closed by the shielding plate 120, and is guided to the side of the first outlet 107 through the shielding plate 120. Then, the game medals pass through the selector passage sensor 46 and the insertion sensor 45 toward the first exit 107, and are discharged from the first exit 107 toward the game medal payout exit 16.

Here, reference numeral 121 in FIG. 7 denotes a reject switch provided on the main body 101 to constitute a reject mechanism, and reference numeral 122 denotes a reject switch facing the reject switch 121 when the opening / closing unit 102 is closed. It is a reject receiving part arranged as follows. The function of the reject switch 121 will be described later.
<< Function of game medal selector >>

  Next, the function of the game medal selector 44 will be described. The game medal selector 44 has a game medal selection function, a game medal rejection function, and a game medal detection function. Among them, the game medal selection function is a function for selecting whether or not the inserted game medals are within a receivable size range. Further, the game medal rejection function is a function of returning the game medal without accepting the game medal by the above-described blocker 47 according to the game state, and the game medal detection function detects a game medal that has passed the above-described insertion sensor 45. Function.

  Regarding the above-mentioned game medal unacceptable function, as a game state in which game medals are returned without being received, a storage device (to be described later) stores 50 game medals and a prescribed number (to be described later) of game medals. Is inserted, from the reception of the operation of the start lever 25 after the insertion of the specified number of game medals until the end of the game at that time, the number of game medals inserted and the stored game medals are At the time of refund, in the case of an error, at the time of switching settings and at the time of confirming the settings, there can be mentioned.

  When a game medal within the range of receivable game medal dimensions is inserted from the game medal insertion slot 21, the game medal selector 106 passes through the medal passage 105 from the game medal entrance 106 to the game medal exit (the first exit 107). ) To the game medal payout device 63. When a game medal passes through the selector passage sensor 46 and the insertion sensor 45, a detection signal is sent from each sensor 45, 46 to the main control board 61. The detection signal of the selector passage sensor 46 is used to confirm the number of game medals that have passed through the selector passage sensor 46 by the aforementioned game control program.

  The detection signal of the insertion sensor 45 is used to determine the time and order in which the game medals passed through the selector passage sensor 46 by the above-described game control program. When the detection signals of the selector passage sensor 46 and the insertion sensor 45 are within a specified time and in a specified order and a specified number, it means that the game medal has been normally detected. If the time is equal to or longer than the specified time or is out of the specified order and is not the specified number, an error occurs, and the inserted game medals become invalid. However, if the detection signal is only the output signal of the closing sensor 1 (the closing sensor 1 signal) and there is no detection by the detection signal of the closing sensor 2 (the closing sensor 2 signal), no error occurs.

  Here, the case where only the insertion sensor 1 signal is detected and the insertion sensor 2 signal is not detected includes a case where the game medal returns from the insertion sensor 1 in the opposite direction. Further, a specific mode of such game medal detection will be described later.

  When a deformed game medal is inserted from the game medal insertion slot 21, the game medal stays at the game medal entrance 106. By operating the game medal return button 22 (see FIG. 1), the reject switch 121 is pressed, the open / close portion 102 of the game medal selector 44 is slightly opened, and the game medal payout port 16 is opened. It is returned to the tray 17. When a game medal smaller than the receivable game medal size is inserted from the game medal insertion slot 21, the game medal passes through the game medal entrance 106 and is returned to the tray 17 from the game medal payout opening 16.

In addition, by the above-mentioned game medal refusal function, the above-mentioned blocker 47 is turned off in accordance with the game state, and the movable block portion 119 retreats from the medal passage 105. When a game medal within the receivable range is inserted from the game medal insertion slot 21 at that time, as described above, the game medal passes through the game medal entrance 106, reaches the bent portion 110 of the medal passage 105, and further falls by free fall. After passing through the second exit 108, the game medal is returned to the tray 17 from the game medal payout exit 16.
<Procedure for changing settings>

  In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, a normal operation for changing the setting of the setting unit 62 (see FIG. 4) is performed as follows. First, for example, a game arcade clerk or the like opens the front door portion 11 of the slot machine 10 in a power-off state (see FIGS. 1 and 2). When the front door 11 is opened, a predetermined key is inserted into the lock 23 (see FIG. 1) of the front door 11 which is locked in the closed state, and the key is unlocked in the unlocking direction. (For example, counterclockwise).

  Further, the setting door provided in the setting unit 62 shown in FIG. 4 is opened, and although not shown, the setting key cylinder into which the setting key is inserted can be accessed. Also, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder, and the setting key is rotated (ON) in the ON direction (for example, clockwise). Then, the power switch 72 is turned on to supply power to the slot machine 10. Thus, by turning on the power switch 72 while the setting key is being turned on, the setting change device processing (see FIG. 13) described below is performed, and the state of “setting change device operation” is established.

  When power is supplied to the slot machine 10, the set value is displayed on the setting display LED 66 mounted on the main control board 61 (see FIG. 4). A so-called 7-segment display is used for the setting display LED 66. Further, in this embodiment, the setting display LED 66 displays any one of the set values (here, six from “1” to “6”) that is an integer value within a predetermined range. The value becomes visible through the transparent main board case 65.

  When the setting / reset button 69 (see FIG. 4) is pressed in such a state in which the setting change device operates, the display of the set value changes. In this embodiment, each time the set / reset button 69 is pressed, the display of the set value is incremented by one step. For example, when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on at the setting 1 (the setting value is 1) and the setting / reset button 69 is operated once, the setting 2 is set. Thereafter, each time the set / reset button 69 is pressed, the display of the set value changes in the ascending order of “2”, “3”,.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the highest degree of advantage for the player is the setting value 6, which is the highest setting value, and the lower the value of the setting value, the lower the degree of advantage. When the set / reset button 69 is operated once with the set value 6 being the highest set value described above, the setting 1 is set as the lowest set value. Further, in a situation where the value displayed on the setting display LED 66 is the set value intended for selection, a game clerk or the like operates the above-described start lever 25 (see FIG. 1) to turn the start switch (not shown). By turning ON, the set value is determined.

  As described above, when the setting / reset button 69 is pressed, the mode of the change related to the display of the set value is not limited to the one in which the display of the set value is incremented by one step. May be decremented step by step and change in descending order. Further, the range of the set value that can be changed by the setting change device processing (see FIG. 13) described later is not limited to the six stages “1” to “6”, but is, for example, the four stages “1” to “4”. It may be.

  Subsequently, the setting key is turned in the OFF direction (for example, counterclockwise direction) (OFF operation), the setting door provided in the setting unit 62 is closed, and the operation of the normal setting change is completed, and the game is possible. (Normal state).

  Here, after the above-described “setting change device operation” status, the status after the operation of the setting / reset button 69 becomes valid can be referred to as “setting value change enabled” status. . This “setting value change is possible” is a state in which the setting value can be changed (selected) by operating the setting / reset button 69.

  Further, a state in which the set value is determined by the operation of the start lever 25 (lever operation) after “the set value is being changed” can be referred to as a “set value determined” state. When the set value is to be changed, the setting / reset button 69 is operated as described above in the "setting value is being changed" and the start lever 25 is operated in a state where the set value is reached. The setting value is confirmed. Then, in the situation of “set value confirmation”, even if the set / reset button 69 is operated, the display of the set value does not change.

Further, a state of waiting for the setting key to be turned off after the above-mentioned “setting value determination” can be referred to as a “waiting for setting value determination” state. Even in the "waiting for setting value determination" situation, it is impossible to change the setting value by operating the setting / reset button 69. Further, in the present embodiment, the state in the setting change operation can be divided into a first state and a second state. When the power is turned on in a state where the setting key is turned on, the state shifts to the first state related to the setting change, and when the start lever 25 is operated thereafter, the state shifts from the first state to the second state. Further, when the setting key is turned off in the second state related to the setting change, the second state ends.
<Procedure for performing a game and processing when a game medal is inserted>

  Next, a procedure for performing a game and a process for inserting a game medal will be described. In the processing at the time of inserting the game medal, when the game medal selector 44 (see FIG. 6) is in the game medal receiving state (the state in which the game medal can pass), the game medal is inserted from the game medal slot 21 (see FIG. 1). Can be input. Here, "insertion of a game medal" is synonymous with "setting of the number of bets", and "setting of the number of bets" is synonymous with "betting". When a game medal is inserted, the above-mentioned insertion number display LED is turned on in accordance with the insertion number, and the start lever 25 can be effectively operated by inserting a predetermined number of game medals. When the start lever 25 can be effectively operated, processes such as winning lottery based on the operation of the start lever 25, freeze lottery (a lottery for a freeze effect to be described later), and updating of the winding drum driving state can be executed. Become like Note that the game medal is used as a game medium, and the game medium is not limited to the game medal, but may be a game ball or electronic data.

  In addition, when the game medal is inserted more than the maximum specified number for each game state, subsequent game medals are stored in the storage device. The storage device has a function of storing a predetermined number of game medals (here, 50) under the control of the slot machine 10. However, when the number of stored game medals exceeds the maximum number of 50, the game medal selector 44 is in a game medal return state, and the game medals inserted from the game medal slot 21 are paid by the game medal. It is returned to the tray 17 from the outlet 16 (see FIG. 1). The storage device is also called “credit”, and specifically refers to a device that electrically stores (stores in RWM) game medals.

  Regarding the rotation of the torso, the player can rotate the torso by operating the start lever 25 and operating the torso rotating device 54 after inserting a prescribed number of game medals. However, in a state where one of the settlement button, the stop buttons 24L to 24R, the one-sheet insertion button, and the three-sheet insertion button is operated, even if the start lever 25 is operated, the turning drums 51L to 51R cannot be rotated. .

  When the start lever 25 is operated, the rotating drums 51L to 51R start accelerating rotation, and when a predetermined number of rotations is reached (here, 79.90 rotations / minute), a constant speed state is set. When the start lever 25 is operated, the game medal selector 44 enters a game medal return state. If the predetermined time (4.1 seconds in this case), which is the minimum game time (shortest game time), has not elapsed since the rotating drums 51L to 51R started rotating in the previous game, even if the start lever 25 is operated. , The rotating drums 51L to 51R do not rotate. The torso 51L to 51R start to rotate after 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the torso started to rotate in the previous game. However, in the case of a game stand-by by a game effect (freeze effect or the like) as described later, it is also possible to control so that the torso starts rotating after the game stand-by ends. Here, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, management of the minimum game time is performed in various modes according to the situation, which will be described later.

  When it is detected that the rotating bodies 51L to 51R start rotating and all of the rotating bodies 51L to 51R are rotating normally (here, rotation at a constant speed and not out of step), the stop buttons 24L to 24R are operated. Is ready to accept. However, when it is not detected that all of the rotating drums 51L to 51R are rotating normally, the operation of the stop buttons 24L to 24R does not become a state in which the operation of the stop buttons 24L to 24R can be accepted until the rotation is performed normally. The game medals inserted from the game medal insertion slot 21 after the start lever 25 is operated and before all the rotating drums 51L to 51R stop are returned to the tray 17 from the game medal payout opening 16.

  In stopping the rotation of the rotating drum, the rotating drums 51L to 51R can be stopped by arbitrarily selecting the rotating rotating drums 51L to 51R and operating the corresponding stop buttons 24L to 24R. However, if any of the clearing button, the start lever 25, the stop button corresponding to the already-turned torso, the one-sheet insertion button, or the three-sheet insertion button is operated, the rotation is performed even if the stop button is operated. The middle torso cannot be stopped. Note that some of the buttons (main buttons) managed by the main control board 61 can be operated (operation is enabled) depending on the combination. Then, a combination of a button or switch that can be operated (operation becomes valid) and a button or switch that cannot be operated (operation becomes invalid) can be arbitrarily determined. For example, a combination mode is exemplified in which any one stop button cannot be operated while any one stop button is operated, but any stop button can be operated while the start lever 25 is operated (after the operation). be able to.

  When the stop buttons 24L to 24R are operated, the corresponding torso stops within a predetermined time (here, 190 ms). Similarly, any of the remaining rotating torso is stopped by operating the stop button corresponding to the arbitrarily selected rotating body. When the stop button is continuously operated, even if the remaining stop buttons are operated, the corresponding torso does not stop. After operating the start lever 25, the rotating drums 51L to 51R do not stop unless the stop buttons 24L to 24R are operated. However, when a freeze effect is being performed, the rotating torso can be stopped without operating the stop buttons 24L to 24R.

  In the display determination of the symbol combination, when all of the turning drums 51L to 51R stop, the display determination of the symbol combination related to the winning or the operation of the accessory is performed on the activated line corresponding to the prescribed number of the insertion. However, when the start lever 25 or any of the stop buttons 24L to 24R is continuously operated at the time of the third stop, which is the third stop, after the operation is released, the winning or operation on the activated line corresponding to the specified number is performed. The display determination of the symbol combination is performed. In addition, the “display determination of the symbol combination” and the “display determination” are such that the main CPU 81 detects the stopped symbol and directly determines what the stopped symbol is (see so-called ), For example, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the control of the rotating drums 51L to 51R. If there is no abnormality, it is determined that the symbol display is performed properly, and the symbol stop is performed normally. It means that the subsequent processing is proceeded as if it were done. Here, although not shown, the specified number that can be inserted in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is two in the game when the accessory is activated, and three in the other games, and the activated line is There are three lines of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the torso display unit 15 (see FIG. 1). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to adopt an effective line having only one line in the middle stage, or a line having five lines including diagonally rising rightward and diagonally rising leftward. When the combination of the symbols related to the winning is displayed on the activated line corresponding to the specified number, the control in the corresponding case is executed, and the combination of the symbols related to the accessory operation or the accessory continuous operation device is displayed. When the combination is performed, the control in the case where the combination of symbols related to the accessory operation or the accessory continuous operation device is displayed is executed.

  When the combination of the symbols related to the winning is displayed, the game medals of the number corresponding to the combination of the symbols related to the winning for each prescribed number are paid out and acquired by the player. The game medals to be obtained are stored in the storage device described above. However, when the number of stored game medals exceeds 50, the number of acquired medals is paid out from the game medal payout exit 16 to the tray 17. The game medals inserted from the game medal slot 21 during the acquisition of the game medals are returned to the tray 17 from the game medal payout opening 16. When all the game medals of the number corresponding to the winning combination of symbols for each specified number have been obtained, the game medal selector 44 enters the game medal receiving state when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, the above-described processing at the time of inserting the game medal is executed. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of game medals that can be obtained by one winning is not exceeded.

  When a combination of symbols related to the operation of the accessory is displayed, a process corresponding to the corresponding accessory is executed. In this embodiment, as a character (as a role to be drawn), a so-called ordinary character, a first-class special motorized character, a second-class special motorized character, and a consecutive character related to the first-class special motorized character There is no pattern corresponding to the combination of symbols in which each of the actuation devices will be activated, but the combination of symbols in which the replay will be activated, and the continuation of the official goods relating to the first-class special character There is a combination of symbols that will actuate the actuator. Then, when a combination of symbols corresponding to these is displayed, the corresponding process is executed.

  On the other hand, when the symbols related to winning and operation are not displayed, the game medal selector 44 enters a game medal receiving state. Then, the above-described processing at the time of inserting the game medal is executed.

  Next, a description will be given of a combination of symbols related to winning for each specified number and the number of game medals that can be obtained when the combination of symbols is displayed. The combination of symbols related to winning and the number of game medals that can be obtained correspondingly are determined in advance for each prescribed number. A game medal cannot be obtained without displaying a combination of symbols related to winning. Further, the combination of the symbols related to the winning is not displayed without the condition device related to the winning being operated.

  Then, the combination of symbols related to winning and the number of game medals obtained when the accessory and the continuous actuation device of the accessory are not operated are determined only when the specified number is three, and the combination of symbols related to winning (one symbol or A predetermined number is defined for each acquired number as the number of (including the case where only two symbols are specified). Furthermore, the combination of symbols related to winning and the number of game medals obtained when the first-class special role is activated are determined only when the specified number is two, and the combination of symbols related to winning (only one symbol or two symbols) As a number, a predetermined number is defined for each acquired number. The combination of the symbols related to these winnings and the specific relationship with the number of winnings will be described later.

  Next, a description will be given of a combination of symbols related to the operation for each specified number. The combination of symbols related to the replay, the accessory, and the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is determined in advance for each specified number. A condition combination relating to the operation of the replay, the role of the character and the continuous operation of the character is not activated (when not operated), and the combination of the symbols relating to the operation of the replay, the role of the character and the continuous operation of the character is displayed. It is not going to be.

  Combinations of symbols and operation names related to operation when the accessory and the accessory continuous operation device are not operated are defined only for the prescribed number of three, and a combination of symbols related to the operation (only one symbol or 2 symbols) In this embodiment, eight types are provided as the number of symbols (including only the symbols defined). The specific relationship between these operation names and symbol combinations will be described later. Then, when the combination of symbols related to the operation is displayed, the game control corresponding to the operation name is executed thereafter.

  Next, a description will be given of a combination of symbols that can be played again, an effect when the combination of symbols is displayed, and a process when the combination of symbols is displayed. When all of the spinning cylinders 51L to 51R stop, if the combination of symbols displayed on the activated line is a combination of symbols related to the replay, the replay is activated. Further, the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a game in which the probability that the condition device related to the re-game will operate varies.

  The probability of the probability that the condition device relating to the replay will be activated is changed when the condition device relating to the operation of the continuous actor device relating to the special special class 1 is actuated, and when the condition device relating to the operation of the special device relating to the first class is activated. This is when the combination of the symbols for which the operating device is to be operated is displayed on the activated line, and when the operation of the accessory continuous operating device relating to the first special special item is completed. As a process in the case where a combination of symbols that can be played again is displayed, the same number of game medals as the previous game are automatically inserted, and the start lever 25 becomes operable. A game medal inserted from the game medal insertion slot 21 after the symbol combination relating to the replay is displayed is stored in the storage device when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, thereafter, similarly to the above-described normal time (here, in the case other than the replay), the control regarding the rotation of the rotation of the trunk, the control regarding the stop of the rotation of the rotation of the rotation, and the control regarding the display determination of the combination of the rotation of the rotation of the rotation of the rotation. Is executed.

  Next, the first-class special accessory will be described. When the continuous actuating device for the first special special item is operated, the first special special item at the same time as the continuous actuating device for the first special special item is operated. In addition, during the operation of the continuous actuating device for the first special special feature, if the operation of the first special special feature is completed, the operation of the continuous actuating device for the first special specialty immediately ends. A special character operates again. When the first-class special accessory is activated as described above, the processing at the time of inserting the game medal and the rotation of the spine are performed in the same manner as in the above-described normal state (here, in the case other than the game relating to the first-class special accessory). The game is controlled by the control.

  Furthermore, in controlling the rotation of the rotating drum, the player can arbitrarily select the rotating rotating drum and operate the corresponding stop button to stop the rotating drum. However, if any of the clearing button, start lever, stop button corresponding to the already stopped torso, one-sheet insertion button, or three-sheet insertion button is operated, even if the stop button is operated, it is rotating. Can not stop the torso. When the stop buttons 24L, 24C, and 24R corresponding to the first to third barrels 51L to 51R are operated, the rotation of the corresponding barrel is performed within a predetermined time (190 ms in this case), as in the above-described case. Stop.

  When any one of the stop buttons is continuously operated, even if the remaining stop buttons are operated, the corresponding torso is not stopped. After operating the start lever 25, the rotating torso does not stop unless the stop button is operated. Then, as for the display determination of the symbol combination, the control of the display determination of the combination of the torso is executed in the same manner as in the normal state described above. In the present embodiment, after the operation of the stop button is effectively received, a standby time of about 200 ms (also referred to as a rotation stop reception standby time) is provided until the next stop button is effectively received. I have. That is, when all the reels (51L to 51R) are rotating, for example, after the left stop button (the first stop button 24L) is operated, the middle or right stop button (the second stop button 24C or the second stop button 24C after 200 ms). 3 stop button 24R) can be accepted.

  Regarding the end of the operation of the first-class special bonus, the first-class special bonus is based on the condition that the specified number of games has been completed or the number of winnings has reached the specified number. When at least one of the operation termination conditions is satisfied, the operation is terminated.

Next, the accessory continuous operation device according to the first kind special accessory will be described. In the game in which all the torso cylinders are stopped in the game when the continuous actuating device related to the special special class 1 is not operated, the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line is the consecutive consecutive special characters related to the special special class 1 If it is a combination of symbols related to the operation of the operation device, the game related to the above-described first-class special accessory is executed. The trigger for ending the operation of the accessory continuous operation device according to the first special special occasion is when the number of game medals acquired exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 465). After that, as in the above-described normal case, the process may shift to the game medal insertion process.
<Game production>

As the above-mentioned game production, there is typically a freeze production. This freeze effect is to delay the progress of the game by suspending it for a predetermined period, and in this sense, it can also be called a delayed effect. Furthermore, freeze effects can be classified and grasped as follows. In other words, the freeze effect can be divided into one in which the player can easily recognize the execution of the freeze effect and one in which the player cannot recognize (or hardly recognize) the execution of the freeze effect. Among them, those that can easily recognize the execution of the freeze effect include those that do not respond to the operation of the start lever 25 and those that respond but are different from the operation mode of the reel in a normal game. There is a reel effect (turning drum effect) for operating the torso, and the like. Examples of a device that does not cause the rotating drum to respond to the operation of the start lever 25 include a device in which the rotating drum does not start operating even when the start lever 25 is operated, a device that requires a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) to start operating, and the like. .
<Main operation on main control board>

  Next, main operations of the main control board 61 functioning as main control means of the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 11 and subsequent drawings. First, the main control board 61 is configured such that the main CPU 81 executes, for example, the first control program stored in an internal ROM of the main CPU 81 or an external ROM (main ROM 82) mounted on the main control board 61. Based on a second control program (described later), random number extraction, control of various devices, and the like are performed using a built-in RWM of the main CPU 81 or an external RWM (main RWM 83) mounted on the main control board 61. To do.

  Further, the main control board 61 issues commands (“main command”, “sub control command”, “sub main Command, etc.). Then, power is supplied to the main control board 61 from the power supply unit 64 described above. Here, for convenience of illustration, external ROMs and RWMs are described with reference numerals 82 and 83, but in the following description, unless otherwise specified, the ROMs 82 and RWMs 83 are built-in to the main CPU 81. It is used as a generic term for external ones.

Here, as the above-mentioned random number lottery, the lottery lottery of the replaying game, the role-playing device, the role-acting device, the effect lottery such as the freeze lottery, the AT lottery relating to the execution of the AT (assist time), etc. are exemplified. it can. The main control means has a concept including a main CPU 81 and peripheral devices such as a main ROM 82 and an RWM 83 which realize various functions of the main control board 61 in cooperation with the main CPU 81, in addition to the main control board 61. It is. Furthermore, the terms “lottery” and “lottery” are used as appropriate, and these terms have the same meaning.
<Relationship between first control and second control>

  Next, the first control and the first control program and the second control and the second control program described above will be described. FIG. 11 shows an example of a memory map of the main CPU 81. The memory map in FIG. 11 shows an address space from “0000H” to “FFFFH”. Of these, the space from "0000H" to "2FFFH" is allocated to the internal ROM, and the space from "F000H" to "F3FFH" is allocated to the internal RWM.

  Further, in a space from “FE00H” to “FEBFH”, a register area (built-in register area) for a register built in each circuit in the main CPU 81 is allocated. By causing the main CPU 81 to execute an instruction to access these addresses, it is possible to execute access to the corresponding hardware.

  The configuration of the aforementioned built-in ROM (0000H to 2FFFH) can be divided into a first ROM area and a second ROM area. Of these, the first ROM area is an area mainly for controlling the progress of the game. Further, the second ROM area is an area for mainly controlling processing related to a situation different from the normal progress of the game, such as an error-related situation.

  The first ROM area has a first control area (from "0000H" to "11FAH") and a first data area (from "1200H" to "1D9EH") shown on the right side in the drawing. The second ROM area has a second control area (from "2000H" to "22E4H") and a second data area (from "22E5H" to "2346H") also shown on the right side in the figure. .

  Further, the second control area has an unused area (1D9FH to 1FFFH) interposed between the second control area and the first data area. The last address (22E4H) of the second control area and the start address (22E5H) of the second data area are continuous. After the last address (2346H) of the second data area, the unused area (2347H to 2FBBFH) is used. ) And management areas (2FC0H to 2FFFH).

  In the present embodiment, the first ROM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second ROM area. For example, regarding the first ROM area, the unused area is not included, and only the first control area and the first data area are included. Similarly, the unused area is not included in the second ROM area. This relationship is established even when the data area is composed of only two data areas. Note that the memory map shown in FIG. 11 is an example, and the number of bytes in each area and the presence or absence of an unused area can be variously changed.

  The configuration of the aforementioned built-in RWM (F000H to F3FFH) can be divided into a first RWM area and a second RWM area. Of these, the first RWM area is an area (hereinafter referred to as a used area) in which information (game data) based mainly on the progress of the game is written and stored as needed, or the written information is further updated. ). In addition, the second RWM area is an area for storing information based on processing that is different from the normal progress of the game, such as error-related processing (may be referred to as an out-of-use area). It can be said that the first RWM area is an RWM area used in the first control, and the second RWM area is an RWM area used in the second control.

  The first RWM area has a first work area (from “F000H” to “F14AH”) and a first stack area (from “F1D7H” to “F1FFH”) shown on the right side in the drawing. Further, the second RWM area has a second work area (from “F210H” to “F21EH”) and a second stack area (from “F3F3H” to “F3FFH”) also shown on the right side of the drawing. . Here, it is also possible to determine the second RWM area so as to start from F200H.

  The first stack area is used when a program related to the first control needs to store data internally, and the second stack area is used for a program related to the second control. Is an area used when data needs to be stored internally. In the first stack area and the second stack area, for example, return address information (return address data) stored at the time of transition to the subroutine is written at any time according to the situation of the game. Note that the memory map shown in FIG. 11 is an example, and the number of bytes in each area and the like can be variously changed.

  An unused area (16 bytes of F200H to F20FH) having a predetermined size is provided between the first stack area and the second work area. This unused area may be required. Further, unused areas (F14BH to F1D6H, F21FH to F3F2H) having a predetermined size are provided between the first work area and the first stack area and between the second work area and the second stack area. ing. It is conceivable that these unused areas are not required.

  The first RWM area has a larger capacity than the second RWM area. In the present embodiment, a set of the first work area and the first stack area is a first RWM area, and a set of the second work area and the second stack area is a second RWM area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the first stack area is not included in the first RWM area, and the second stack area is not included in the second RWM area. In this case, for example, the first RWM area may be allocated to the space from “F000H” to “F14AH”, and the second RWM area may be allocated to the space from “F210H” to “F21EH”. It is.

Here, with respect to the ROM mounted on the main control board, it is preferable that an unused area (unfilled area) is not provided in order to prevent a program or the like modified by an illegal act from being written. It is. To do this, for example, it is conceivable to fill all unused areas with zeros and fill the used areas with younger addresses (small numerical values) and write them. In the present embodiment, all bits of the unused area are “0”, and in the area other than the unused area, any one of the bits is “1” (they are no longer “0”). There).
<Trigger and scope of RWM initialization>

Next, the triggers and ranges of the initialization of the first RWM area and the second RWM area will be described. First, the trigger and range of the initialization of the first RWM area are determined in the present embodiment as the following (1) to (3) according to the state of the power interruption recovery.
(1) When the power-off recovery cannot be executed normally when the setting change device is operating Data 0 is set in the first RWM area (“F000H” to “F1FFH”).
(2) When the setting change device is operating, except when the power-off recovery cannot be executed normally. In the first RWM area (“F000H” to “F1FFH”), set value data, an interrupt counter, a built-in random number processing random number, Data 0 is set in a range (“F008H” to “F1FFH”) excluding the soft random number initial value and the RT state number.
(3) In case of power-off recovery The work area (first work area) of the first RWM area (“F000H” to “F1FFH”) and the area excluding the maximum usage amount of the first stack area (“F14BH” to “F1D6H”) ") Is set to data 0.

Subsequently, the trigger and range of the initialization of the second RWM area will be described.
(1) When the setting change device is in operation Data 0 is set in the second RWM area (for example, “F200H” to “F3F5H”) excluding the stack usage amount when the setting change device is in operation.
(2) In the case of power-off recovery The work area (second work area) of the second RWM area (for example, “F200H” to “F3FFH”) and the area excluding the maximum usage amount of the second stack area (for example, “F200H” to Data 0 is set in “F20FH” and “F21FH” to “F3F2H”.

  Note that the first work area can be referred to as, for example, a “work area of a use area”. Furthermore, the first RWM area only needs to include the first work area. For example, from the start address of the first work area to the last address of the first stack area (in the example of FIG. 11, unused F14BH to F1D6H are not used). Region (including the region) may be the first RWM region. Further, the same applies to the second RWM area. For example, the area from the start address of the second work area to the last address of the second stack area (including the unused area of F21FH to E3F2H in the example of FIG. 11) is defined as the second RWM area. Is also good.

  Here, for the first control area, the first data area, the second control area, and the second data area, which are the use areas for the ROM data, for example, “the writing is not performed during the game” Region "or the like. In addition, the first work area, the first stack area, the second work area, and the second stack area can be referred to as, for example, “an area where writing can be performed during a game” based on the use.

  By arranging the area of the built-in ROM and the area of the built-in RWM via the unused area (3000H to EFFFH) as described above, the “area where writing is not performed during a game” and the “game In the RWM, a region in which writing can be performed can be clearly distinguished structurally (and on an address).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first data area is arranged after the first control area 1, and thereafter, the second control area 2 and the second data area continue across the unused area (1D9FH to 1FFFH). Is arranged. In addition, the first work area, the first stack area, the second work area, and the second stack area are arranged with an unused area therebetween. Therefore, both the “area where writing is not performed during the game” and the “area where writing is possible during the game” are classified without mixing according to the distinction between the first control and the second control. It can be arranged in the state where it was done.

  Note that the distinction between the first control and the second control can be referred to, for example, as “control distinction”, “control classification”, “control type”, or “control classification”. Also, a first control area and a non-second control area, a first data area and a second data area, a first work area and a second work area 2, or a set of a first stack area and a second stack area, It can be regarded as the same type of information (data) between different control sections, and it can be said that each of these sets has the same data type.

  In this embodiment, the same data type (the first control area and the second control area, or the first work area and the second work area) between the different control sections as described above is adjacent to each other. It can be said that the area arrangement is performed without any problem.

  In the present embodiment, an unused area is provided between the first stack area and the second work area in the area of the built-in RWM that is an “area where writing can be performed during a game”. In the area of the built-in RWM, areas of different control divisions (first control and second control) are arranged without being adjacent to each other and without being mixed via an unused area.

  Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when control is performed according to the first control program, writing (such as updating) to the second RWM area is not performed, and control is performed according to the second control program. Is performed, writing (such as updating) to the first RWM area is not performed. However, for example, when control is performed in accordance with the first control program, referring to (confirming, etc.) data in the second RWM area may be performed, and control is performed in accordance with the second control program. In some cases, referring to (confirming, etc.) data in the first RWM area may be performed.

  Also, as described later, when returning to the first control after the transition from the first control to the second control, or when returning to the second control after the transition from the second control to the first control, The contents of the registers are kept the same when returning.

  According to the area arrangement and handling of the RWM as described above, for example, the same data type between different control sections such as the first work area according to the first control and the second work area according to the second control is used. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the corresponding data is stored in an adjacent area or address. For this reason, for example, even if a fraudulent third party searches stored data by tracing the address of the RWM in ascending or descending order to search for predetermined data generated during the game, the necessary data is required. Cannot be detected efficiently.

  That is, it is the first work area and the second work area that store various winning combinations and error information in the game. For this reason, even if a third party tries to find the first work area or the second work area by tracing the addresses in ascending or descending order, for example, there are unused areas and stack areas for storing return addresses before and after. Therefore, it is not possible to immediately reach the first work area or the second work area.

  Further, even if an attempt is made to shift the detection destination from the first work area to the second work area (or from the second work area to the first work area), the target work area is immediately determined due to the presence of the unused area or the first stack area. Cannot be reached. As a result, it is possible to delay access to information necessary for an illegal act, and it is possible to prevent or deter illegal acts.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the program code existing in the first control area and accessed by the main CPU 81 and the program code existing in the second control area and accessed by the main CPU 81 are separated on the memory map. (In a non-consecutive address arrangement). Further, since the unused area (1D9FH to 1FFFH) is sandwiched between the first control area and the second control area, the arrangement of both program codes is visually clarified on the program source code or the dump list. It is possible to cut it. And even by such division, it is possible to prevent fraud.

  Further, in this embodiment, writing of data to the RWM is performed only in the RWM area defined for the control section being executed. In other words, between the first control and the second control, in a predetermined case, the transition of the control section is performed, and in the situation where the first control is performed, the data on the second work area and the second stack area are stored. Writing and data updating are not performed, and data writing and data updating for the first work area and the first stack area are not performed in the state where the second control is being performed.

  Then, writing of data in each control section is performed only in a work area or a stack area corresponding to the control section in the control section without shifting to another control section. Therefore, the first control and the second control can be clearly separated from each other in the processing of the main CPU 81, thereby making it possible to suppress fraud and detect the fraud early.

The area (0000H to 2FFFH) of the built-in ROM is divided into an area related to the first control (0000H to 1D9EH) and an area related to the second control (2000H to 22E4H). Then, by performing the control process by shifting between the first control program and the second control program, it is possible to perform the game control while clearly separating the first control and the second control.
<Processing when power is turned on in the main control board>

  Next, the processing at the time of power-on in the main control board will be described. When power is supplied to the main CPU 81 of the main control board 61 via the power supply unit 64, the program code stored in the above-mentioned built-in ROM (see FIG. 11) at an address (first control area) of “0000H” is obtained. It is executed in order. The main CPU 81 sets the Q register to “F000H” based on the data in the ROM area and the RWM area related to the first control.

  Next, the main CPU 81 executes the function setting of the main control based on the data in the ROM area and the RWM area related to the first control. Further, the main CPU 81 calculates a checksum based on the data in the ROM area and the RWM area related to the first control, checks the first RWM and the second RWM (for example, holds the calculated checksum and the checksum area in the checksum area). It is checked whether or not the data stored in the built-in RWM is correctly retained by the power-off / power-off recovery based on the checksum data thus performed, and power-off recovery data is generated.

  Referring to FIG. 12, when the power of the main control board 61 is turned on to the main CPU 81, the power-on processing shown in FIG. 12 (“program start processing”, “power-on processing”, or “power-on processing”) is performed. And so on.). In the process at power-on, an initial value is set in a predetermined register (S1). In the register initialization process, an initial value is set in a register built in the main CPU 81. The contents of the setting include the setting of the communication speed of the serial communication circuit provided in the main CPU 81, the setting of the interrupt type (mode), the setting of the parity given to the command to be transmitted, and the like. Further, in the present embodiment, only one maskable interrupt is used among various available interrupt types as the interrupt type. In the parity setting, even parity is used.

  Subsequently, a maskable interrupt is set (S2), and access to the RWM is permitted (S3). Further, a built-in random number is set (S4), and an RWM check is performed. In this RWM check, a check sum calculation (S5) and a power-off processing completed flag indicating that the power-off processing has been completed are used to determine whether or not the backup at the time of the previous power-off is normal. Power-off recovery data is generated. In the above-described calculation of the checksum (S5), the checksum is obtained for the same storage area range (here, “F000H” to “F3FFH” of the built-in RWM in FIG. 11) as the RWM checksum in the power-off processing (described later). Execute

  In the calculation of the checksum (S5), after the calculation processing, it is determined whether or not the calculation has been completed for the entire target range (S6), and if the calculation for the entire range has not been completed (S6). (S6: NO), and return to the calculation process (S5). Then, the calculation of the checksum is repeated until the calculation for the entire target range is completed. Here, the determination as to whether or not the calculation for the entire target range has been completed may be performed after the calculation for each address, or may be performed after the calculation for each predetermined range.

  After the calculation of the checksum for all the target ranges is completed (S6: YES), the power-off recovery data is stored in the register (S7). Here, the power-off recovery data differs depending on whether any of the power-off execution processing flag and the RWM checksum is abnormal and when both are normal. Further, the data of the input port 1 is stored in the register (S8). Here, the data of the port (input port 1) to which the designated switch signal of the next step (S9) is input is obtained.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the designated switch is ON (S9). The designated switch indicates three switches, a door switch, a setting door switch, and a setting key switch. Then, the state of the door switch signal, the set door switch signal and the set key switch signal is checked (S9), and if all the switch signals are ON (S9: YES), the setting change device processing described later (see FIG. 13) I do. Here, in the present embodiment, the case where all the switch signals are ON means that the above-mentioned door (front door unit 11) is open, the setting door of the setting unit 62 (see FIG. 4) is open, and the setting key switch 68. Is rotating in the ON direction, and when these three conditions are satisfied, the determination result in S9 is “YES”. Note that the setting door switch may be excluded from the designation switch, and the setting change device may be activated when the two switches, the door switch and the setting key switch, are ON.

  For example, when the door (front door unit 11) is closed (when the door switch is in the closed state), the setting door of the setting unit 62 (see FIG. 4) is in the open state, and the setting key switch 68 is ON. Even if the rotation is performed in the direction, the determination in S9 is not “YES”. In such a case, since there is a possibility that an illegal operation has been performed, the determination result is not set to “YES” so as not to shift to a setting change device process (also referred to as a “setting change process”) to be described later. Has become. When the setting door switch 67 (see FIG. 4) is not provided, the case where all the switch signals are ON means that the state of the door switch signal and the setting key switch signal is checked in the determination processing of S9. Is ON.

  If the condition is satisfied in the determination (S9) as to whether or not the above-described designation switch is ON, and the result is "YES", it is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data is abnormal (S10). ). If the determination (S10) relating to the power-off return data is affirmative and the determination is "YES" (the power-off return data is abnormal), a setting change device process described later (see FIG. 13). Move to. If a negative determination is made and the determination is "NO" (the power-off recovery data is not abnormal), it is determined whether the setting change disable flag is ON (S11), and the negative determination is made. If the answer is "NO" (when the setting change disable flag is not ON), the process proceeds to the setting change device process (see FIG. 13).

  Further, in the determination (S11) relating to the setting change disable flag, when affirmative determination is made and "YES" (when the setting change disable flag is ON), confirmation of power-off recovery data described later is performed. Move to the processing (S12). The setting change disable flag is one of the data stored in the RWM, and is a part of the game progress main process (see FIG. 14) described later, from the role drawing process (S60) to the check at the end of the game (S68). Is data indicating that the setting cannot be changed.

  In the determination (S9) as to whether or not the specified switch is ON, if at least one of the switch signals is not ON (S9: NO), or the setting change disable flag is ON. In this case (S11: YES), the process shifts to the process of confirming the power-off recovery data (S12). In the process of confirming the power-off return data (S12), a power-off process (described later) is performed at the time of the previous power-off, and a predetermined RWM area is calculated at the time of the previous power-off. If the checked checksum value is normal, it is determined to be normal; otherwise, it is determined to be abnormal.

In the power-off recovery data confirmation process (S12), if the power-off recovery data is determined to be abnormal (S12: NO), an error display is performed (S13), and an error code corresponding to the acquired number display LED (S13). E1) is displayed, and the operation of the gaming machine is stopped. The E1 error, which is an error at this time, is an error that cannot be canceled unless the setting change device process (see FIG. 13) is executed, and is one of errors that cannot be restored (unrecoverable error) as described later. is there. In the above-described process of confirming the power-off restoration data (S12), when the power-off restoration data is determined to be normal (S12: YES), the process proceeds to the power-off restoration process (see FIG. 21). The power return process (see FIG. 21) will be described later.
<Setting change device processing>

  FIG. 12 shows the setting change device processing described above. In this setting change device processing, the stack pointer is set and the operation of the setting change device is started. Then, as shown in the figure, the predetermined range of the RWM initialization is stored in the register (S21). Here, when the predetermined range for the RWM initialization is set as the “predetermined range”, it is determined that the power-off process has been executed normally. The above-mentioned storage area range (here, addresses F000H to F3FFH in FIG. 11) is set. Further, here, the setting value data relating to the above-described setting value, the RT state number relating to the replay time (RT), and the condition device flag relating to the above-described condition device are not stored as initialization targets. Here, the RT (replay time) is a game state in which the probability of re-game winning is higher than usual, and the RT state number is a number for distinguishing a plurality of RT states having different re-game winning probabilities. . In addition, the set value can be described as defining the theoretical ease of hitting (the player's advantage) as described above. More specifically, the set value differs from the set value, for example, by the difference Thus, it can be explained that the winning probability of the role is different. In addition, the set value may be used in such a mode that the winning probability of the role is the same but the winning probability of another lottery (AT lottery or the like) based on the winning of the role is different.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data is normal (S22), and it is determined whether or not the power-off processing (described later) has been performed normally. The power-off recovery data is stored in a predetermined register after the calculation of the checksum is completed in the above-described power-on processing. If it is determined that the power-off has not been performed normally (S22: NO), the “specific range” to be initialized is set, including the aforementioned set value data, RT state number, and condition device flag. Then, the storage area range including these is stored in a predetermined register (S23). Here, the "specific range" is distinguished from the above-mentioned "predetermined range" in that it is a range including the set value data, the RT state number, and the condition device flag.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the power-off recovery data is normal (S22), it is determined that the power-off has been performed normally (S22: YES), a predetermined register (here, the AF register) is used. Is saved (S24), and the contents of the register (return address) are stored in the first stack area. Then, a transition from the first control to the second control is performed, and RWM initialization 3 (S25), which is a control module related to the above-described second control, is executed. This RWM initialization 3 (S25) is a part of the second control program developed in the second control area. Then, in the RWM initialization 3 (S25), of the RWM area (here, F200H to F3FFH) related to the second control, the stack usage amount at the time of operation of the setting change device (the stack area required at the time of operation of the setting change device) is determined. Excluding RWM areas (F200H to F3F5H) are cleared. The details of the RWM initialization 3 will be described later.

  After the RWM initialization 3 (S25), the AF register is restored (S26), and a transition (return) from the second control to the first control is performed. Then, the timer interrupt is activated by the interrupt activation setting process (S27). In the process of setting the activation of the interrupt (S27), the type of the interrupt and the cycle of the timer interrupt are set. After this processing, the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18), which is the timer interrupt processing, can be executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the period of the timer interrupt is 2.235 ms.

  Subsequently, data indicating "start of setting change" is stored in the register (S28). The data indicating the “setting change start” is a command for notifying the sub-control board 31 that the setting change device processing has been started and is being executed. Further, the process of the control command set 1 (S29) is performed. In this embodiment, the process of the control command set 1 (S29) is a process of the control command set 2. The processing of the control command set 2 performs processing for storing the above-described sub-control command in a ring buffer (transmission buffer) that temporarily stores the sub-control command before transmission. Here, by the processing of the control command set 1 (S29), a sub-control command indicating "setting change start" is set in the ring buffer. The details of the processing of the control command set 2 will be described later.

  Subsequently, it is checked whether the set value is within a predetermined range (S30). If the set value is not in a normal range (in this case, any one of six from "1" to "6") ( (S30: NO) sets 1 to the set value (S31), and shifts to the setting change device operating display process (S31). On the other hand, if the set value is within the normal range (S30: YES), the process proceeds to the setting change device operating display process (S32) without setting the set value (= 1) (S31). Here, in the present embodiment, the normal range of the set value is “1” to “6”, and “0” is not used as the value of the normal range. This is because if an abnormality occurs in the control for some reason, the value may accidentally become “0”, and such a case can be accurately determined as an abnormality.

  In the process of displaying the setting change device in operation (S32), the lamp (LED) during the setting change device process is turned on and the set value is displayed. The “lighting” or “display” performed here is a process of setting data (flag) for “lighting” or “display”. Specifically, the data set here is used to set a timer By a predetermined process (here, the process of LED display in FIG. 18 (S549)) during the interrupt process (see FIG. 18), it is output for driving the setting display LED (66) and the obtained number display LED. In the present embodiment, the set value is displayed on the setting display LED (66), and “−−−” indicating that the setting change device is being operated is displayed on the obtained number display LED.

  Further, a determination process (S33) relating to the setting / reset button signal (setting / reset switch signal) is performed, and the setting / reset button signal is turned from OFF to ON while the door switch signal and the setting door switch signal are ON. If (S33: YES), the process proceeds to a process of updating the set value (S34), otherwise, the process proceeds to a process of determining the start lever 25 (S35). Here, as described above, the setting / reset button (69) related to the above-mentioned setting / reset button signal also uses one button device as the setting button (setting switch) and the reset button (reset switch). Things. Further, based on the rising data of the setting / reset button signal, the determination regarding the setting / reset button signal (S33) is performed.

  In the process of updating the set value (S34), the set value is incremented by one. However, as a result of the addition, if the value exceeds the maximum set value (here, 6), the set value returns to 1. In the process of determining the start lever 25 (S35), when the start lever sensor signal (start sensor signal) has changed from OFF to ON (S35: YES), the process of determining the setting key switch 68 (S36). Then, in other cases (S35: NO), the process proceeds to the determination process (S33) related to the setting / reset button signal.

  In the process of determining the setting key switch 68 (S36), if the setting key switch signal is changed from ON to OFF while the door switch signal and the setting door switch signal are ON (S36: YES), the setting is changed. The process proceeds to the device in-operation display clear process (S37), and in other cases (S36: NO), the process of S36 is repeated. In the process of clearing the display during operation of the setting change device (S37), the lamp is turned off during the process of changing the setting and the display of the set value is terminated. More specifically, the setting display LED is turned off, and “00” is displayed on the acquired number display LED. The “light-off” or “display end” performed here is a process of setting data (flag) for “light-off” or “display end” in the same manner as described above. The set data is driven by a predetermined process (here, the LED process in FIG. 18 (S549)) in the subsequent timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) to drive the setting display LED and the obtained number display LED. Used for

  Subsequently, data indicating "end of setting change" is set in the register (S38). The data indicating the “setting change end” is a command for notifying the sub-control board 31 that the setting change device processing has ended. Further, the processing (S39) of the control command set 1 is performed. The control command set 1 (S39) uses the same control module as the control command set 1 (S29) described above. Then, by the processing of the control command set 1 (S39), a sub-control command indicating “setting change end” is set in the ring buffer. Then, thereafter, the process proceeds to a game progress main process described later (see FIG. 14).

In order to activate the setting change device, it was necessary to turn on a plurality of switches (S9 in FIG. 12). However, when deactivating the setting change device, only the setting key switch was used. Is confirmed (S36 in FIG. 13). That is, it can be said that the condition for terminating the operation of the setting change device is relaxed compared to the condition for starting.
<< Control command set 2 >>

  Next, processing of the control command set 2 performed in the control command set 1 (S29, S39) described above will be described. In the control command set 2, the control command buffer address is set, and the data of the control command write pointer is obtained. Further, a designated address is set, designated address data is obtained, and it is determined whether or not the control command is smaller than “64”.

If the control command is smaller than "64", the control command is set, the control command write pointer is updated, and the process ends. In the process of determining whether or not the control command is smaller than “64”, if the control command is not smaller than “64”, the control command is not set and the control command write pointer is not updated. Finish the process.
<Game progress main processing>

  Next, the game progress main process will be described with reference to FIG. Here, an outline of the game progress main process will be described, and among various control modules used in the game progress main process, main components in the present embodiment will be described later. In the game progress main process, the stack pointer is set (S51), and the following process is performed in the game start set process (S52). That is, in the game start set process (S52), the game state is set.

  That is, in the processing of the game start set (S52), the setting at the time of starting the game is performed. Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, a game standby display start time is set, the drawn-in symbol data is cleared, and the process shifts to an operation state set.

  More specifically, based on the symbol combination stopped and displayed in the previous game, whether the current game is a re-game, or a (One type of BB game) is set. Further, a wait for waiting after the sub-bonus is performed. Here, the sub-bonus is a bonus managed on the side of the above-described sub-control board 31. For example, when a specific replay (specific replay) is won, the sub-bonus is continued over a predetermined number of games thereafter. Game state.

  As a specific example, the symbol “7” is displayed on the winning line in the stage of the effect, the winning state of the specific replay is achieved, and further, the AT (assist time) for 30 games from the winning of the specific replay. A game state in which a profit is provided by setting the state can be given. Waiting after the sub-bonus means waiting time for performing a bonus end demonstration, similar to the bonus (main bonus) managed by the main control board 61 when the AT state ends. . Then, the trigger of the start of the standby time can be set as when 30 games have elapsed since the main control board 61 won the specific replay.

  Subsequently, in the game start set process (S52), although not shown, commands indicating various game information are written in the command buffer. Further, the full detection signal is checked, and if the game medal auxiliary storage 71 is full, an error code (FE) indicating that fact is displayed on the acquired number display LED, and the game is stopped.

  If the game medal auxiliary storage 71 is not full or if the error has been cleared, acceptance of game medal insertion is performed. In the reception of the game medal insertion, when the re-game is not operated, the blocker signal is turned ON (passable state), and the reception of the game medal insertion is started. In the case of the re-game operation, if a game medal can be inserted into the storage device (if the number of credits has not reached the maximum number of 50), the blocker signal is turned ON (medal flow path formation) and the storage device is set. When the insertion of the game medals is not possible, the blocker signal is not turned on, and the operation of automatically inserting the game medals of the number of bets in the previous game is performed. The blocker processing at the time of the replay operation will be described later.

  In the game progress main process, subsequently, a game medal reading process (S53) is executed as shown in FIG. In the game medal reading process (S53), the game medal number data is read, and the presence or absence of the game medal number is checked. After the processing of reading the game medals (S53), the presence or absence of the game medals is checked (S54). If there is no game medal (S54: NO), the display at the time of waiting for the game medal insertion (the medal can be inserted). (S55), and if there is a game medal (S54: YES), the process proceeds to a game medal management process (S56). Here, the presence of a game medal indicates a state in which a game medal is bet set (bet) in order to satisfy a specified number for playing a game.

  In the display process at the time of waiting for the insertion of the game medal (S55), when the setting key switch signal is changed from OFF to ON, the blocker is turned off, and the control command at the time of starting the installation value display is set. Further, the setting value is displayed on the setting display LED until the setting key switch signal changes from ON to OFF. Then, the control command at the end of the set value display is set, and the blocker is turned on. If the game standby display start time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the acquired number display clearing process, and otherwise terminates the process.

  In the game medal management (S56), the process of checking the status of the blocker is performed. In the process of checking the status of the blocker, the process of inserting the game medal based on the inserted game medal, the settlement button, the MAX bet button (three-sheet insertion button) is performed. The processing based on the operation of ()) is performed. This game medal management (S56) will be described later (see FIG. 26). Further, after the game medal management process (S56), a soft random number update 1 (S57), which is a process for updating a soft random number, is performed. In the soft random number update 1 (S57), the soft random number update 2 is performed, and the soft random number update 2 updates the built-in random number processing random number.

  Subsequently, in a start lever check process (S58), a start lever reception check is performed. In other words, although not shown, the input / output sensor abnormality display is performed, and if the input number does not match the specified number, the process is terminated. Further, if the monitoring time when the blocker is ON (the monitoring time when the blocker is ON) has not elapsed, the game start display LED signal is turned off, and the process is terminated. Subsequently, the game start display LED signal is turned ON. Then, when the start lever sensor signal changes from OFF to ON, the process shifts to start lever reception, and otherwise terminates the processing.

  More specifically, the following processing is sequentially performed as a reception check of the start lever 25. That is, the selector passage sensor staying flag indicating whether or not game medals are staying in the selector passage is checked. If the game medals are staying, an error code (CH) corresponding to the acquired number display LED is displayed. Stop the game. In other cases or when the error is cleared, check the insertion sensor abnormality detection data. If an abnormality input is detected, an error code (C0) corresponding to the acquired number display LED is displayed, and the game is stopped. I do. Specific processing for these will be described later.

  Further, in other cases (when an abnormal input is not detected) or when the error is released, the payout sensor abnormality detection data is checked, and if an abnormal input is detected, H0 is displayed on the acquired number display LED. Display and stop the game. Further, in other cases (when an abnormal input is not detected) or when the error is cleared, the overflow detection data is checked. If the game medal auxiliary storage is full, FE is displayed on the acquired number display LED. And stop the game. In other cases (when the game medal auxiliary storage is not full) or when the error is released, the process further proceeds to the following process.

  That is, the number of inserted game medals is compared with the specified number, and when the number matches the specified number, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of determining whether or not to accept the start lever (S59)), and in other cases, It is determined that the start lever cannot be accepted, and the process returns to the game medal reading process (53). Further, in the process (S59) of determining whether or not the start lever is to be accepted, the start lever sensor signal changes from OFF to ON without operating the stop buttons 24L to 24R, the settlement button, and each of the input buttons. In this case, the start lever is accepted, and in other cases, the start lever is not accepted. Then, the blocker 47 of the game medal selector 44 is turned off (the solenoid is turned off), and the game medal selector 44 is set to a return state where the game medal cannot pass.

  If it is determined that the start lever has not been received (S59: NO), the process returns to the game medal reading process (S53), and if the start lever has been received (S59: YES). Then, a built-in random number (hardware random number) is fetched, and the process proceeds to the internal lottery start process (S60), which is a combination lottery process. Here, when it is determined that the start lever is not accepted (S59: NO), the loop processing (S53 to S59) is arranged after the stack pointer is set (S51), and therefore, the stack pointer is set (S51). Is always executed before the loop processing (S53 to S59).

  In the process of starting the internal drawing (S60), the internal lottery process for determining the condition control device (replaying game, winning combination, character, continuous operation device for character), and determining the symbol control number and the like is performed. In the internal lottery process, different winning lottery tables are used depending on the gaming state, and the types of winning numbers (winning combinations) and winning probabilities differ depending on various gaming states and RT states. In addition, a random number obtained by adding a processing random number (here, a software random number) to the above-described internal random number is used as a random number for internal extraction. Further, with respect to the lottery relating to various combinations, the order of the lottery is determined based on the type of the combination. The details of the internal lottery start process (S60) will be described later (see FIG. 15).

  In the processing (S61 to S65) of the turning body management including the turning operation of the turning body (S61), the management from the acceleration of the turning body to the stop is performed. Although not shown, the processing of the torso management (S61 to S65) is also executed in the pseudo game start processing which is the processing for performing the pseudo game described above. In the process of managing the rotating drum (S61 to S65), control of a mechanism related to rotation of the rotating drum is performed, which will be described later.

  In the process of starting the rotation of the rotating drum (S61), a data set for starting the rotation of the rotating drum and inspection of a rotation failure are performed. More specifically, the presence / absence of a cylinder having a data set request (data set request cylinder) is determined, and if there is a data set request cylinder, data is set in the requested cylinder. Further, when a rotation failure is detected in the rotating drum at a constant speed, the request data of the acceleration state set is set for the rotating drum, and the process returns to the determination of the presence or absence of the data set requesting rotating drum. If there is no data set request body, the process proceeds to the soft random number update process 1, which is the control module described above.

  Subsequent to the rotation start processing (S61), the number of shifted frames (retraction points) is created (S62). In the shift frame number creation process (S52), data indicating the shift frame number is created for all the rotating bodies that have not been stopped. More specifically, although not shown, if there is no shift frame number creation request, the process ends. Further, the following processing is performed on all the cylinders for which the shift frame number is requested in the order of the third cylinder (51R), the second cylinder (51C), and the first cylinder (51L).

  First, an RWM address for storing a table search number used for creating the number of shifted frames is stored. Subsequently, the control rotation number is stored in the RWM, and a process of initializing the pull-in points for the number of symbols arranged is performed. Further, control control execution processing is performed, and table set control processing is performed. Further, the control symbol number initialization processing is performed, and the following processing is performed for each control symbol number.

  First, a process of creating a stoppable position is performed. Subsequently, the number of shifted frames is stored in the RWM according to the control body and the control symbol number. Further, the shift frame number creation request is cleared, and the process proceeds to an interrupt waiting process.

  After the process of creating the number of shifted frames (S62), the process shifts to a rotation stop acceptance check process (S63). In the rotation stop acceptance check process (S63), first, all the body sensors are checked for a stop operation check, and if stop acceptance is not possible, the process ends. Further, when any of the output signals (stop button sensor signal) of the stop button sensor corresponding to the rotating body is turned ON, the process proceeds to the process of accepting the stop button. Further, the stop reception information data is set in accordance with the rotation or stop state of the all-round drum, the stop position is determined, and the process proceeds to the all-round drum stop check processing (S64).

  In the process for checking all the cylinder stops (S64), it is checked whether all the cylinders are stopped and the operation of the stop buttons (24L, 24C, 24R) and the start lever 25 has been completed. In the process of checking all the cylinder stops (S64), all the cylinders 51L to 51R are stopped, and the operations of the start lever 25 and the stop buttons 24L to 24R are started at the third stop as described above, for example. It is checked whether the lever 25 or any one of the stop buttons 24L to 24R has been operated properly and the operation has been properly completed.

  In the subsequent all-body stop determination process (S65), if an affirmative determination is made (S65: YES), the process proceeds to the display determination process (S66), and in other cases, the shifted frame number creation process (S66) Return to S62).

  In the display determination process (S66), the following processes are sequentially performed. That is, as a result of the display determination, if the symbol combination display is abnormal, an error code (E5) corresponding to the acquired number display LED is displayed, and the operation of the game is stopped.

  Subsequently, the process shifts to a game medal payout process by winning (S67). In the game medal payout by winning (S67), if there is a game medal payout by winning, the game medal is paid out. Although not shown, when paying out the game medals, a display process for displaying the number of paid out game medals is performed. In the display processing of the number of game medals, each time one game medal is paid out, the value displayed on the display device (here, the stored number display section) is updated.

  More specifically, for payout of game medals by winning and management of the number of payouts at the time of BB operation, first, a control command at the start of game medal payout is set. Subsequently, the number of times of medal payout signal output is set, and if there is no game medal payout number, the process is terminated. Further, the number of obtainable coins at the time of BB operation is updated, the processing described later is performed for the number of payouts, and a control command at the end of payout of game medals is set.

  As the processing related to the payout number, first, the following processing is performed according to the payout destination of the game medals. That is, if the payout to the storage device is possible, after the addition time is waited, the number of stored ones is added, and if the payout to the storage device is impossible, one game medal is paid out. Subsequently, as a process corresponding to the payout number, the acquired number data is incremented by one.

  Next, processing at the end of the game (S68) is performed. In the processing at the time of the end of the game (S68), first, the re-game display LED is turned off. Subsequently, the re-game operation state flag and the winning and re-game condition device numbers are cleared. Further, in the case of BB operation, BB operation management processing is performed, and in the case of RB operation, RB operation management processing is performed. If the bonus operation is not being performed, the process proceeds to the RT state management process.

  Thereafter, an output request at the end of the game is set (S69), the above-described control command set 1 is performed (S70), and the main processing of the game progress is executed again. In addition, even if a prize is generated in the accessory or the continuous operation device, if the combination of the corresponding symbols is not complete, the flags related to the prize are carried over. In addition, the flag relating to the condition device of the replay or the small role is cleared. That is, as the end processing according to the above-mentioned gaming state, RWM clear processing of condition device numbers other than the carryover combination, RT number generation processing, freeze state transition processing, external signal data generation processing, and the like are performed. Be done.

  Subsequently, the internal lottery start process (S60) of the various processes in the game progress main process (S51 to S70) will be described in further detail. As described above, the internal lottery start process (S60) is a process that shifts when the reception of a start lever operation is detected in a situation where a game can be started. As shown in FIG. 15, in the internal lottery start process (S60), the condition device number set (S81), the symbol control number set (S82), the drop-in symbol data set (S83), the control symbol set (S84), and the payout Each processing of the lottery management (S85), the condition device command set (S86), the waiting for the rotation of the rotating drum (S87), and the preparation for the rotation of the rotating drum (S88) are sequentially executed.

  In the condition device number set (S81), first, it is determined whether or not the bonus condition device is operating. If the bonus condition device is not in operation, data indicating the bonus condition device number is stored (S502), and data indicating the winning and replaying condition device number is stored.

  In the above-mentioned processing of the ball-drawing lottery management (S85 in FIG. 15), the data relating to the effect group number is set, the designated number is set, the processing of the main game state management is performed, and the processing of the condition device command set (FIG. The process proceeds to S86 of 15).

  In the processing of the condition device command set (S86 in FIG. 15), as shown in FIG. 16, the interrupt is prohibited (S511), the AF register is saved (S512), and the process proceeds to the second control, and the symbol is transferred. The stop signal output process (S513) is executed. The process of outputting the symbol stop signal (S513), which is performed as the second control, is a process for outputting symbol stop signal data for a trial test, the details of which will be described later (see FIG. 33).

  After the symbol stop signal output process (S513) is completed, the process returns to the condition device command set process (FIG. 16) related to the first control, and the AF register is restored (S514). Further, an interruption is permitted (S515), a command table at the time of start lever reception is set (S516), and the process returns to the calling source.

  In the process of waiting for the rotation of the torso (S87 in FIG. 15), it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned minimum game time has elapsed, and when the minimum game time has elapsed, the data of the minimum game time is stored. Subsequently, the condition device output time is stored, and processing for waiting for command transmission is performed.

  In the process of preparing to start the rotation of the turning body (S88 in FIG. 15), the turning order stop data and the pushing order data are initialized, and the data relating to the turning stop flag and the shift frame number creation request are initialized. Further, data of the number of initialized symbol groups is set, and the symbol control data table 1 is set. In addition, the initialization start RWM address is set, and the stop symbol data is initialized.

  Subsequently, data relating to the output request at the start of the full body rotation is set, and the same control command set 1 as described above is executed. Then, the whole body rotation start bit and the data related to the rotation start preparation state are set, and the data indicating the presence of the rotation start body is set.

  Next, the display determination process (S66) in the above-described game progress main process (see FIG. 14) will be described. FIG. 17 shows the contents of the process of the display determination (S66). In this display determination process, an acquired number display clear process (S401) is executed, and thereafter, various data setting processes (S402, S403) and an E5 error setting process (S404) are executed.

  The above-described acquired number display clear processing (S401) is for clearing the acquired number display data, and is the same processing as the acquired number display clear processing (S339) in the above-described storage and insertion processing (see FIG. 27). It is. Further, the above-mentioned various data setting processes (S402, S403) are performed by setting an RWM address relating to predetermined stop symbol data (S402) and an RWM address relating to the number of control symbol groups and kicking symbol data (S404). It is.

  Here, the kick-out symbol data is symbol data that constitutes a symbol combination that does not correspond to the result of winning combination. The kicking-off symbol data corresponds to, for example, symbol data relating to a part of symbols constituting a symbol combination of BB when not hitting the above-mentioned BB (big bonus).

  Further, a set operation relating to the kicking symbol is performed (S405), and the correlation between the kicking symbol data and the symbol displayed in the game at this time is calculated. Then, it is determined whether or not the displayed symbol corresponds to the kicking symbol (S406). If the kicking symbol is displayed (S406: YES), the process returns to the non-returnable error process (see FIG. 29). Transition. This non-returnable error processing will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the kick symbol is not displayed (S406: NO), the next stop symbol data address is set (S407), and the next kick symbol data address is set (S408). Then, it is determined whether or not the determination according to the number of control symbol groups has been completed (S409). If the determination has been completed (S409: YES), the process proceeds to the one-line display determination process (S421). If the determination according to the number of control symbol groups has not been completed (S409: NO), the process returns to immediately before the calculation process (S405) relating to the kicking symbol.

  In S409, if the determination according to the number of control symbol groups has been completed (S409: YES), the flow shifts to S421 to execute a one-line display determination process. In this one-line display determination process (S421), display determination of one effective line and data set at the time of display are performed. Specifically, the operation type, the symbol combination display flag, the game token payout number data, the payout number buffer, and the winning symbol group are stored in accordance with the symbol combination determined to stop on the activated line.

  Then, the process for the effect display at the time of stopping the full rotation of the body (S422) is performed by the process of displaying the effect at the time of stopping the full rotation of the body (S422). In the effect display processing at the time of stopping the all-round rotation (S422), the apparatus waits until the third stop standby time related to the third stop operation passes, performs the main game state management processing, and stops the all-round rotation. The control command at the time is set, and RWM initialization at the time of stopping the rotation of the body all the time is performed.

  Further, the process proceeds to the input / output sensor error display process (S423), and the input / output sensor error set process is performed, as will be described in detail later. Then, the presence / absence of an error display request is checked. If there is an error display request, an error display of the corresponding error is performed. In other cases, the process ends. When the error is released, the input / output sensor abnormality clear is performed.

  FIG. 57 shows the above-described input / output sensor abnormality display processing (S423 in FIG. 17) more specifically. In the input / output sensor error display processing, as shown in FIG. 57, the interrupt is prohibited (S431), the AF register is saved (S432), and the input / output sensor error set processing related to the second control is performed. Performed (S433). Details of the input / output sensor abnormality setting process (S433) will be described later (see FIG. 36).

  After the input / output sensor abnormality setting process (S433), the AF register is restored (S434), the interruption is permitted (S435), and the error display request data acquisition process is performed (S436). In the error display request data acquisition processing (S436), error display request data is acquired. Then, it is determined whether or not there is error display request data (S437). If there is no error display request data (S437: NO), the process ends. If there is error display request data in S437 (S437: YES), error display processing (S438) is performed. Details of this error display processing (S438) will be described later (see FIG. 24).

Thereafter, the interruption is prohibited (S439), the AF register is saved (S440), and the input / output sensor abnormality clearing process (S441) according to the second control is performed. Details of the input / output sensor abnormality clearing process will be described later (see FIG. 37). After the input / output sensor abnormality clearing process (S441), the AF register is restored (S442), the interrupt is permitted (S443), and the process returns to the first interrupt disabling process (S431).
<Timer interrupt processing in main control board>

  Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. Here, an outline of the timer interrupt process will be described, and among various control modules used in the timer interrupt process, the main ones in the present embodiment will be described later. The timer interrupt process is executed repeatedly at a predetermined cycle (here, 2.235 ms) based on the process at the time of turning on the power shown in FIG. 12 and the activation in the setting change device process (see S27) shown in FIG. It is.

  In this timer interrupt processing, the register value is saved (S541) and the interrupt flag for preventing the duplicate interrupt is cleared (S542) as initialization processing at the start of the interrupt. The register saving process (S541) in the initialization process is for making the register used in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14) usable in the timer interrupt process. is there.

  Subsequently, a power-off process (S543) is executed. In the power-off process (S543), various processes are performed after the determination of the presence / absence of the power-off detection signal. The details will be described later. Furthermore, the interrupt counter is updated (S544), input port data generation (S545), turning drive control (S546), port output (S547), control command transmission (S548), LED display (S549), sub notification data output (S550), the respective processes of timer measurement (S551) are sequentially executed.

  After executing these, as shown in the figure, the processing shifts to error management processing (S552, see FIG. 20). Subsequently, processing of external signal output data management (S759) and processing of external signal output (S760) are sequentially performed. Each of these processes (S759, S760) will be described later.

  Further, the AF register is saved (S761), and the process shifts to the second control to perform a test signal output process (762). This test signal output processing (S762) will be described later (see FIG. 35). Upon completion of the test signal output process (S762), the process returns to the first control, and the AF register is restored (S763). Then, the process of managing the soft random number (S764) is performed, and after the register is restored (S765), the interruption is permitted, and the process ends.

In the following, each process (S543, S545 to 551, and the like) in the timer interrupt process will be described. Here, the power-off process (S543) among the above-described processes will be described first.
<< Power off processing >>

  In the power-off processing (S543), as shown in FIG. 19, it is determined whether or not the previous power-off detection signal is ON (S561), and if it is ON (S561: YES), Input port 0 data is input (S562). Further, it is determined whether or not the power-off detection signal is ON (S563). If it is ON (S563: YES), data of the clear output port address and the number of output ports is set (S564).

  Subsequently, the output ports (0 to 6) are turned off (S565), and the data of the next output port address is set (S566). Further, it is determined whether or not the output has been completed (S567). If the output has been completed (S567: YES), the stack pointer is stored (S568). If the output has not been completed in S567 (S567: NO), the process returns to S565 for turning off the output ports (0 to 6).

  After S568, the power-off processing completed flag is set (S569), the RWM checksum data is cleared (S570), and the initial data for RWM checksum calculation is cleared (S571). Further, the RWM checksum is calculated (S572), and it is determined whether the calculation for all bytes has been completed (S573). Further, if the calculation for all bytes has been completed (S573: YES), the RWM checksum data is set (S574). Then, the RWM access is prohibited (S575), and the process is looped to be in a reset waiting state (S576).

  It should be noted that if the power-off detection signal was not ON last time in S561 (S561: NO), or if the power-off detection signal was not ON in S563 (S563: NO), the process ends. .

The execution of the power-off processing may be performed by a hardware-based method that generates a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) based on the input of a power-off signal indicating a voltage drop to an NMI terminal (not shown) of the main CPU 81, or an interrupt. In the processing, there is a software type that checks a power-off flag set when a voltage drop is detected. In addition, a power-off flag may be set based on a power-off signal input to the NMI terminal, and the power-off processing may be performed.
<< Input port data generation >>

Subsequently, in the input port data generation process, a process of reading the input ports 0 to 2 is performed.
<< Circular drive management >>

In the process of the above-mentioned rotation drum drive management (S546), drive control of each rotation drum is performed. More specifically, the number of cylinders is set, and the processing of the cylinder data address set is performed. Further, the control of the rotation of the rotating drum is performed, and if the processing is completed for all the rotating drums, the process proceeds to the port output processing (S547 in FIG. 18). In the above processing, when the rotation driving control has not been completed for all the rotation drums, the flow returns to the processing of the rotation data address set.
<<<< Circular drum drive control >>>>

  Subsequently, the processing of the above-mentioned rotation drum drive control will be described. In the processing of the rotating body drive control, it is determined whether or not the rotating body is stopped, and if it is not stopped, it is determined whether or not it is in a state of preparation for rotation start. Further, if the rotation is ready, the counter for retrieving the rotating body drive pulse data is corrected, the data in the accelerated state is set, and the data in the rotating body drive state is set in the update address.

  Here, in the determination processing of whether or not the turning drum is stopped, if the turning drum is not stopped, the processing is ended. Also, in the above-described determination process of whether or not the rotation start preparation state is satisfied, if the rotation start preparation state is not satisfied, the data of the rotation drum driving state is set to the above-described update address without performing the intermediate processing. Perform processing.

  After the processing of setting the data of the rotating body driving state to the update address, the rotating body driving pulse output counter is decremented by 1 to determine whether or not the output counter is 0. Further, when the output counter is 0, the drive pulse clear data and the data in the stopped state are set, and the four phases of the motor (turning stepping motor) are turned off. Here, if the output counter is not 0 in the process of determining whether or not the output counter is 0, the process ends.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is decelerating. If the vehicle is not decelerating, the count value of the rotation driving pulse output counter is incremented by one. Further, it is determined whether or not the rotating body is at a constant speed. If the rotating speed is at a constant speed, it is determined whether or not the rotating body drive pulse data search counter is an even number.

  Then, in the determination process of whether or not the counter for retrieving the body rotation pulse data is an even number, if the counter for retrieving the body rotation pulse data is an even number, the rotation rotation failure detection counter is incremented by one, and Perform pulse update processing. Further, in the process of determining whether or not the rotating body is in a state of constant speed, when the speed is not constant, or in the determining process of whether or not the counter for searching for the rotating body drive pulse data is an even number, If the torso drive pulse data search counter is not an even number, the process of updating the torso drive pulse is performed without performing the process in between.

  Subsequently, a constant speed state setting process is performed to determine whether or not the vehicle is accelerating. Further, during acceleration, the number of times of pulse switching is decremented by 1, and it is determined whether or not the number of times of switching is zero. If the number of times of switching is not 0, the data of the rotation driving pulse output counter is set to the update address.

  Further, the data of the number of times of pulse switching is obtained, and a winding up pattern table is set. Then, the designated address data set is processed, the revolving body control data set of the update address is updated, and the process ends. In the process of determining whether or not the number of times of switching is 0, if the number of times of switching is 0, the process is terminated without performing the intermediate process.

  In the above-described determination process of whether or not the vehicle is accelerating, if the rotating body is not in a state of accelerating, a step number RWM address of one symbol is set to determine whether or not the vehicle is being driven at a constant speed. Further, when the vehicle is moving at a low speed, the control unit acquires a torso sensor signal and determines whether or not the acquired torso sensor signal is of the torso sensor of the torso to be controlled.

  In the determination process of whether or not the acquired body sensor signal is of the body sensor of the body to be controlled, if it is determined that the signal of the body sensor of the control body, It is determined whether or not the rise of the torso sensor signal has been detected. Further, in the case of the rise of the torso sensor, the reference symbol number at the time of passing the torso sensor is stored, and the inferior torso rotation detection counter is initialized.

  Subsequently, a reference step number correction value is set, a reference step number at the time of passing the rotation sensor is generated, the reference step number at the time of passing the rotation sensor is stored, and the process is terminated. In the determination process of whether or not the acquired body sensor signal is of the body sensor of the body to be controlled, if the acquired body sensor signal is not of the body to be controlled, Shifts to the above-described process of acquiring the torso sensor signal. Further, in the above-described determination processing of whether or not the rising of the body sensor signal has been detected, if it is the rising of the body sensor signal, it is determined whether or not the passage of the body sensor has been completed. Also, in the above-described determination process of whether or not the vehicle is running at the constant speed, it is determined whether the vehicle has passed the body sensor even if the vehicle is not running at a low speed.

  In the process of determining whether or not the vehicle has passed the rotation sensor, when the vehicle has passed the rotation sensor, the number of steps of one symbol is decremented by 1, and it is determined whether or not the symbol has moved by one symbol. If it is determined in the above-described process of determining whether or not the rotation sensor has passed, if the rotation sensor has not passed, the process ends. Further, when one symbol is moved, 16 which is the number of steps of one symbol is stored, and the symbol number is updated.

  Further, the step number RWM address of one symbol is set, the symbol number is increased by 3, and a predetermined division ((symbol number +3) ÷ 5) is performed. Also, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol number +3 is a multiple of 5, and if the determination result is not a multiple of 5, the symbol step number is corrected to determine whether or not the deceleration start symbol position is reached. Is determined.

  In the process of determining whether or not the value of the symbol number +3 is a multiple of 5, if the determination result is a multiple of 5, the above-described deceleration start symbol is not used without correcting the symbol step number. A process of determining whether the position has been reached is performed. In the determination process of whether or not the one symbol has moved, if the rotating body has not moved by one symbol, it is determined whether or not the above-described deceleration start symbol position has been reached without performing the intervening process. Is performed.

  In the process of determining whether or not the deceleration start symbol position has been reached, if the deceleration start symbol position has been reached, a deceleration pulse counter is set. If the deceleration start symbol position has not been reached, the process ends. . Further, after the setting of the deceleration pulse counter, the deceleration state is set, the deceleration pulse data is set, the four phases of the motor are turned on, and the winding state is set. Here, in the above-described determination processing of whether or not the vehicle is being decelerated, if the vehicle is not being decelerated, the above-described processing of setting the torso state is performed without performing the intermediate processing.

After the processing of the above set of the torso state, it is determined whether or not the torso state has changed during the deceleration from the start of the deceleration. Set output request. Then, the process (see) of the control command set 2 described above is performed (S649), and the process ends. In the process of determining whether or not the state of the torso has changed during the deceleration from the start of deceleration, if there is no change in the state of the torso, the process ends without performing any intervening processing.
<< Port output >>

In the port output process (S547 in FIG. 18), output from output ports 0 and 1 is performed. More specifically, data of output port 0 is generated, and data of output port 0 is output. Further, the data of the output port 1 is generated (S663), the data of the output port 1 is output, and the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (S548 of FIG. 18).
<< Transmission of control command >>

  In the control command transmission process (S548 in FIG. 18), a control command to be transmitted to the peripheral board is output. More specifically, the control command buffer address is set, and the data of the control command read pointer is obtained. Further, a designated address is set, and a transmission target control command address is set. Then, it is determined whether there is a control command. If there is a control command that has not been transmitted, the control command is output, and the control command is output to the output ports 7 and 8.

Subsequently, with the sub-control data strobe signal turned on, output data is output to the output port 2, the transmitted control command storage buffer is cleared, and the control command read pointer is updated. Further, output data is output to the output port 2 with the sub-control data strobe signal turned off. Then, clear data (control command clear data) is output to the output ports 7 and 8, and the process proceeds to LED display processing (S549 in FIG. 18). If there is no untransmitted control command (S675: NO), the output process is not performed, and the output data is output to the output port 2 with the sub-control data strobe signal turned off. Is performed.
<< LED display >>

  In the above-described LED display processing (S549 in FIG. 18), the LED display counter is updated, the LED digit signals 1 to 5 to be output are determined based on the counter value, and the LED digit signals 1 to 5 are output. If there is a display request for the corresponding LED, the LED segment A to G signals corresponding to the data to be output are set. When there is no display request, all the LED segments A to G are turned off. Then, when there is a display request of the LED displayed by the output LED digit 1 to 5 signals and the LED segment P signal, the LED segment P signal is turned on, the LED digit and the LED segment are output, and the LED digit and the LED segment are output. Update the output of the LED segment.

  More specifically, the output ports 3 and 4 corresponding to the LED digit segments are turned off, and the LED display counter is updated. Further, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter is 0. If the LED display counter is 0, the LED display counter is initialized and the data of the LED display counter and the LED display request flag are obtained.

  In the determination processing of whether or not the LED display counter is 0, if the LED display counter is not 0, the data of the LED display counter and the LED display request flag are obtained without initializing the LED display counter. Further, data relating to the confirmation of the segment display request of the digit to be displayed this time is set, and it is determined whether or not there is a display request. Then, when there is a display request, error display data is obtained and error display data is set.

  Subsequently, the 7-segment LED segment table 2 is set, and the setting data is acquired. Further, it generates setting value display data and determines whether there is a setting value display request. When there is no request for displaying the set value, the stored number data is acquired, and the data of the upper digit offset is acquired.

  Further, it is determined whether there is a storage number (upper digit) display request. If there is no storage number (upper digit) display request, it is determined whether there is a storage number (lower digit) display request. Do. If there is no request to display the stored number (lower digit) in S707, the display data during operation of the setting change device, the acquired number data, and the display data are obtained, and it is determined whether or not an error is displayed. Do.

  Subsequently, if it is determined that the error is being displayed in the error display process, the 7-segment LED segment table 1 is set, and the data of the upper digit offset is acquired. Further, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the acquired number (upper digit), and if not, the data of the lower digit offset is acquired. In addition, segment output data is obtained, and it is determined whether or not there is a display request for a predetermined segment P.

  If there is a segment P display request (S715: YES), segment P output data is set (S716), and output to output ports 3 and 4 corresponding to the LED digit segment is performed.

  If there is no display request in the above-described process of determining whether there is a display request, the process shifts to the process of confirming the display request related to the segment P without performing the interim process. Also, if there is a setting value display request in the above-described determination processing of whether there is a setting value display request, the process proceeds to a process of obtaining segment output data.

  Further, in the above-described determination process of whether or not there is a request for displaying the stored number (upper digit), if there is a request for displaying the stored number (upper digit), the above-described process of acquiring the data of the lower-order offset for the lower digit is performed. In the above-described determination processing as to whether there is a storage number (lower digit) display request or not, if there is a storage number (lower digit) display request, the aforementioned segment output data acquisition processing Move to. In the above-described determination process of whether or not an error is being displayed, if the error is not being displayed, the data of the upper digit offset is acquired without setting the 7-segment LED segment table 1.

Further, in the above-described determination processing of whether or not there is a request for displaying the acquired number (upper digit), if there is a request for displaying the acquired number (upper digit), the processing shifts to the above-described processing for acquiring the segment output data. . If there is no segment P display request as described above, the process shifts to the above-described process of outputting to the output ports 3 and 4 corresponding to the LED digit segment.
<< Sub notification data output >>

  In the above-described sub notification data output processing (S550 in FIG. 18), stop buttons 1 to 3 notification data are set by the stop reception information data in order to output notification data to be transmitted to the peripheral board. Further, when all the predetermined conditions relating to whether or not the game medal limit (also referred to as the storage limit number, here, 50) have been reached are satisfied, the three-sheet insertion button notification data is set. Then, setting / reset button notification data, setting key switch notification data, door switch notification data, and setting door switch notification data are set based on the input port 0 level data. Also, the notification data set in the output port 6 is output.

  More specifically, stop reception information data is set, and a game medal limit check process is performed. Further, it is determined whether or not the game medal limit has been reached, and if not, whether or not the blocker signal is OFF is determined.

  If the blocker is not OFF, a determination for confirming the stored number is made, and if there is a stored number, it is determined whether or not a game medal has passed. Then, in the processing for determining whether or not a game medal has passed, if no game medal has passed, three-button insertion button notification data is set. Then, the setting / reset button notification data, the setting key switch notification data, the door switch notification data, and the setting door switch notification data are set. Subsequently, the notification data set in the output port 6 is output.

If the game medal limit has been reached in the processing for determining whether or not the game medal limit has been reached, or if the blocker signal has been turned off in the processing for determining whether or not the blocker signal has been turned off, the stored number of sheets must be confirmed. If there is no stored number in the determination processing of the above, or if it is detected that the game medal has passed in the determination processing of whether or not the game medal has passed, the processing of setting the three-sheet insertion button notification data is performed. First, the setting of the setting / reset button notification data is performed.
<< Timer measurement >>

  In the timer measurement process (S551 in FIG. 18), the timer is updated, and 1 is subtracted from all timer RWMs (if less than 0, 0 is set). More specifically, a measurement start timer address is set, and the number of 1-byte timers is set. Further, a countdown process is performed, and the next timer address is set. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the one-byte timer measurement has been completed, and if it has been completed, the number of two-byte timers is set. In the processing for determining whether or not the one-byte timer measurement has been completed, if the one-byte timer measurement has not been completed, the process returns to the countdown processing.

After setting the number of 2-byte timers in the process of setting the number of 2-byte timers, the 2-byte timer value is updated and the next timer address is set. Then, it is determined whether or not the 2-byte timer measurement has been completed. If the 2-byte timer measurement has not been completed, the process returns to the above-described process of updating the 2-byte timer value.
<< Error management >>

  In the above-described error management (see FIGS. 18 and 20), as shown in FIG. 20, it is determined whether or not the rising edge of the output signal of the selector passage sensor (selector passage sensor signal) is detected (S751). . If the rise of the selector passage sensor signal is detected (S751: YES), the monitoring time at blocker OFF (about 100.57 ms in the present embodiment) and the monitoring time at blocker ON are set (S752). Further, the AF register is saved (S753), the process proceeds to the second control, and an error check process (S754) is performed. The error check processing (S754) will be described later (see FIG. 38).

  When the error check processing (S754) ends, the process returns to the first control, and the AF register is restored (S755). Further, it is determined whether or not an error is detected (S756). If an error is detected (S756: YES), an output request at the time of error detection is set (S757). If the rise of the selector passage sensor signal has not been detected in S751 (S751: NO), the process of S753 is performed without performing the intervening process.

After the output request at the time of error detection is set in S757, the process of the control command set 2 described above is performed (S758), and the process ends.
<< External signal output data management >>

  In the above-described external signal output data management processing (S759), in order to perform the output data generation processing of the external signals 1 to 5, the external signals 1 to 5 are processed according to the value of the external signal flag and the external signal 1 management time. Set output data. Further, when the door switch signal or the set door switch signal is ON, the output data of the external signal 5 is set. If the setting key switch signal is ON and the output time of the external signal 4 has not elapsed or the error detection flag has been output when the power is restored, the output data of the external signal 4 is set.

  More specifically, an external signal flag is obtained, and it is determined whether the external signal 1 management time has elapsed. If the external signal 1 management time has not elapsed, the external signal 1 output data is set, and it is determined whether the door switch signal or the set door switch signal has been turned ON. If it is ON, the output data of the external signal 5 is set, and it is determined whether the setting key switch signal is ON.

  If the setting key switch signal has not been turned ON, an error detection flag and data check of the external signal 4 output time at the time of power-off recovery are performed, and it is determined whether or not all data has been lost. If all data has not been lost, the external signal 4 output data set is performed, and the process proceeds to the external signal output processing (S760 in FIG. 18).

  In the process of determining whether the external signal 1 management time has elapsed, if the external signal 1 management time has elapsed, the door switch signal or the setting door switch signal is output without performing the external signal 1 output data set. It is determined whether or not it has been turned ON. If the door switch signal or the setting door switch signal is not ON, it is determined whether the setting key switch signal is ON without setting the output data of the external signal 5.

Further, if the setting key switch signal is ON, the external signal 4 output data set is performed without performing the processing. If all the data has been lost in S778, the process proceeds to the external signal output processing (S760 in FIG. 18) without performing the above-described external signal 4 output data set.
<< External signal output >>

In the above-described external signal output processing (S760 in FIG. 18), output data of the external signals 1 to 5, the medal insertion signal, and the medal payout signal are output.
<< Soft random number management >>

In the above-described soft random number management process (see S764 in FIG. 18), a soft random number update 2 process is performed.
<Power return process>

  Subsequently, the power return process described in the above-described power-on process (see FIG. 12) will be described with reference to FIG. This power restoration process is a process to be performed when the power-off restoration data is determined to be normal (S12: YES) in the above-described power-on process (see FIG. 12) of the main control board 61.

  In the power restoration process shown in FIG. 21, the value in the stack pointer is restored to the state at the time of power interruption (S311), and the data of the initialization start address and the number of initialized bytes at the time of power interruption restoration are set (S312). Further, a range defined as a target of RWM initialization is initialized (RWM initialization 1 (S313)), and the AF register is saved (S314). Then, the process shifts to the second control, and after performing RWM initialization 2 (see FIG. 30) to be described later, the process returns to the first control and the AF register is restored (S316).

  In a subsequent input port reading process (S317), predetermined input ports (0 to 2) are read, and the input data is updated from the data before power off to the latest data. Further, a timer interrupt is activated (S318), data indicating a power-off processing completed flag (power-off execution processing flag) is cleared from the RWM (S319), and the process returns to the processing of the timer interrupt generated at the time of power-off. In the above-described interrupt activation setting process (S318), the type of interrupt and the timer interrupt cycle are set. After this processing, the timer interrupt processing can be executed. In the present embodiment, the period of the timer interrupt is 2.235 ms.

Here, the timer interrupt is started after the input port is read in the input port read processing (S317) (S318), and the input data is rewritten to the latest data in the input port read processing (S317) as described above. This is taken into account. For example, if the setting key switch 68 is turned on when the power is turned off and the setting key switch 68 is turned off before the power is restored, if there is no input port reading process (S317), the timer interrupt process is executed. Falling data of the setting key switch 68 is generated by the input port data generation processing (see S545 in FIG. 18). Specifically, if the power is turned off and the setting key switch 68 is changed as described above at the time of the above-mentioned "display when waiting for game medal insertion" (see S55 in FIG. 14), the power is turned off. At the time of return, an unintended process of shifting from the set value confirmation state to the normal state based on the falling data is executed. Therefore, after reading the input port (S317) as described above, activation of the timer interrupt (S318) is executed.
<Type of error>

  Next, among various errors in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, errors relating to handling of game medals will be described. The errors related to the handling of the game medals include an error that can be restored after the error is canceled and an error that cannot be restored. Among these, the errors that can be returned include HE errors, HP errors, HQ errors, and FE errors, which are errors related to the payout of game medals, and CP errors, which are errors related to the insertion of game medals. There are C0 error, C1 error, CH error, and CE error.

  Among the various errors described above, the HE error is an error when the game medal in the game medal payout device 63 is determined to be empty, and the HP error is a game medal at the game medal exit in the game medal payout device 63. This is an error when it is determined that the paper is jammed. Further, the HQ error is an error when it is determined that there is an abnormal input to a payout sensor (not shown), and the FE error is an error when it is determined that the game medal auxiliary storage 71 is full as described above. .

  Further, the CP error is an error when it is determined that the inserted game medal has passed illegally, and the C0 error is when it is determined that there is an abnormal input to the insertion sensor (here, the insertion sensor 2) as described above. Error. Further, the C1 error is an error when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the portion of the medal passage 105 where the insertion sensor 45 and the selector passage sensor 46 are provided. This is an error when it is determined that the medal has stayed. In addition, the CE error is an error when it is determined that the game medal has stayed in the portion provided with the insertion sensor 1 (115) or the insertion sensor 2 (116).

  The error release condition relating to these errors is that a release operation for changing the signal of the set / reset button 69 (set / reset button signal) from OFF to ON is performed with the cause removed. Further, when the door switch signal relating to the door switch 60 and the setting door switch signal relating to the setting door switch 67 are ON, the above-described release operation is effective.

On the other hand, errors that cannot be recovered include E1, E5, E6, and E7 errors. Among them, the E1 error is an error in the case where the power-off recovery cannot be performed normally, and the E5 error is an error in the case where the combination display of the symbols when the body is stopped all the time is abnormal. Further, the E6 error is an error when the set value is out of the range, and the E7 error is an abnormal frequency of the clock input to the random number update RCK terminal (not shown) in the main CPU 81 or a built-in random number (16 bit). This is an error when an update state abnormality of (random number) is detected.
<< CP error (game medal illegal passing) >>

  Subsequently, a detection mode of a CP error, a C0 error, a C1 error, a CH error, and a CE error, which are errors relating to insertion of a game medal, will be described. First, regarding the CP error, in the above-described processing at the time of inserting the game medal (more specifically, the processing of the game medal insertion check described later), the ON / OFF sequence of the insertion sensor as shown in FIG. It is determined that the game has passed, and one game medal is accepted. That is, in FIG. 8A, the ON / OFF sequence of the closing sensor is shown in five stages at the left end. Further, on the right side, ON / OFF states of the input sensor 1 signal and the input sensor 2 signal in the respective stages 1 to 5 are shown. The insertion sensor 1 signal and the insertion sensor 2 signal are normally in an OFF state, and are turned ON when a game medal is detected.

  When no game medal is detected, as shown in order 1, both the insertion sensor 1 signal and the insertion sensor 2 signal are OFF. Then, when a regular game medal enters the game medal entrance 106 of the game medal selector 44 and flows down the medal passage 105, as shown in an order 2, the signal of the insertion sensor 1 located upstream of the medal passage 105 is first. Then, while the input sensor 1 signal is in the ON state, the input sensor 2 signal is also turned ON as shown in order 3. Further, as the game medals flow, the insertion sensor 1 signal is turned off first, as shown in order 4, and thereafter, as shown in order 5, both the insertion sensor 1 signal and the insertion sensor 2 signal are turned off. Become. When ON / OFF of the insertion sensor 1 signal and the insertion sensor 2 signal are detected in such an order, the main CPU 81 (see FIG. 5) determines that one game medal has passed normally. . More specifically, the main CPU 81 refers to a determination result of an error (CH error) of the staying portion of the selector passage sensor disposed portion described later (CH error), and if both errors are not detected, the main CPU 81 executes one game. It is determined that the medal has passed normally.

In other cases, it is determined that the game medal is illegally passed, and an error occurs. However, as shown in the order 1 to 3 in FIG. 8B, when only the input sensor 1 signal is turned ON and detected, and when the input sensor 2 signal is not detected, the game medal returns to the upstream side. The input of the closing sensor 1 signal is invalidated without causing an error. The reason why an error is not caused in such a case as shown in FIG. 8B is that the game medal may be detected only by the insertion sensor 1 even when the blocker is OFF. Even in such a case, if the notification of the error or the stop processing of the game is performed, the rhythm of the game of the player is broken, so that the control is performed so as not to determine the error.
<< C0 error (Match sensor error input) >>

  Next, in the C0 error, as shown in FIG. 8C, the blocker signal, which is data for controlling the blocker (47), is changed from ON (the passing state of the game medal) to OFF (the return state of the game medal). ), After a predetermined time (here, about 500.60 ms) elapses, while the blocker is OFF (returned state), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the input sensor 2 signal. The predetermined time is a start time of detection of an abnormal input of the input sensor, which will be described later, and is a time until detection of an abnormal input related to the input sensor is started.

  Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (insertion sensor abnormality input detection start time), if there is an input to the input sensor 2 signal (turned on) even though the blocker signal remains OFF (return state of game medals). ), It is determined that an abnormal input has been made to the input sensor (45), and error monitoring is enabled (ON) as shown in the middle part of the figure. When an error is detected in this manner, the input sensor 2 signal is turned ON until the cause of the error is eliminated, an output request for an error display corresponding to the C0 error is made, and the display of the C0 error is made at a predetermined timing thereafter. Be executed. The timing at which the error display is performed includes waiting for the insertion of the game medal, waiting for the reception of the star lever, or after stopping the rotation of the body all times.

However, in the present embodiment, while the CE error, the CP error, the CH error, the C0 error, or the C1 error has already occurred, the detection factor of the C0 error as shown in FIG. Is not determined to be an abnormal input.
<< C1 error (medal passage abnormality) >>

  Next, in the C1 error, when the selector passage sensor 46 changes from OFF to ON as shown in the middle part of FIG. 9A, the closing monitoring counter is incremented by one as shown in the upper part of the figure. Further, as shown in the lower part of the figure, the insertion monitoring counter is decremented by 1 when the signal of the insertion sensor 2 when the game medal normally passes through the insertion sensor 45 changes from ON to OFF. Then, every time the input sensor 2 signal is switched from ON to OFF when there is a normal input, the input monitoring counter is decremented by 1 and when the input monitoring counter is out of a predetermined range (for example, a range of 0 to 3). Will result in an error.

  That is, if the value of the input monitoring counter is within a predetermined range, it is determined to be normal, and if it is out of the predetermined range, it is determined to be abnormal. The maximum value (here, 3) of the predetermined range related to the insertion monitoring counter can be determined by the relationship between the distance from the selector passage sensor 46 to the insertion sensor 2 (105) and the size of the game medal. For example, when the distance from the selector passage sensor 46 to the insertion sensor 2 (116) exceeds the diameter of the game medal and is equal to or less than the dimension of two game medals (here, 50 (= 25 × 2) mm). It is assumed that between the selector passage sensor 46 and the insertion sensor 2 (116), a maximum of three game medals are arranged, one for each of the game medals and one for each of the two game medals. Is done. Therefore, the maximum value of the predetermined range related to the input monitoring counter can be set to 3.

Further, the present invention is not limited to such a concept. For example, in order to provide more certainty in error detection, the maximum value of a predetermined range related to the injection monitoring counter is set to “2” or the error detection accuracy is intentionally relaxed. , The maximum value may be set to “4”. Further, the maximum value may be set to a value other than “3” or “4” according to the distance from the selector passage sensor 46 to the input sensor 2 (116). Further, the distance from the selector passage sensor 46 to the input sensor 2 (116) may be from the most upstream portion of the selector passage sensor 46 to the central portion (optical axis portion) of the microsensor of the input sensor 2 (116), or the selector passage. Various settings can be made, for example, from the central part of the sensor 46 to the most upstream part of the input sensor 2 (116). The input monitoring counter is cleared to 0 when the blocker signal is turned from OFF to ON, as described later.
<<< CH error (selector passage sensor arrangement site staying) >>>

Next, in the case of a CH error, as shown in FIG. 9B, when a predetermined time (here, 446.97 ms, which is the residence time of the selector passage sensor) elapses while the selector passage sensor 46 is ON, the game medal is eliminated. It is determined that it has stayed, and an error occurs. This predetermined time is a stay determination passage time related to the selector passage sensor. Then, when an error is detected, an output request for an error display corresponding to the CH error is made, and the display of the CH error is executed at a predetermined timing thereafter. The timing at which the error display is performed includes waiting for the insertion of the game medal, waiting for the reception of the star lever, or after stopping the rotation of the body all times. However, in the present embodiment, when a CE error, a CP error, a CH error, a C0 error, or a C1 error has already occurred, the detection factor of the CH error as shown in FIG. Is not determined to be an abnormal input.
<< CE Error (Accumulation Sensor Placement Location) >>

  Next, in the case of a CE error, as shown in FIG. 10, when a game medal is inserted, if the stay determination passage time of the insertion sensor is out of the range of A to C in FIG. 10, it is determined that the game medal has stayed. And an error occurs. Here, time A in the figure is the stay determination passage time from ON to OFF of the input sensor 1, and time B is the stay determination passage time from ON of the input sensor 2 to OFF of the input sensor 1. Further, the time C is a stay determination passage time from ON to OFF of the input sensor 2. In the present embodiment, the stay determination passage times A to C satisfy 4.47 ms ≦ A <143.03 ms, 2.23 ms ≦ B <98.33 ms, 4.47 ms ≦ C <143.03 ms. .

As a process at the time of error display, at the start of error display or at the time of error detection, a detected error display output request is made. Further, an error code corresponding to each error is displayed on the acquired number display LED, and the game is stopped. Here, the stop of the game will be described later. Further, as a process at the time of error cancellation, the acquired number display LED is returned to a state before the error, an output request is made at the time of error display end, and thereafter, the game is restarted.
<Control processing related to insertion of game medals>

  Next, the control processing related to the insertion of the game medals will be described more specifically with reference to FIGS. The processing described here is a part of the control module (program module) that is executed according to the situation in each of the above-described game progress main processing (see FIG. 14) and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18). . That is, what is described here is the control related to the first control in the control processing related to the insertion of the game medal, and the control related to the second control is described later.

  Among the control processes related to the insertion of the game medals, the processes related to the first control include the process of starting the game medal reception (see FIG. 22), the process of turning on the blocker (see FIG. 23A), and the process of turning off the blocker (see FIG. 23A). FIG. 23B), an error display process (see FIG. 24), and an input error set process (see FIG. 25).

  Among these control modules, the game medal reception start processing, the blocker ON processing, the blocker OFF processing, and the error display processing shown in FIGS. 22 to 24 are performed in the game progress main processing (see FIG. 14). It is executed as necessary in various processes. More specifically, the process of starting the game medal reception is executed in the process (S52) of the game start set in FIG. 14, and the process of displaying when waiting for the game medal insertion is performed in the same manner as the game in FIG. This is executed in the display process (S55) when waiting for medal insertion. Then, after the game medal acceptance start process, a blocker ON process (described later) is performed, and the above-described blocker 47 is turned on (passable state), so that game medals can be inserted.

  Further, the blocker ON process, the blocker OFF process, and the error display process are versatile processes. Among them, the blocker ON process is, for example, the above-described game medal reception start process (FIG. 22). In some cases, the processing may be executed according to circumstances, such as processing for displaying a game medal insertion wait (see S55 in FIG. 14), processing for clearing a game medal (see FIG. 28), and the like.

  In addition, the blocker OFF process includes a display process at the time of waiting for a game medal insertion (see S55 in FIG. 14) and a process of the game medal clearing (specifically, the process of the blocker OFF before the game medal is cleared). This is executed in some cases depending on the situation, such as the start lever check process (S58 in FIG. 14), the start lever reception process (S59 in FIG. 14), and the like.

  Further, the error display process is executed according to the situation in the game medal clearing process, the start lever check process (S58 in FIG. 14), the game medal payout process by winning (S67 in FIG. 14), and the like. There are cases.

Regarding the control module executed in the timer interrupt process, data (for example, a flag indicating abnormality detection) set in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14) before the occurrence of the timer interrupt process in the cycle at that time. Will be handled. In the following, individual processes listed as control processes relating to the insertion of game medals will be described, and thereafter, a mutual relationship between these processes will be described.
<Start accepting game medals>

  The above-described processing for starting the reception of game medals (see FIG. 22) is processing for starting the reception of game medals, and the game medal selector 44 (see FIGS. 2, 6, and 7) returns the game medals (see FIG. 2, FIG. 6, and FIG. 7). The game medal can be inserted from the game medal insertion slot 21 (see FIG. 1) by controlling the game medal receiving state (passable state) from the state of being unpassable) to the game medal receiving state (passable state) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Process to make it happen. As shown in FIG. 22, in the process of starting the game medal reception, first, the game medal number data is cleared (S101), and then the inserted number display LED is turned off (S102). Further, the game medal management flag is initialized (S103), and an operation flag check process (S104) is executed. The operation flag check process (S104) is a process for confirming the presence or absence of the operation of the accessory, the accessory continuous operation device, and the replay.

  Then, it is determined whether or not a re-game operation is being performed (S105). If it is not a re-game operation (S105: NO), a state is established in which game medals can pass through the blocker 47 (see FIG. 7). Then, the process proceeds to the blocker ON process described later (see FIG. 23A). If the game is in the replaying operation (S105: YES), the automatic insertion standby time 1 (237 interruption: about 529.65 ms) is set ( S106). Further, it is determined whether or not the display type data is 0 (S107). If the display type data is 0 (S107: YES), the process proceeds to a 2-byte time waiting process (S111). The process of waiting for a 2-byte time (S111) is a process of waiting until the designated waiting time (automatic input waiting time 1) becomes zero. Here, the display type data is data indicating the type of the replayed game stopped and displayed. Specifically, when a predetermined replay combination in which “Replay-Replay-Replay” is stopped and displayed on the activated line or the inactivated line is displayed as the display type data 0. On the other hand, a specific replay combination in which “Replay-Replay-Replay” is not stopped and displayed on the activated line or the inactivated line (eg, “Bell-Bell-Bell”, “Red 7-Red 7-Red 7”) Is stopped and displayed, the display type data 1 is displayed. This display type data is stored in the RWM 83 at the time of winning determination, and is intended to change the time until the automatic insertion processing is started based on the stopped and displayed symbol combination. For example, when the symbol combination corresponding to the display type data 1 is stopped, an automatic insertion standby time 2 (described later) is set, and when waiting for the set 2 byte time, the effect corresponding to the small combination or the bonus combination is set. By outputting a sound, the player can recognize the winning combination as a small winning combination or a bonus winning combination.

  If the display type data is not 0 in the determination of the display type data (S107: NO), the automatic insertion standby time 2 (500 interrupts: about 1119.50 ms) is set (S108). The process proceeds to the above-described waiting process for two bytes (S111).

  After the process of waiting for 2 bytes (S111), a process of reading the stored number is executed (S112). The stored number reading process (S112) is for reading the stored number data and checking for the presence or absence of the stored number and the stored number. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the stored number has reached the storage limit number (here, 50) (S113). If the stored number has not reached the storage limit number (S113: NO), the blocker is turned on. The process (S114) is executed. The blocker ON process (S114) will be described later. On the other hand, if the stored number has reached the storage limit number (S113: YES), the process proceeds to the display type data acquisition process (S116) without performing the blocker ON process (S114).

  With such a configuration, when the re-game is not operating (S105: NO), the blocker ON process can be executed regardless of the stored number, and when the re-game is operating (S105: YES). , The blocker ON process can be performed according to the number of stored sheets. Therefore, (1) even if the stopped and displayed symbol combination is a symbol combination that is not apparently a replay, a uniform medal can be inserted, (2) the blocker ON process can be realized with a small number of program processes, and (3) a medal. That the medal swallowing (taking in) can be reduced as compared with the case where the blocker ON process is performed after the detection of the game, and (4) even if the game has a high probability of re-game, the player can insert the medal at a constant rhythm. It has effects such as what it can do.

  After the above-described determination processing relating to the number of stored sheets (S113) or the blocker ON processing (S114), display type data is acquired (S116), and it is determined whether the display type data is 1 (S117). . If the display type data is 1 (S117: YES), the three-sheet insertion indicator LED-R (red) is turned on (S118), and the automatic insertion standby time 3 (8949 interruption: about 19999.49 ms) is set. Then, the input detection standby time is stored (S120). Further, the input of the selector passage sensor signal, the one-sheet insertion switch signal, the three-sheet insertion sensor signal, and the settlement switch signal is checked (S121), and it is determined whether or not these inputs have been made (S122). Here, the lighting of the three-sheet insertion display LED-R (red) (S118) functions as a notification that prompts the player to operate a BET (bet) button. If any one of the inputs has been made (S122: YES), the input detection standby time is cleared (S123), and an input information command is set (S124). Here, the input information command refers to a command indicating a state of “selector passage sensor signal, one-sheet switch signal, three-sheet sensor signal, three-sheet switch signal”. If there is no input in S122 (S122: NO), the input information command is set (S124) without clearing the input detection standby time (S123). In other words, the automatic insertion standby time 3 is canceled based on the lapse of time or the input information (any one of the selector passage sensor signal, the one-sheet switch signal, the three-sheet sensor signal, and the three-sheet switch signal). By adopting such a control mode, when the re-game combination belonging to the display type data 1 is displayed, it is possible to make it appear as a small combination or a bonus combination.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the input detection standby time has elapsed (S125). If it has not elapsed (S125: NO), the process returns to S121 to check the input of various signals. If the input detection standby time has elapsed in S125 (S125: YES), the three-sheet insertion display LED is turned off (S126), and an output request for input information is set (S127). If the display type data is not 1 in S117 (S117: NO), an output request for input information is set without performing the processing of S118 to S126 (S127). Then, the process of the control command set 1 is executed (S128). In the present embodiment, the process of the control command set 1 (S128) performs the process of the control command set 2. The processing of the control command set 2 performs processing for storing the above-described sub-control command in a ring buffer (transmission buffer) that temporarily stores the sub-control command before transmission. In the following steps, there is also a processing step of "setting an output request", which is a processing of storing information (command) to be transmitted to the sub-control means (here, the sub-control board 31) in a register. Point to.

  Thereafter, the re-game display LED is turned on (S129), an output request at the time of automatic insertion is set (S130), and the process of the control command set 1 which is the same as the above-mentioned S128 (S131) is executed. Then, the process of adding one game medal (S132) is executed, and in the process of adding one game medal (S132), one process of adding the number of game medals and display process of the insertion number display LED are performed. More specifically, in the process of adding one game medal (S132), although not shown, the game medal number data is incremented by one, and the acquired number display data is cleared. Further, it stores the inserted number display LED signal data corresponding to the game medal number data, performs a game medal limit set process, and performs a game medal read process. If the game medal number data matches the game medal limit number (the above-mentioned prescribed number), a game medal limit flag is set.

After the process of adding one game medal (S132), the above-mentioned game medal limit flag is checked (S133). If the number of game medals has not reached the game medal limit (S133: NO), one game medal is added. It returns to the process (S132). Then, in S133, if the number of game medals has reached the game medal limit (S133: YES), the process returns, and returns to the process that was executed before the start of the game medal reception start process as a subroutine.
<Blocker ON>

  Next, the blocker ON process will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 23A, in the blocker ON process, it is determined whether or not the blocker OFF monitoring time (about 100.57 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed (S211). (S211: NO), S211 is repeated until the time elapses. If the blocker OFF monitoring time has elapsed (S211: YES), the interrupt is prohibited (S212), the blocker signal is turned ON (S213), and the input monitoring counter is cleared (S214). Further, the state of the blocker signal is turned ON (S215), the interruption is permitted (S216), and the process returns to the processing before the start of the blocker ON process. Here, the “blocker signal_ON” in S213 indicates a process of storing “1” in the RWM area for turning on the blocker 47 in the present embodiment. It should be noted that “_” is omitted in the drawings (the same applies hereinafter). By the process of S213, the blocker 47 is turned on by the port output process (S547) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) executed after the process. Note that the process of S213 can be a process of storing “1” in an output port for directly outputting a blocker signal.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the “input monitoring counter_clear” of S214 refers to a process of setting data in the RWM 83 of the input monitoring counter, which is updated when an input from the selector passage sensor 46 is made, to 0. By this processing, for example, after the binary data determined to have passed the selector passage sensor 46 is “10B”, an error is determined when a game medal insertion check described later (see FIGS. 42 and 43) is executed. Can be prevented. Further, “blocker signal state_ON” in S215 indicates that information indicating that a medal can be inserted is stored in the RWM 83 in the present embodiment. By the processing of S215, the lamp (game start display LED) indicating that a game medal can be inserted can be turned on by the LED display processing (S75) of the interrupt processing executed after the processing. Note that the processing order of S213 to S215 is not limited to this.

  The above-described processing of the blocker signal ON (S213) is performed after the blocker OFF monitoring time has elapsed (S211: YES). The reason for this is to prevent the medals from being pinched by not turning on the blocker 47 when there is a possibility that the game medals are passing. That is, as in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the monitoring time at blocker OFF has elapsed (S211) and then the blocker signal is turned on (S213), so that the ON operation of the blocker 47 is reserved for a predetermined period. Thus, it is possible to secure a time to wait for a game medal to pass until a blocker signal is output from the main control board 61 or the blocker 47 performs a mechanical operation.

  The above-described interrupt prohibition (S212) is executed after waiting for the elapse of the blocker OFF monitoring time (S211). In the present embodiment, the value of the closing monitoring counter increases or decreases based on the detection of the selector passage sensor signal and the closing sensor 2 signal, as described above for the C1 error relating to the closing sensor and the selector passage sensor (see FIG. 9A). When the value of the input monitoring counter exceeds a predetermined range (for example, a range of 0 to 3), the blocker 47 is turned off. Then, in the blocker ON process (see FIG. 23A), the process related to the blocker signal (S213, S215) and the process related to the input monitoring counter (S214) are executed as a series of processes. And matching between the selector passage sensor signal and the detection result of the closing sensor 2 signal.

  If a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) occurs between the blocker signal ON process (S213) and the blocker signal state ON process (S215), the timer interrupt process (see FIG. ), The blocker 47 can be turned on (passable state) as described above via predetermined processing (here, S545 for creating input data, S547 for port output, etc.). However, in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), since the process of turning on the blocker signal (S215) following the process of turning on the blocker signal (S213) is not performed, the predetermined process for the interrupt (here, In S549), which is an LED display process, a lamp (game start display LED) indicating that a game medal can be inserted cannot be turned on. That is, a situation may occur where the game start display LED is not displayed even though the blocker 47 is ON.

However, as in the present embodiment, interrupt prohibition (S212) is performed, and processing related to the blocker signal (S213, S215) and processing related to the insertion monitoring counter (S214) are performed by the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18). By executing the processing as a series of processing without intervention, it is possible to match the operation of the blocker 47 with the LED display, and it is possible to perform appropriate control related to insertion of game medals.
<< Blocker OFF >>

  Next, the blocker OFF process will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 23B, in the blocker OFF process, it is determined whether or not the blocker signal is OFF (S221). If the blocker signal is not OFF (S221: NO), the interrupt is prohibited. (S222), the blocker signal is turned off (S223), and the blocker signal state is turned off (S224). Further, for the C0 error, the above-described closing sensor abnormality input detection start time (about 500.60 ms in this embodiment) is set (S225), an interrupt is permitted (S226), and the process before the start of the blocker OFF process is performed. Return. Here, the “blocker signal_OFF” in S223 indicates a process of storing “0” in the RWM area for turning on the blocker 47 in the present embodiment. With this processing, the blocker 47 is turned off by the port output processing (S547) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18) executed after the processing. Note that the process of S223 can be a process of storing “1” in an output port for directly outputting a blocker signal.

  Further, “blocker signal state_OFF” in S224 indicates that information indicating that a medal cannot be inserted is stored in the RWM 83 in the present embodiment. By this process, the lamp (game start display LED) indicating that a game medal can be inserted is kept off. Further, in the input sensor abnormality input detection start time set in S225, a predetermined time (about 500.60 ms in this embodiment) related to the C0 error is set.

  Also, in the blocker OFF process (see FIG. 23B), the setting of the input sensor abnormality input detection start time (S225) is performed after prohibiting the interrupt (S222), the blocker signal OFF (S223), and the blocker signal. It is performed following each processing of the state OFF (S224). That is, in the blocker OFF process, the process related to the blocker signal (S223, S224) and the input sensor abnormality input detection start time set (S225), which is the process related to the input error check, are executed as a series of processes.

  Further, when a timer interrupt (see FIG. 18) occurs between the blocker signal OFF (S223) and the blocker signal state OFF (S224), a predetermined value in the timer interrupt process (the relevant interrupt) at this time. As described above, the blocker 47 can be turned off (returned state) through the processing (here, S79 for creating input data, S82 for port output, etc.). However, in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), the process of turning off the blocker signal state (S224) following the process of turning off the blocker signal (S223) is not performed. In the LED display process S75), the lamp (game start display LED) indicating that a game medal can be inserted cannot be reliably turned off. That is, a situation may occur in which the game start display LED is lit even though the blocker 47 is off.

However, as in the present embodiment, interrupt prohibition (S222) is performed, and the blocker signal OFF (S223) and the blocker signal state OFF (S224) are set as a series of processes that do not involve the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). By executing, the operation of the blocker 47 and the LED display can be matched, and appropriate control relating to insertion of game medals can be performed.
<< Error display >>

  Next, an error display process will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 24, in the error display process, the error number is stored (S231), and the status information related to the pre-error blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal is saved (S232). When the status information is saved, data is saved from the status information storage area (blocker signal data storage area, hopper motor drive signal data storage area) in the RWM 83 to a predetermined storage area (C register serving as a status information save area). Be executed. Further, the information in the hopper motor drive signal data storage area in the state information storage area is cleared (S233), and the blocker OFF process (S234) is executed. The blocker OFF process (S234) is for performing the above-described blocker OFF process (see FIG. 23B). Then, the start lever acceptance permission flag is cleared (S235), the information of the acquired number display is retracted (S236), and an error display is set (S237). When the acquired number display information is saved, the data is saved from the acquired number display information storage area in the RWM 83 to a predetermined storage area (B register serving as the acquired number display information save area).

  Further, an output request at the start of the error display is set (S238), the processing of the control command set 1 is executed (S239), and the rise of the setting / reset button signal (the signal of the setting button or the signal of the reset button) is detected. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S240). In S240 described above, if the rise of the set / reset button signal is not detected (S240: NO), S240 is repeated until it is detected, and if the rise of the set / reset button signal is detected, (S240: YES), the rising data of the setting / reset button signal is cleared (S241).

  Subsequently, the fullness detection signal inspection data is set (S242), and it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned FE error relating to the payout of the game medal has occurred (S243). In this S243, when it is determined that it is not the time of the FE error (S243: NO), the payout inspection data is set (S244), and it is determined whether or not it is the time of the payout related error (S245). If it is determined that it is not a payout-related error (S245: NO), the inspection data of the input sensor and the selector passage sensor is set (S246), and the input state of each error based on the inspection data is checked (S247). . Specifically, it corresponds to a process of checking the level data of the input sensor 45 (input sensors 1 and 2), the level data of the selector passage sensor 46, and the level data of the payout sensor (not shown). If it is determined in S243 that the FE error has occurred (S243: YES), and if it is determined in S245 that it is a payout-related error (S245: YES), the above-described processing is performed without performing the processing. The process moves to S247.

After the above-described S247, it is determined whether or not the error factor has been removed (S248). If the error factor has not been removed (S248: NO), the process returns to the above-described S240, and the rise of the setting / reset button signal. It is determined whether or not is detected. “Removal of an error factor” in the present embodiment indicates that the level data of the various sensors described above is “0”. If the error factor has been eliminated (S248: YES), the error number is cleared (S249), the display of the acquired number is restored (S250), and an output request at the end of the error display is set (S250). Further, the processing of the control command set 1 is executed (S252), the state information of the blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal before the error is restored (S253), and the hopper motor drive signal is restored (S254). Then, it is determined whether or not the blocker signal before the error was ON (S255). If the blocker signal was ON (S255: YES), the blocker ON process (S256) is executed to start the error display process. Return to the previous process. On the other hand, if the blocker signal before the error is not ON (S255: NO), the process returns without executing the blocker ON process (S256).
<< input error set >>

  Next, the processing of the input error set will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 25, in the processing of the input error set, an abnormal input flag (also referred to as an “error flag”, an “error flag”, etc.) is updated (S301). In S301, although not shown, the data stored in the A register is saved in the D register. Further, a logical operation (OR) of the data stored in the A register and the data stored in the E register is executed, and the operation result is stored in the A register. Then, the value of the A register is stored (updated) in the abnormal input data storage area provided at a predetermined address of the RWM 83.

  That is, in S301, a process of storing the data of the abnormal input flag stored in the abnormal input data storage area of the RWM 83 in the A register is executed. Here, the abnormal input flag in the present embodiment is composed of 1-byte data, bits D0 to D3 are unused, D4 bit is selector passage sensor staying, D5 bit is input sensor 2 abnormal input, and D6 bit is dispensing sensor abnormal input. And the D7 bit is unused. For example, when only the stay of the selector passage sensor is detected, the abnormality input flag becomes “00010000B”. When an abnormality of the payout sensor is detected after detecting the stay of the selector passage sensor, the abnormality input flag is set to “01010000B”.

  Also, in the above-described S301, using the data of the above-described abnormal input flag, creation of data for transmission or not (data for determining whether to make an output request) and a command for transmission (Control command). That is, in creating data for transmission or not, the value of the D register is stored in the A register. Then, a logical operation (AND) of the A register and the E register is executed, and the operation result is stored in the A register. For example, when the value of the A register is “01000000B” and the value of the E register is “00010000B”, the value of the A register after the logical operation (AND) is “00000000” (Example 1). Further, for example, when the value of the A register is “01010000B” and the value of the E register is “00010000B”, the value of the A register after the logical operation (AND) is “00010000B” (Example 2). .

  On the other hand, when creating a command for transmission, a logical operation (XOR) of the A register and the E register is executed, and the operation result is stored in the A register. For example, if the value of the A register is “00000000B” as in Example 1 described above and the value of the E register is “01000000B”, the value of the A register after the logical operation (XOR) is “01000000B”. . For example, when the value of the A register is “00010000B” and the value of the E register is “00010000B” as in Example 2 described above, the value of the A register after the logical operation (XOR) is “00000000B”. ".

  Subsequently, it is determined whether an abnormal input error is detected (S302). The determination made in S302 is to check whether the abnormal input flag updated in S301 is a new one (whether the flag is not a duplicate one). Such an inspection is performed by determining whether the data stored in the storage area (abnormal input flag storage area) targeted by the RWM 83 is the same before and after updating. More specifically, when the value of the A register is “0”, that is, when the above-mentioned Z (zero flag) is “= 1”, the determination is NO, and when the value of the A register is other than “0”, that is, the above Z (zero flag) ) Is "$ 1", the determination is YES.

If a new abnormal input error is detected (S302: YES), an output request at the start of error display is set (S303). In S303, a predetermined value (= 0H) is stored in the D register. Then, the process shifts to the process of the control command set 1. The control command set 1 to which the input error check is shifted performs the process of the control command set 2 as described above. Here, the processing of the control command set 2 performs processing for storing the above-described sub-control command in the transmission buffer. With this control command set 1 (control command set 2), information such as the type of error can be transmitted to the sub-control board 31. Further, in S302, if an abnormal input error has already been detected (S302: NO), the process returns and returns to the original process.
<Relationship between blocker operation control and other processes>
<< Relationship with games >>

  Next, the relationship between the above-described process for operating the blocker 47 and other processes will be described. First, here, the relationship between the blocker ON process (see FIG. 23A) and the replay will be described. First, as described above, the blocker 47 (see FIG. 7) is in a state where game medals can be passed when it is ON, and is in a state where game medals are returned when it is OFF, and the control for turning on the blocker 47 is a game. The progress main process (see FIG. 14) is executed using the blocker ON process shown in FIG.

  Further, the drive signal is input to the blocker 47 through the above-described blocker ON process, and the port output process (S547) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) is performed until the blocker 47 performs a mechanical operation. ) And control command transmission processing (S548). The timer interrupt process is generated at a predetermined cycle (here, 2.235 ms). Therefore, even if the ON data of the blocker signal is set in the blocker ON process (see FIG. 23A) (S213), a timer interrupt occurs after that, and the blocker 47 can actually pass the game medal. By this time, there is a delay in control and mechanical operation. After the ON data of the blocker signal is set and before the blocker 47 actually closes the second exit 108 (see FIG. 7), the blocker 47 is in the OFF state in the game progress main process, but the blocker 47 is in the OFF state. It can be said that this is the situation.

  Further, as described above, the selector passage sensor 46 (see FIG. 7) is capable of detecting the passage of a game medal, and is disposed upstream of the insertion sensor 45 and the blocker 47 (upstream of the medal passage 105). ing. The determination as to whether or not a game medal has passed using the selector passage sensor 46 can be made before the game medal reaches the insertion sensor 45 or the blocker 47. Further, the first movable portion 112 and the second movable portion 114 of the selector passage sensor 46 also have a function of preventing backflow of game medals by projecting into the medal passage 105.

  When the start lever 25 is operated, the blocker 47 is turned off and a medal is returned. In this case, the blocker OFF process shown in FIG. Data for turning off the blocker signal is stored in the area (blocker signal data storage area). Here, the presence or absence of the operation of the start lever 25 is performed in S59 of the game progress main process (see FIG. 14). However, in FIG. The illustration (not shown) and description of such processing are omitted.

  In the present embodiment, as shown during the processing for starting the game medal reception in FIG. 22, it is determined in S105 whether or not the game operation is being performed again. Further, if the replaying operation is being performed (S105: YES), a process of reading the stored number (S112), a determination as to whether the stored number has reached the storage limit number (S113), and the like are performed. Then, if the number of stored sheets has reached the specific value (here, 50) which is the storage limit number, the blocker ON process (S114) is executed.

  In the blocker ON process (S114), as shown in FIG. 23 (a), it is determined whether or not the blocker OFF monitoring time has elapsed (S211). As described above, in the present embodiment, the time is set to about 100.57 ms, and the time is measured based on the timer data stored in the blocker OFF monitoring time storage area of the RWM 83. The blocker OFF monitoring time substantially coincides with the time required to execute the timer interrupt cycle (here, 2.235 ms) a predetermined number of times (here, 50 times).

  If the monitoring time at blocker OFF has elapsed (S211: YES), data for turning on the blocker signal is stored in the blocker signal data storage area of the RWM 83 after prohibition of interruption (S212) (S212). S213). Further, after clearing the input monitoring counter (S214) and setting the blocker signal ON flag (S215), an interrupt is permitted (S216), and the process returns to the process before the start of the blocker ON process. Then, in the timer interrupt (see FIG. 18) generated at the timing after the interruption permission (S216), the blocker 47 is mechanically driven through the processing such as the port output (S82), and it is possible to accept the insertion of a game medal. It becomes.

  On the other hand, if it is not during the replaying operation (S105 in FIG. 22: NO), the blocker ON process shown in FIG. 23A is executed without going through the above-described determination on the stored number (S113) and the like. A series of processes from monitoring of the OFF monitoring time (S211) to interruption permission (S216) are executed. In this way, by performing the processing of S113 and the like at the time of the replay, it is possible to accept the insertion of the game medal according to the state of the stored number of sheets even at the time of the replay.

  In the present embodiment, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), the input detection process related to the selector passage sensor 46 and the operation information output process for operating the blocker 47 based on the blocker ON signal data and the blocker OFF signal data. Has been done. That is, the input detection processing based on the selector passage sensor signal is performed by the input port data generation processing of the timer interrupt processing (S545) and the error check processing of the second control described later (see FIG. 38). The drive data output process for operating the is performed in the control command transmission process (S548) of the timer interrupt process and the like. The input detection processing and the operation information output processing are executed at a timing according to the control state at that time in the timer interrupt processing based on the data set in the game progress main processing.

  In the blocker OFF process (see FIG. 23B) for turning the blocker 47 into the OFF state (return state), the input sensor abnormality input detection start time is set (S225) as described above. In this embodiment, the start time of detection of the abnormal input of the closing sensor is set to about 500.60 ms. The input sensor abnormality input detection start time substantially coincides with the time (time required for the 224 interrupt) required to execute the above-described timer interrupt cycle (here, 2.235 ms) a predetermined number of times (here, 224 times). I have. Then, an abnormal input related to the input sensor is detected after the elapse of the input sensor error input detection start time.

  According to the control mode relating to the re-game as described above, when there is a possibility that the game medal is passing, the pinch of the medal can be prevented by not turning on the blocker 47. That is, in a portion of the medal passage 105 near the selector passage sensor 46 and the blocker 47, the presence of the bent portion 110 (see FIG. 7), the eccentricity between adjacent game medals, and the ON operation of the blocker 47. There is a possibility that the game medals may be meshed with each other due to the effect of the timing or the like, and the game medals may be pinched.

  In particular, for example, when the player continuously and continuously inserts a game medal into the game medal slot 21 (see FIG. 1) from the end of one game to the start of the next game, the medal passage 105 It is difficult to secure a gap between the game medals, and when the blocker 47 performs the ON operation, the engagement of the game medals is determined by the positional relationship between the plurality of game medals and the balance of factors such as the force applied to the game medals from the blocker 47. Can occur.

  However, as in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the blocker OFF monitoring time has elapsed (S211) and then the blocker signal is turned on (S213), so that the ON operation of the blocker 47 is reserved for a predetermined period. Thus, it is possible to secure a time to wait for the passing of a game medal until the blocker signal is output from the main control board 61 or the blocker 47 performs a mechanical operation. And it can prevent that a game medal is pinched.

  Further, when the blocker 47 is turned off (returned state), as in the case where the start lever 25 is operated, after waiting for the input sensor abnormality input detection start time (500.60 ms) to elapse as described above. An abnormal input related to the input sensor is detected. Therefore, almost at the same time when the game medals are normally detected by the insertion sensor 45 or the like, the blocker 47 performs the OFF operation, and the game medals counted normally are returned from the game medal payout opening 16. Can be prevented.

  When the blocker 47 is turned off (returned state), as described above, the blocker signal OFF data is set in the RWM 83, and an output request is issued. According to FIG. 18, the blocker 47 performs a mechanical operation for returning to the return state. However, immediately after the blocker signal OFF data is set, the abnormal input inspection by the input sensor 2 is started, and the blocker 47 arrives immediately before the input sensor 2 while the blocker 47 is still in the ON state (passable state). A game medal that has been played may later be detected by the insertion sensor 2. Then, although the passing of such game medals is normal, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the insertion sensor 2.

Under such circumstances, as in the present embodiment, the determination of the abnormal input related to the input sensor 45 is performed after the input sensor abnormal input detection start time of about 500 ms becomes effective from the timing of the blocker OFF data set. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the passing of the normal game medals from being determined as abnormal, and it is possible to more accurately determine the occurrence of an error.
<<< Interrupt prohibition processing in blocker ON / OFF processing >>>

  As described above, in the blocker ON process (see FIG. 23A), the interruption is prohibited after the elapse of the monitoring time at blocker OFF (S211) (S212). In the present embodiment, the value of the closing monitoring counter increases or decreases based on the detection of the selector passage sensor signal and the closing sensor 2 signal, as described above for the C1 error relating to the closing sensor and the selector passage sensor (see FIG. 9A). When the value of the input monitoring counter exceeds a predetermined range (for example, a range of 0 to 3), the blocker 47 is turned off. Then, in the blocker ON process (see FIG. 23A), the process related to the blocker signal (S213, S215) and the process related to the input monitoring counter (S214) are executed as a series of processes. The operation of the blocker 47 is matched with the detection result of the selector passage sensor signal and the input sensor 2 signal.

  Also, in the blocker OFF process (see FIG. 23B), the setting of the input sensor abnormality input detection start time (S225) is performed after prohibiting the interrupt (S222), the blocker signal OFF (S223), and the blocker signal. It is performed following each processing of the state OFF (S224). That is, in the blocker OFF process, the process related to the blocker signal (S223, S224) and the input sensor abnormality input detection start time set (S225) related to the input error check are executed as a series of processes. In this way, the integrity of the operation of the blocker 47 in the return state and the error check is ensured.

  In the present embodiment, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), the input detection process related to the selector passage sensor 46, the addition process of the count value of the closing monitoring counter, and the blocker ON signal data and the blocker OFF signal data are performed. An operation information output process for operating the blocker 47 is performed based on the operation information. That is, the input detection process based on the selector passage sensor signal is performed by the input port data generation process of the timer interrupt process (S545) and the error check process of the second control described later (see FIG. 38). The process of adding the count value of the counter is performed in the error check process (see FIG. 38) of the error management (see FIG. 20) in the timer interrupt process. In addition, the drive data output for operating the blocker 47 is performed. The processing is performed in the control command transmission processing (S548) of the timer interrupt processing. The input detection processing, the insertion monitoring counter update processing, and the operation information output processing are based on the data set in the game progress main processing, and are performed at timing according to the control state at that time in the timer interrupt processing. Be executed.

Here, the relationship between the updating process of the count value of the insertion monitoring counter in the game progress main process and the updating process of the count value of the insertion monitoring counter in the timer interrupt process is limited to the above-described correspondence relationship of addition and subtraction. is not. For example, the count value of the insertion monitoring counter may be added in the game progress main process, and the count value of the insertion monitoring counter may be subtracted in the timer interrupt process. In this case, for example, the initial value of the count value of the insertion monitoring counter is set to “3” or more, and the initial value is subtracted by a timer interrupt process. , And a process of determining whether or not the count value is within the normal range is performed.
<< Relationship with setting key switch operation >>

  Next, the relationship between the process for operating the blocker 47 and the operation of the setting key switch will be described. First, in the processing for waiting for a game medal insertion described above, when the setting key switch signal is ON, that is, the data of the setting key switch signal in a predetermined area (setting key switch signal data storage area) of the RWM 83 indicates ON. If so, the blocker OFF process shown in FIG. 23B is executed. Then, data for turning off the blocker signal is stored in a predetermined area (blocker signal data storage area) in the RWM 83.

  Subsequently, the setting display LED 66 (see FIG. 4) for displaying the set value is made valid. At this time, in the process (S55 in FIG. 14) at the time of waiting for the insertion of a game medal, each process from the setting of the output request at the start of setting value display to the lighting of the setting display LED is executed. Further, when the data stored in the setting key switch signal data storage area of the RWM 83 indicates OFF, the blocker ON process is executed. Here, the case where the data stored in the setting key switch signal data storage area is OFF means that the setting key switch signal falls and data is stored here.

  Then, as described above, when the blocker OFF monitoring time has elapsed (S211: YES), a series of subsequent processes (S212 to S216) are performed, and in S213, data for turning on the blocker signal is executed. Is set. The process of generating input data and falling data related to the setting key switch is performed in the process of generating input port data for a timer interrupt (see FIG. 18) (S545). Therefore, in this case as well, while the game medal may be passing, it is possible to prevent the medal from being pinched by not setting the ON data of the blocker signal.

  In the present embodiment, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), the input detection process of the selector passage sensor 46, the input detection process of the start lever 25, and the blocker ON signal data and the blocker OFF signal data are performed. An operation information output process for operating the blocker 47 is performed. That is, the input detection processing based on the selector passage sensor signal and the input detection processing based on the start lever sensor signal are performed by the input port data generation processing (S545) and the input error check processing (S83) of the timer interrupt processing. The drive data output process for operating the blocker 47 is performed in the control command transmission process (S548) of the timer interrupt process. The input detection processing and the operation information output processing are executed at a timing according to the control state at that time in the timer interrupt processing based on the data set in the game progress main processing.

According to the control mode as described above, the coordination between the setting key switch operation and the blocker operation can be accurately performed, and the blocker operation control during the setting key switch operation can be appropriately performed.
<< Relationship with error processing >>

  Next, the relationship between the processing for operating the blocker 47 and the error processing will be described. What is described here is a processing example in the case where the above-described CE error (see FIG. 10) has occurred. The CE error is caused by a portion (FIG. 10) provided with the closing sensor 1 (115) or the closing sensor 2 (116). 7), it is determined that the game medal has stayed.

  First, in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), when the insertion sensor 1 signal or the insertion sensor 2 (116) is continuously detected for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that the game medal is staying (CE error). Here, the predetermined time related to the determination of the game medal stay is about 143.03 ms, which is the upper limit of the stay determination passage times A and C described above. Then, the process proceeds to the error display processing shown in FIG. 24, where the error number is stored (S231), and the status information relating to the pre-error blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal is saved (S232). Further, after turning off the hopper motor drive signal (S233), a blocker OFF process (S234) is executed, and as shown in FIG. 23B, data for turning off the blocker signal is set in S223. .

  Subsequently, when the error factor is removed (S248: YES), the blocker signal before the error is output through processing such as clearing of the error number (S249) and restoring various information (S250, S253, S254). It is determined whether it was ON (S255). If the blocker signal before the error is ON (S255: YES), the blocker ON process (S256) is executed, and after the elapse of the blocker OFF monitoring time (S211), the blocker signal is output. Data for turning ON is stored (S213). Therefore, in this case as well, while the game medal may be passing, it is possible to prevent the medal from being pinched by not setting the ON data of the blocker signal.

  In the present embodiment, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), the input detection process related to the selector passage sensor 46 and the operation information output process for operating the blocker 47 based on the blocker ON signal data and the blocker OFF signal data. Is performed by a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). That is, the input detection processing based on the selector passage sensor signal is performed by the input port data generation processing of the timer interrupt processing (S545) and the error check processing of the second control described later (see FIG. 38). Is performed in the control command transmission process (S548) of the timer interrupt process. The input detection processing and the operation information output processing are executed at a timing according to the control state at that time in the timer interrupt processing based on the data set in the game progress main processing.

According to the control mode described above, it is possible to accurately perform the cooperation between the error processing and the blocker operation, and to appropriately perform the blocker operation control when an error occurs.
<< Game medal management processing >>

  Next, the above-described game medal management process (see S56 in FIG. 14) will be described with reference to FIG. This game medal management process is a process for shifting to the case where there is a game medal (S54: YES) by checking the presence or absence of a game medal (S54) in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14).

  In the game medal management process shown in FIG. 26, the management of the game medal insertion and settlement process is performed. More specifically, it is determined whether or not a data set for turning on the blocker 47 described above (a state in which the game medal can pass) is performed (S321). Here, it is checked whether or not the blocker 47, which is the flow path switching unit of the game medal selector 44 that receives or discharges the manually inserted game medals, is in a reception state (medal flow path formation state).

  If the data set for turning on the blocker 47 has been set (S321: YES), it is determined whether or not the insertion sensor signal has been turned on (S322), and it is determined whether or not a game medal has been inserted. . The determination of whether or not the insertion of the game medal is detected is to determine whether or not the actual game medal is detected by the above-described insertion sensors 115 and 116, and determines whether or not the betting setting (bet) is present. This processing is different from the aforementioned S54 (see the game progress main processing in FIG. 14).

  Here, even if only the insertion sensor 2 (116) located on the downstream side of the medal passage 105 among the insertion sensor 1 (115) and the insertion sensor 2 (116) only detects a game medal, Is determined to have been input (S322: YES). Then, if the insertion of the game medal is detected (S322: YES), the game medal insertion check process of the second control for performing the insertion process such as determining whether or not the game medal insertion is appropriate (FIG. 42, 43 (see FIG. 43). That is, when both the blocker signal and the insertion sensor signal are ON (S321: YES, S322: YES), the processing shifts to a game medal insertion check (FIGS. 42 and 43).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the blocker state confirmation process (S321) that the data of the blocker ON is not set (S321: NO) or when the insertion of the game medal is not detected (S322: NO), the game is performed. Without performing the medal insertion check process (see FIGS. 42 and 43), it is determined whether the operation of the bet button or the clearing button on the main input unit 26 (see FIG. 1) can be accepted (S323). The determination as to whether or not the button operation is acceptable (S323) is to determine whether or not various bet buttons or the settlement button are in an acceptable state. Then, it is determined that the reception is not possible when the start lever 25 is operated, or when any one of the stop buttons (24L to 24R) is operated.

  If the various bet buttons or the settlement button described above cannot be accepted (S323: NO), the process exits the game medal management and returns to the original process. If the operation can be accepted (S323: YES), it is determined whether or not the operation has been accepted (S324). The determination as to whether or not this button operation has been accepted (S324) is a process in the case of performing an input in response to the button operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the bet amount has already reached the upper limit, and it is determined whether or not the operated insertion button is the aforementioned 1 BET button. If it is a 1BET button, one piece of data is set. If it is not a 1BET button, the above-mentioned MAXBET is determined, and the prescribed number of the next game is set to the expected number of bets. Then, it is determined whether or not the set bet amount setting number is larger than the stored number (reserved medal number) indicating the stored number. If the stored number is smaller, the set bet amount set number is set to the stored number. . Further, a control command indicating that the insert button has been pressed is set, and the setting of one bet and the subtraction of one reserve are repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected number of bets to be set.

  In the process of determining whether or not the above-described button operation has been received (S324), if no operation has been received (S324: NO), the process exits the game medal management and returns to the original process. On the other hand, if an operation has been received (S324: YES), it is determined whether or not the clearing button is ON (S325). If the clearing button is not ON (S325: NO), a storage input process described later (FIG. 27). If the clearing button is ON (S325: YES), a game medal clearing process (S326) for performing a clearing in accordance with the operation of the button is executed, and the process returns to the original process.

  More specifically, when the signal of the clearing button (clearing switch signal) changes from OFF to ON, the signal to the game start display LED (game start display LED signal) is turned off, and the game medal clearing process is performed. The process moves to (S326). Also, when the one-sheet insertion switch signal or the three-sheet insertion sensor signal is turned from OFF to ON, the game start display LED signal is turned OFF, and the process shifts to storing. If a negative determination (NO) is made in at least one of S321 and S322, and a negative determination (NO) is made in S323 or S324, the game medal management process ends.

  FIG. 28 shows the contents of the above-mentioned game medal clearing process (S326) more specifically. In this game medal clearing process, the operation flag is checked (S371), and it is determined whether or not the re-game operation is being performed (S372). If the operation is being performed (S372: YES), the game in which the bet amount is set is performed. The presence or absence of medals is confirmed (S373). If there is a game medal for which the number of bets is set (S373: YES), blocker OFF data is set (S374), and the medal passage 105 of the game medal selector 44 (see FIG. 6). ) Is set to an injection impossible state. Then, a clearing start command is set as a control command (S375).

  Further, the number of game medals for which the number of bets is set is read (S376), and settlement processing is performed one by one until the number of games for which the number of bets is set. Here, every time one game medal is paid out, the number of bets (the number of bets) is decremented by 1 (S377), the number of game medals for which the number of bets is set is read (S378), and the settlement of the number of bets is completed. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S379). If the settlement for the number of bets has been completed (S379: YES), the game medal limit flag is cleared (S380). The game medal limit flag is a flag used to prohibit insertion button acceptance.

  Subsequently, a clearing end command is set as a control command (S381), blocker ON data is set (S382), and the medal path 105 (see FIG. 6) of the game medal selector 44 is returned to a state where it can be inserted. Then, the game medal clearing process ends, and the process returns to the original process. If it is determined in step S379 whether the settlement for the number of bets has been completed (S379), if the settlement for the number of bets has not been completed (S379: NO), the process returns to reading the number of bets (S376) and returns to step S376. Until the settlement is completed, the processing of S376 to S379 is repeated.

  On the other hand, in the above-mentioned determination of whether or not the re-game operation is being performed (S372), when it is determined that the re-game is not being performed (S372: NO), or the presence or absence of the game medal for which the bet amount is set (S373). ), If there is no game medal for which the number of bets is set (S373: NO), a process of reading the stored number (S383) is executed. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a stored number (S384). If there is no stored number (S384: NO), the game medal clearing process ends, and the process returns to the original process.

  In the confirmation of the presence or absence of the stored game medals (S384), if there is a stored game medal (S384: YES), the blocker OFF data is set (S385), and the game medal selector 44 The medal passage 105 (see FIG. 6) is set in a state where insertion is impossible. Then, a clearing start command is set as a control command (S386). The setting of the blocker OFF data (S385) and the setting of the clearing start command (S386) can be the same processing as the above-described S374 and S375.

  Further, the number of stored game medals is read (S387), and the settlement processing is performed one by one up to the stored number. Here, every time one game medal is paid out, the stored number is decremented by one (S388), the remaining stored number is read (S389), and it is determined whether the settlement for the stored number is completed. (S390). If the settlement for the stored number has been completed (S390: YES), the above-mentioned settlement end command is set (S381), the blocker ON data set (S382) is performed, and the game medal settlement process ends. Return to the original processing.

If it is determined in step S390 whether or not the liquidation for the stored number has been completed (S390), if the liquidation for the stored number has not been completed (S390: NO), the process returns to reading the stored number of sheets (S387) to return to the stored number. Until the settlement ends, the processing of S387 to S390 is repeated.
<< Storage storage processing >>

  Subsequently, the above-described storing and charging process will be described with reference to FIG. This storing and inputting process is a process for shifting to a case where the clearing button is not ON (S325: NO) by the determination (S325) of whether or not the clearing button is ON in the game medal management process (see FIG. 26). It is.

  In the storage and insertion process shown in FIG. 27, it is determined whether or not the game medal limit flag is set (S331). If the game medal limit flag is set (S331: YES), the storage and insertion process is performed. And returns to the original process in the game progress main process. If the game medal limit flag is not set (S331: NO), the processing of setting the required number of inserts (S332) is executed. In this required insertion number set (S332), “1” is set as the required insertion number, and when the rising of the MAXBET switch signal is detected, the upper limit of the bet amount and the currently set bet amount are set. The difference is set as the required number of insertions.

  Subsequently, the stored number reading process (S333) is performed, and it is determined whether or not there is a stored number of game medals (S334). If there is a stored number of sheets (S334: YES), the storage input process ends, and the process returns to the original process in the game progress main process. If there is no stored number (S334: NO), the rising data of the insertion switch signal is cleared (S335), and the determination of the relationship between the stored number of game medals and the required number of insertions (S336) is executed. If the number of stored game medals is not equal to or larger than the required number of insertions (S336: NO), the value of the number of stored game medals is set to the required number of insertions (S337), and the process proceeds to the processing of adding one game medal (S338). . In S336 described above, if the number of stored game medals is equal to or larger than the required number of insertions (S336: YES), the process proceeds to the processing of adding one game medal (S338) without setting the value of the stored number of game medals (S337). Transition.

  In the process of adding one game medal (S338), "1" is added to the bet amount. Thereafter, the acquired number display clearing process (S339) is executed, the bet amount display process (S340) is executed, and the specified number and the number of game medals are read (S341). Further, a determination process relating to the game medal number limit (S342) is executed, and it is determined whether or not the bet number has reached the upper limit. If the number of bets has reached the upper limit (S342: YES), the game medal limit flag is set (S343), and the process proceeds to the stored number reading process (S345). If the number of bets has not reached the upper limit (S342: NO), the process proceeds to the stored number reading process (S345) without performing the process of setting the game medal limit flag (S343).

After the storage number reading process (S345), a process of subtracting one storage number is performed (S345), and it is determined whether a series of processes related to the required number of insertions has been performed for the required number of insertions (S346). ) Is executed. If the processing for the number of requested insertions has been completed (S346: YES), the storage / input processing ends, and the processing returns to the original processing in the game progress main processing. If the processing for the number of requested insertions has not been completed (S346: NO), the processing subsequent to the processing for adding one game medal (S338) is executed again.
<Various processes related to the second control>

Next, various processes in the above-described second control will be described.
<RWM initialization 2>

  FIG. 30 shows a process of RWM initialization 2 used in the above-described power return process (see FIG. 21) and the like. In the processing of the RWM initialization 2, the second working area provided in the predetermined RWM area (F200H to F3FFH) and the maximum usage amount (F210H to F21EH, F3F3H to F3FFH) of the second stack area are not yet processed. Clear the used area.

  More specifically, the stack pointer is saved (S871), an area outside the area used by the stack pointer is set (S872), and a predetermined register is saved (S873). Further, the RWM initialization start address is set (S874), the number of RWM initialization bytes is set (S875), and the RWM is initialized (S876). Then, the next RWM address is set (S877), and it is determined whether or not the RWM has been initialized (S878).

  If the RWM initialization has been completed in S878 (S878: YES), the RWM initialization start address is set (S879). If the RWM initialization has not been completed (S878: NO), the RWM initialization in S876 is performed. Return to the initialization process. After S879, the number of RWM initialization bytes is set (S880), and RWM initialization is performed (S881).

Further, the next RWM address is set (S882), and it is determined whether or not the RWM has been initialized (S883). If the initialization of the RWM has been completed in S883 (S883: YES), the register is restored (S884). If the initialization has not been completed (S883: NO), the processing of the RWM initialization in S881 is performed. Return to After S884, the stack pointer is restored (S885), and the process ends.
<RWM initialization 3>

  Next, the process of RWM initialization 3 used in the above-described setting change device process (see FIG. 13) and the like will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, in the RWM initialization 3, the stack pointer is saved (S891), an area outside the area used by the stack pointer is set (S892), and a predetermined register is saved (S891). S893). Further, the RWM initialization start address is set (S894), the number of RWM initialization bytes is set (S895), and the RWM is initialized (S896).

  Subsequently, the next RWM address is set (S897), and it is determined whether or not the RWM has been initialized (S898). If the initialization of the RWM has been completed in S898 (S898: YES), the register is restored (S899), and if the initialization has not been completed (S898: NO), the processing of the RWM initialization in S896 described above. Return to After S899, the stack pointer is restored (S900), and the process ends.

As a control module related to the RWM initialization, for example, in addition to the above-described RWM initialization 2 and the RWM initialization 3, an RWM initialization 1 according to the first control is provided. This RWM initialization 1 shifts from the control module used in the game start set process (S52) of the power-on process (see FIG. 12) according to the first control. The description of the process is omitted.
<Serial communication settings>

  Next, a process of setting serial communication used for serial communication will be described. In this serial communication setting, the transmission function setting of the SCU 1 used for the test shooting test output is performed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, the stack pointer is saved (S911), an area outside the area used by the stack pointer is set (S912), and a predetermined register is saved (S913).

Further, the SCU1 baud rate register address (lower order) is set (S914), and the SCU1 baud rate register is set (S915). Next, the SCU channel 1 transmission function is used, the FIFO mode, the data length is 9 bits, the parity is used, and the parity is set (S916), the register is restored (S917), and the stack pointer is restored (S918). , And the process ends.
<Symbol stop signal output>

  Next, a process of outputting a symbol stop signal used in the above-described processing of the condition device command set (see FIG. 16) and the like will be described. In the processing of the condition device command set, symbol stop signal data for a test shot test is output. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the stack pointer is saved (S921), an area outside the area used by the stack pointer is set (S922), and a predetermined register is saved (S923).

  Further, the SCU1 data register is set (S924), and the first command (turning cylinder information designation) is written (S925). Subsequently, the second command (designating the turning body information) is written (S926), and the processing of the symbol stop signal set is performed (S927). The processing of the symbol stop signal set (S927) will be described later.

  Also, the number of transmissions and the first command (push order designation) data are set (S928), and the first command is written (S929). Further, the second command data is obtained from the stop reception designation table (S930), and the second command is written (S931). Further, the next first command data is set (S932), and the next table address is set (S933).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the transmission is completed (S934). If the transmission is completed (S934: YES), the register is restored (S935), the stack pointer is restored (S936), and the process ends. I do. If the transmission has not been completed in S934 (S934: NO), the process returns to the first command write process in S929.
<Symbol stop signal set>

  Next, the symbol stop signal set process (S927) used in the symbol stop signal output process (see FIG. 33) will be described. In the processing of the condition device command set, a symbol stop signal data table for a test shot test is set according to the instruction number, the operation state flag, and the bonus condition device number.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 34, the stop reception designation table 2 is set (S941), and the offset is set (S942). Further, it is determined whether or not the instruction number is 0 (S943). If the instruction number is 0 (S943: YES), the stop acceptance designation table 1 is set (S944). In addition, it is determined whether or not the bonus operation is being performed (S945). If it is not the bonus operation (S945: NO), the stop reception designation table 2 is set (S946).

  Subsequently, an offset is set (S947), and it is determined whether or not the bonus condition device is not operated (S948). If the bonus condition device is not in operation (S948: NO), an offset is generated (S949), a stop reception designation table is set according to the offset (S950), and the process ends.

If the instruction number is not 0 in S943 (S943: NO), the process of the stop reception designation table set according to the offset is performed (S850) without performing the process in between. If the bonus is activated in S945 (S945: YES), or if the bonus condition device is not activated in S948 (S948: YES), the processing is terminated without performing the subsequent processing. I do.
<Test signal output>

  Next, a description will be given of a test signal output process used in the above-described error management process (see FIG. 20) and the like. In this test signal output process, a test signal for simulation test, condition device information, and replay state identification information are output. Then, the bonus operation information and the re-game operation information are output to the output port 10, and the output data is output to the port 9 according to the condition device output time and the re-game state identification information flag. Then, when the bonus condition differential device information is output, the bonus condition device information is output, when the winning and replaying condition device information is output, the winning and replaying condition device information is output, and when the replaying state identification information flag is ON, the replaying game is performed. It outputs state identification information, and otherwise outputs clear data.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, the stack pointer is saved (S961), and the stack pointer (out of the used area) is set (S962). Subsequently, the register is saved (S963), and test signal output data is generated (S964). Further, a test signal is output (S965), and an RT state number is obtained (S966).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the bonus operation is being performed (S967). If the bonus operation is being performed (S967: YES), the re-game except for the operation of the predetermined bonus (here, one type of BB-A) is performed. A state identification signal is set (S968). Further, it is determined whether or not the predetermined bonus (one type BB-A) is activated (S969). If the predetermined bonus (one type BB-A) is activated (S969: YES), the predetermined bonus (one type BB-A) is activated. A re-game state identification signal according to the time A) is set (S970).

  Subsequently, a re-game state identification signal is generated (S971), and it is determined whether or not the re-game state identification information flag is ON (S972). Here, the re-game state identification information is information generated based on the RT state number and the operation type. If the bonus operation has not been performed in S967 (S967: NO), the process in S972 is not performed, and it is determined in S972 whether or not the re-game state identification information flag is ON. If the above-mentioned predetermined bonus (one type BB-A) has not been activated in S969 (S969: NO), S970 is not performed, and the re-game state identification information flag in S972 is set. It is determined whether it is ON.

  If the re-game state identification information flag is not ON in S972 (S972: NO), the condition device information clear data is set (S973), and it is determined whether or not it is time to output the condition device information. Is performed (S974). If it is time to output the condition device information (S974: YES), the data at the time of outputting the accessory condition device information is set (S975), and the bonus condition device number RWM address is set (S976).

  Further, it is determined whether or not it is time to output the accessory condition device information (S977). If it is not the time to output the accessory condition device information (S977: NO), the winning and replaying condition device information is determined. A data set (S978), a winning and replay condition device number RWM address are set (S979), and a condition device number is obtained (S980). In S977, when it is the time of outputting the accessory condition device information (S977: YES), the process in S980 is not performed, and the condition device number is obtained in S980 (S980).

  Subsequently, the condition device lower information (lower digit information) is set (S981), and it is determined whether or not it is time to output the condition device lower information (S982). If it is not the time to output the condition device lower information (S982: NO), the condition device higher information (higher digit information) is set (S983), and the condition device information is generated (S984). Then, the condition device information is output (S985), the register is restored (S986), the stack pointer is restored (S987), and the process ends.

If the re-game state identification information flag is ON in S972 (S972: YES), and if it is not the condition device information output in S974 (S974: NO), the process between the two is performed. Instead, the condition device information is output in S985 (S985). If it is determined in S982 that the condition device lower-level information has been output (S982: YES), the above-described process 983 is not performed, and the process of generating the condition device information in S984 is performed (S984).
<Input / Discharge sensor error set>

  Next, processing of the above described insertion / payout sensor abnormality set relating to detection of an error in insertion / payout of game medals and the like will be described. In the processing of the input / output sensor abnormality set, a display request of a corresponding error is made according to the error detection flag.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 36, the stack pointer is saved (S991), and the stack pointer (out of the used area) is set (S992). Further, the register is saved (S993), and a display request for a CH error is set (S994). It is determined whether a CH error has been detected (S995). If not detected (S995: NO), the error display request is cleared (S996).

Subsequently, the error display request data is saved (S997), the register is restored (S998), the stack pointer is restored (S999), and the process is terminated. If a CH error is detected in S995 (S995: YES), the error display request clearing process in S996 is not performed, and the error display request data in S997 is saved.
<Clear input / output sensor error>

  Next, a description will be given of the processing for clearing the insertion / payout sensor abnormality relating to the processing at the time of error display of the insertion / payout of game medals. In the input / output sensor error clearing process, when an error display request is issued, the corresponding error detection flag and related data are cleared. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, the stack pointer is saved (S1011), and the stack pointer (out of the used area) is set (S1012).

Further, the register is saved (S1013), and an error detection flag is set (S1014). Further, it is determined whether there is a request for displaying a CH error (S1015). If there is a display request (S1015: YES), the CH error detection flag is cleared (S1016). Then, the register is restored (S1017), the stack pointer is restored (S1018), and the process is terminated. If there is no display request in S1015 (S1015: NO), the process of S1017 is performed without performing S1016.
<Error check>

  Next, an error check process used in the above-described error management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. In this error check process, various error check processes are performed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 38, the stack pointer is saved (S1021), an area outside the area used by the stack pointer is set (S1022), and a predetermined register is saved (S1023).

Further, in the error check process, a set value error check process (S1024), a built-in random number check process (S1025), a timer measurement 2 process (S1026), a game medal insertion check process (S1027), a game medal pass The status update process (S1028), the input / output sensor abnormality check process (S1029), and the error display request data clear process (S1030) are sequentially performed. These processes will be described later. After the error display request data clearing process (S1030), the register is restored (S1031), the stack pointer is restored (S1032), and the process ends.
<Setting value error check>

  Next, the setting value error check process (S1024) used in the above-described error check process (see FIG. 38) will be described. In this set value error check process, it is checked whether the setting stage is within the normal range. If not, the process proceeds to the non-recoverable error process 2.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 39, an E6 error, which is one of the non-recoverable errors, is set (S1036), and it is determined whether the set value is less than the maximum value (here, 6). Is performed (S1037). Further, in S1037, if the set value is less than the maximum value (S1037: YES), the process is terminated. If the set value is not less than the maximum value (S1037: NO), the process shifts to non-recoverable error process 2. This unrecoverable error processing 2 will be described later (see FIG. 49).
<Built-in random number check>

  Next, the internal random number check process (S1025) used in the above-described error check process (see FIG. 38) will be described. In the built-in random number check process, when the occurrence of a built-in random number update-related abnormality is detected, the process proceeds to the non-recoverable error process 2, and when not detected, the 8-bit random number is checked.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 40, an E7 error, which is one of the unrecoverable errors, is set (S1041), and the internal information register data is obtained (S1042). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not an internal random number update-related abnormality has occurred (S1043). If not (S1043: NO), an 8-bit random number maximum placement inspection table is set (S1044). Then, the RS0 soft latch random value register address is set (S1045), and the process of the 8-bit random number inspection is performed four times (S1046 to S1049), and the process is completed.

Further, in the processing of determining whether or not the internal random number update-related abnormality has occurred in S1043, if an abnormality has occurred (S1043: YES), the process proceeds to the non-recoverable error process 2. This non-returnable error processing 2 will be described later (see FIG. 63). Here, the reason why the process of the 8-bit random number inspection is performed four times in S1046 to S1049 is that there are four corresponding registers, and the check of these four registers is performed in order.
<Timer measurement 2>

  Next, the process of timer measurement 2 (S1026) used in the above-described error check process (see FIG. 38) will be described. In the timer measurement 2 process, the timer RWM1 used in the error check is subtracted (if it is less than 0, 0 is set).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 41, a measurement start timer address is set (S1051), and one byte timer number 2 is set (S1052). Further, the 1-byte timer value is updated (S1053), and the next timer address is set (S1054). In addition, it is determined whether or not the measurement of the 1-byte timer has been completed (S1055). If the measurement has been completed (S1055: YES), the process is terminated. If the measurement of the one-byte timer has not been completed in S1055 (S1055: NO), the process returns to the one-byte timer value update process in S1053.
<Checking game medal input>

  Next, the game medal insertion check (S1027) used in the above-described error check process (see FIG. 38) will be described. In the game medal insertion check processing, when the medal insertion inspection flag is ON or the blocker signal is ON, the insertion sensors 1 and 2 are inspected, and when an abnormal passage is detected, a display request for each error is issued. When the check time for passing the insertion sensor 1 or the check time for passing the insertion sensor 2 is exceeded, a request for displaying a CE error is made, and when a game medal passes illegally, a request for displaying a CP error is made. Further, if the input monitoring counter is not within the normal range, a request for displaying a C1 error is made.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 42, the previous blocker signal data is set (S1061), and blocker signal data is generated (S1062). Further, blocker signal data is generated this time (S1063), and blocker signal data is generated (S1064). Further, it is determined whether or not the rise of the blocker signal has been detected (S1065). If the rising has been detected (S1065: YES), the closing monitoring counter is cleared (S1066).

  Further, it is determined whether or not the medal insertion inspection flag is ON (S1067). If it is not ON (S1067: NO), it is determined whether or not the blocker signal is ON (S1068). Further, when the blocker signal is ON (S1068: YES), data of the previous game medal passing state is acquired (S1069). Then, it is determined whether or not the insertion sensor signal is ON (S1070). If it is ON (S1070: YES), a medal insertion inspection flag is set (S1071).

  If the rise of the blocker signal is not detected in S1065 (S1065: NO), S1066 is not performed, and it is determined whether or not the medal insertion inspection flag is ON (S1067). If the medal insertion inspection flag is ON in S1067 (S1067: YES), the process in step S1070 is not performed, and it is determined whether the insertion sensor signal is ON. If the blocker signal is not ON in S1068 (S1068: NO), the process ends.

  After S1071, it is determined whether or not the input sensor 1 signal is ON (S1072). If the signal is ON (S1072: YES), a CP error is set (S1073). Further, it is determined whether or not the game medal passing state 1 or 3 was the previous situation (S1074). If a negative determination is made (S1074: NO), it is determined whether the game medal passing state 0 was the last time. A determination is made (S1075).

  If an affirmative determination is made in S1075 (S1075: YES), a setting of the passage check time of the input sensor 1 is performed (S1076) and a CE error is set (1077). Then, it is determined whether or not the passage time of the input sensor 1 has been exceeded (S1078). If not (S1078: NO), the process ends. If a negative determination is made in S1075 (S1075: NO), S1076 is not performed, and a CE error is set in S1077 (1077).

  If the input sensor 1 signal is not ON in S1072 (S1072: NO), it is determined whether the signals of the input sensors 1 and 2 are ON, as shown in S1079 in FIG. . Further, when the insertion sensors 1 and 2 signals are ON (S1079: YES), a CP error is set (S1080), and it is determined whether or not the game medal passing state 0 or 1 was the last time. (S1081).

  Then, if it is not the situation of the previous game medal passing state 0 or 1, it is determined whether or not it is the situation of the last game medal passing state 2 (S1082), and if it is affirmative, it is determined (S1082: YES). ), The setting of the input sensor 2 passage check time is performed (S1083). Further, a CE error is set (S1084), and it is determined whether or not the passing time of the input sensor 2 has exceeded (S1085).

  In S1085, if the passing time of the input sensor 2 has not exceeded (S1085: NO), it is determined whether or not the passing time of the input sensor 1 has exceeded (S1085). (S1086: NO), the process ends. In S1082, if it is not the situation of the game medal passing state 2 last time (S1082: NO), S1083 is not performed, and the CE error is set in S1084 (S1084).

  If the input sensors 1 and 2 signals are not ON in S1079 (S1079: NO), a CP error is set in S1087 as shown in FIG. Further, it is determined whether or not the previous game medal passing state was 0 or 2 (S1088). If the determination is negative (S1088: NO), a CE error is set (S1089), and the passing of the insertion sensor 2 is performed. It is determined whether the time has passed (S1090). Then, when the passing time of the input sensor 2 has exceeded (S1090: NO), the processing is ended.

  If the insertion sensor signal is not ON in 1070 shown in FIG. 42 (S1070: NO), the flow shifts to S1091 shown in FIG. 43 to clear the medal insertion inspection flag. Further, the data of the insertion sensor 1 passage check time and the insertion sensor 2 passage check time are cleared (S1092), and it is determined whether or not the game medal passing state 0 is the last time (S1093).

  If it is not the status of the previous game medal passing state 0 (S1093: NO), it is determined whether or not the status is the last game medal passing state 2 (S1094), and if a negative determination is made (S1094: NO). ), A CP error is set (S1095). In S1093, when the game medal passing state is 0 last time (S1093: YES), or when the game medal passing state 2 is last time in S1094 (S1094: YES), the process is ended. I do.

  After the above-mentioned S1095, it is determined whether or not the game medal passing state 1 is the previous situation (S1096). If an affirmative determination is made (S1096: YES), the insertion monitoring counter is decremented by 1 (S1097), and the insertion is performed. It is determined whether the value of the monitoring counter is within the normal range (S1098). Further, if the input monitoring counter is not in the normal range (S1098: NO), the error display request data is stored (S1099), and the process is terminated.

In S1096, if it is not the situation of the game medal passing state 1 last time (S1096: NO), or in each process of S1074, S1078, S1081, S1086 shown in FIG. 42 and S1088, S1090 shown in FIG. If the determination is YES), the flow shifts to S1099, where the error display request data is stored (S1099). If the input monitoring counter is within the normal range in S1098 (S1098: YES), the process is terminated.
<Update of game medal passing status>

Next, a process of updating the game medal passing state (S1028) used in the above-described error check process (see FIG. 38) will be described. In the game medal insertion check process, as shown in FIG. 44, the game medal passing state is updated according to the insertion sensor signal. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 44, the input sensor signal information is acquired (S1106), the game medal passing state is updated (S1107), and the process is terminated.
<Checking input / output sensor errors>

  Next, the input / output sensor abnormality check process (S1029) used in the above-described error check process (see FIG. 38) will be described. In the processing of the game medal insertion check, the input abnormality of the insertion sensor, the input abnormality of the payout sensor, and the passage abnormality of the selector passage sensor are monitored.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, the previous error detection flag is updated (S1111), and it is determined whether or not the fall of the blocker signal is detected (here, whether or not the signal is turned off). (S1112). Further, when the falling of the blocker signal is detected (S1112: YES), the input sensor abnormality input detection start time is set (S1113), and it is determined whether or not an input-related error has occurred (S1114). .

  If the fall of the blocker signal is not detected in S1112 (S1112: NO), the setting of the input sensor abnormality input detection start time (S1113) is not performed, and it is determined whether or not it is the input related error. A determination is made (S1114). If it is determined in S1114 that the error is not the injection-related error (S1114: NO), the blocker signal ON is checked (S1115), and the validity check of the input sensor abnormality input detection start time is performed (S1116). .

  Further, it is determined whether or not the input sensor abnormality detection test has been performed (S1117). If the result is a positive determination (S1117: YES), it is determined whether or not the input sensor 2 has been detected as abnormal (S1118). ). When the abnormality of the closing sensor 2 is detected (S1118: YES), a C0 error detection flag is set (S1119), and it is determined whether or not the rise of the selector passage sensor signal is detected (S1120). ).

  If it is determined in S1117 that there is no input sensor abnormality detection test (S1117: NO), or if it is determined in S1118 that there is no abnormality detection related to the input sensor 2 (S1118: NO), C0 is set. Without setting the error detection flag (S1119), it is determined whether or not the rising edge of the selector passage sensor signal has been detected (here, whether or not the signal has been turned ON) (S1120).

  When the rise of the selector passage sensor signal is detected in S1120 (S1120: YES), the closing monitoring counter is incremented by 1 (S1121), and the selector passage sensor residence time is set (S1122). Then, it is determined whether or not the selector passage sensor is ON (whether there is a backlog) (S1123). If it is ON (if there is a backlog) (S1123: YES), the selector passage stay time is determined. It is determined whether or not has elapsed (S1124).

  If the selector passage residence time has elapsed in S1124 (S1124: YES), the CH error detection flag is set (S1125), and it is determined whether an HP error has occurred (S1126). Further, in S1124, if the selector passage residence time has not elapsed (S1124: NO), it is determined whether or not an HP error has occurred without setting the CH error detection flag (S1125) (S1126). ).

  If it is not an HP error in S1126 (S1126: NO), the RWM address of the payout sensor abnormality detection 1 data is set (S1127), and the RWM address of the payout sensor abnormality detection 2 data is set (S1128). If it is determined in S1126 that an HP error has occurred (S1126: YES), the process ends.

  Subsequent to S1128, payout sensors 1 and 2 mask data and payout sensor 2-bit data are set (S1129). Further, it is determined whether or not the hopper motor drive signal is ON (S1130). If it is not ON (S1130: NO), payout sensor check data is generated (S1131). Further, it is determined whether or not only the payout sensor 2 is ON (S1132). If only the payout sensor 2 is ON (S1132: YES), the payout sensor abnormality detection 1 data and the payout sensor abnormality detection 2 data Is cleared (S1133), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in S1114 that the error is a closing-related error (S1114: YES), if the rise of the selector passage sensor signal is not detected in S1120 (S1120: NO), the selector passage sensor is turned on in S1123. If not (S1123: NO), the flow shifts to S1126 without performing the processing between them, and it is determined whether or not an HP error has occurred.

  If the ON of only the payout sensor 2 is not detected in S1132 (S1132: NO), the payout sensor 1 mask data and the payout sensor 1 bit are set as shown in FIG. 46 (S1134). Further, payout sensor check data is generated (S1135), and abnormality detection data clear data is set (S1136).

  If the hopper motor drive signal is ON in S1130 (see FIG. 45) (S1130: YES), the payout sensor check data generation process (S1135) shown in FIG. Do.

Subsequently, the payout sensor abnormality detection 3 data is cleared (S1137), and the payout sensor abnormality detection data that is not checked is cleared (S1138). Further, it is determined whether or not an abnormality of the payout sensor 1 or 2 has been detected (S1139). If an abnormality has been detected (S1139: YES), a payout sensor abnormality detection time is measured (S1140), and the processing is performed. To end. If no abnormality of the payout sensor 1 or 2 is detected in S1139 (S1139: NO), the process ends without measuring the payout sensor abnormality detection time (S1140).
<Error display request data clear>

  Next, the error display request data clear processing (S1030) used in the above-described error check processing (see FIG. 38) will be described. In the error display request data clear processing, the error display request data is cleared when an error is displayed.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 47, it is determined whether or not an error is displayed (S1146). If an error is displayed (S1146: YES), the error display request data is cleared. (S1147), and terminates the process. If it is not an error display in S1146 (S1146: NO), the process ends without clearing the error display request data (S1147).
<< 8-bit random number inspection >>

  Next, an 8-bit random number inspection process (S1046 to S1049) used in the above-described built-in random number check process (see FIG. 40) will be described. In the processing of the 8-bit random number inspection, the 8-bit random number is inspected, and when the 8-bit random number value is equal to or larger than the maximum random number inspection data and the random number maximum value is set, or when the obtained maximum of three 8-bit random number values are all If they match, the process proceeds to the non-recoverable error process 2.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 48, an 8-bit random number value is obtained (S1151), and it is determined whether the random number value is smaller than the random number maximum inspection data (S1152). Further, when the random number value is not smaller than the random number maximum inspection data (S1152: NO), it is determined whether or not the random number maximum value is set (S1153). (S1153: NO), an 8-bit random number value is reacquired (S1154).

  If the random number value is smaller than the maximum random number check data in S1152 (S1152: YES), the process of determining the maximum random number value (S1153) is not performed, and the 8-bit random number value is obtained again (S1152). S1154). If there is a maximum random number setting in S1153 (S1153: YES), the process shifts to a non-recoverable error process 2 (see FIG. 49) described later.

  After S1154, it is determined whether or not the random numbers match (S1155). If they match (S1155: YES), the 8-bit random number is reacquired (S1156). Further, it is determined whether or not all the three obtained random numbers match (S1157). If they do not match (S1157: NO), the 8-bit random number maximum value inspection table is updated (S1158). Then, the 8-bit random number soft latch random number value register address is updated (S1159), and the process ends.

If the random number values do not match in S1155 (S1155: N), the 8-bit random number maximum value inspection table in S1158 is updated without performing the process in between. If all the three random numbers obtained in S1157 match (S1157: YES), the process shifts to a non-recoverable error process 2 (see FIG. 49) described later.
<< Recoverable error processing 2 >>

  Next, non-recoverable error processing 2 used in the above-described setting value error check processing (see FIG. 39), built-in random number check processing (see FIG. 40), 8-bit random number check processing (see FIG. 48), and the like. explain. In the non-recoverable error process 2, a process when an unrecoverable error is detected is performed.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 49, lower digit error display data is set (S1171), and upper digit error display data is set (S1172). Further, the clear output port address and the number of ports are set (S1173), and the output ports (0 to 6) are turned off (S1174).

Further, the next output port address is set (S1175), it is determined whether or not the output has been completed (S1176). If the output has been completed (S1176: YES), an error display for the output ports 3 and 4 is displayed. Output is performed (S1177). Then, the upper digit and the lower digit are switched (S1178), and the process returns to the clear output port address and port number setting process of S1173. If the output has not been completed in S1176 (S1176: NO), the process returns to S1174 in which the output ports (0 to 6) are turned off.
<Operation and effect of the invention relating to medal insertion>

  As described above, according to the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the insertion sensor 45 and the selector passage sensor 46 are provided in the game medal selector 44, the detection of both the insertion sensor 45 and the selector passage sensor 46 is performed. Using the result, the state of the game medal can be determined. Therefore, it is possible to take a more robust countermeasure against fraud than in the case where only the input sensor 45 is used, for example. Furthermore, since the operation state related to the insertion of the game medal can be monitored using the insertion sensor 45 and the selector passage sensor 46, the error monitoring and the operation control of the blocker 47 are appropriately executed based on the various control modes described above. It is possible to do. The selector passage sensor 46 can be provided with various functions other than the detection of fraud, and the selector passage sensor 46 can be effectively used. In addition, the stop of the game executed after the detection of the abnormality can be executed at an appropriate timing in relation to other processing.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, in the error management process (see FIGS. 18 and 20) related to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), the test signal output process (S762) is executed, and the test is performed for each timer interrupt process. Execute signal output processing. Then, by the test signal output process (S762), the test signal corresponding to the combination determination result (combination extraction result) is set, and the combination determination result can be output as a test signal. Further, the main control board 61 having the main CPU 81 as the arithmetic processing means is not provided with an emergency connector used for connection with a test device in a product development stage, but is not provided with an emergency connector for arranging the emergency connector. The mounting area 183 remains. For this reason, it is possible to provide the product under the same conditions as at the time of the test, and it is possible to reduce the risk of illegally acquiring internal information from the test signal.

  Further, in the processing at the time of turning on the power (see FIG. 12), first, based on the fact that the power is turned on, an initial setting processing is executed. In this initial setting process, after initializing the register (S1), although not shown, an initial value is set in the register and the type of interrupt is set. Further, when such an initial setting process is completed, the checksum of the RWM is calculated (S3), and it is determined whether or not the designated switch (here, the door switch, the set door switch, the set key switch) is operated. (S9) If no operation has been performed (S9: NO), power-off recovery processing (see FIG. 21) is executed.

  Therefore, when the power is turned on, an initial value can be set in the register at an early stage, and the power-on processing (FIG. 12) is always performed in the same state without being affected by the data remaining in the register when the power was last turned off. ) Can be executed (S2 to S13).

  In addition, in the process at the time of power-on, after the initial value is set in the register, the process proceeds to the setting changing device process (see FIG. 13), and in the setting changing device process, the setting value falls within a predetermined range (here, “1”). (6)) is checked (S30 in FIG. 13). If the set value is not within the predetermined range (S30: NO), the set value is corrected (S31) and the set value is corrected. A set value display process for displaying the value on the game information display means is performed (S32). Further, in the display processing, information indicating that the setting is being changed and the stored set value are output to the display device (here, the setting display LED 66 (see FIG. 4)) (S32), and the setting is performed according to the operation of the setting switch. The value is updated (S33 to S34).

  Therefore, the process for displaying the set value can be appropriately defined from the time of turning on the power, and the display of the set value can be accurately performed. Then, it is possible to appropriately perform a series of processes from turning on the power to processing for displaying the set value. Further, it is possible to prevent an abnormal display from being made on the setting display LED 66 (see FIG. 4) which is a display device for displaying the set value.

  As a condition for shifting to the setting change device process (FIG. 13), for example, a condition based on the state of the built-in RWM (see FIG. 11) may be adopted. More specifically, checksums are performed for all areas in the range to be subjected to the built-in RWM, and the condition that the checksum value (checksum data) is normal is set as a condition for shifting to the setting change device processing. Can be illustrated. In addition, it is possible to adopt a control mode in which the checksum is performed, but the result of the checksum is not used for any determination condition, and even if the checksum value is abnormal, no special processing is performed due to the abnormality. .

  Further, satisfaction of a plurality of conditions may be set as a condition for shifting to the setting change device processing. In this case, both the power-off execution processing flag is normal and the checksum result is normal. Can be considered as a condition for shifting to the setting change device processing.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the setting change switch (setting key switch 68 in FIG. 4) is operated, a change in the switch signal (setting / reset button signal) is detected by the rise of the signal (see FIG. 4). 13 S33). Further, according to this embodiment, in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), the presence or absence of a game medal is determined at the start of the game (S54), and if there is no game medal (there is no bet) (S54). : NO), as described above, the display device (setting display LED 66) visibly displays the currently set value, so that the setting value can be confirmed. If there is a game medal (there is a bet) (S54: YES), the set value that is currently set is not displayed on the display device (setting display LED 66), and the set value cannot be confirmed.

  In the display process (S55) for waiting for the insertion of a game medal which is executed when the set value can be confirmed, the set value can be confirmed by operating the setting change switch (the setting key switch 68). It becomes. Further, in this set value confirmable state, blocker OFF data is set so that game medals cannot be inserted, display processing of the stored set values is performed, and when a change in the switch signal is detected (falling detection), The setting value display processing is completed, and processing for setting blocker ON data is executed.

  Further, in this set value confirmable state, processes such as game medal management (S56 in FIG. 14) to a game end check (S68 in FIG. 14) are not performed to advance the game. Further, although not shown, in the set value confirmable state, an error relating to the random number is detected, but other error monitoring is not performed. In addition, while the state shifts to the set value confirmable state by detecting a change in the switch signal, when the bet amount is set (S54: YES), the change in the switch signal related to the bet amount is detected. Does not shift to the setting confirmation state, but the progress of the game is possible (see S56 and thereafter).

  In this way, by executing the process for setting the set value to the uncheckable state and setting a limit on the check of the set value, the set value can be checked only after a predetermined procedure. It becomes. Then, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that attempt to confirm the set value using a method other than an appropriate method.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when a game medal is paid out based on the display determination (S66) of the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), a display process related to the number of paid out game medals is performed. Each time one medal is paid out, the value displayed on the display device (here, the acquired number display section) is updated. The value corresponding to the number of coins finally paid out is displayed when the next game medal is inserted or the above-described game standby display is started (when no game medal is inserted even after a certain period of time from the end of the game). Is done. In addition, even when the information on the number of paid out game medals is being displayed, when an error occurs, a display corresponding to the generated error is performed by changing the value to the value corresponding to the displayed number.

  According to the present embodiment as described above, the display relating to the number of game medals can be changed to another display mode at an appropriate timing by determining the condition for turning off the display of the number of acquired medals. It is possible to prevent a game result from being erroneously recognized as compared with a case where the switching is not performed, or a case where the switching timing is too late or too early.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), a predetermined value (start address) is set in the stack pointer (S51). Then, a game medal management process (S56) and a start switch input confirmation process (S58) are performed. Further, the game medal management processing (S56) and the input confirmation processing of the start switch are repeated until the start switch is effectively received (S58). Therefore, the stack pointer can be cleared each time at the early stage of the start of the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), and it is possible to prevent the process from looping in the abnormal state when any abnormality occurs.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), display determination (S66) is performed, and if a game medal is paid out, a process for paying out a game medal (S67) is performed. When the payout of the game medals is completed or when the payout of the game medals is not performed, a process according to the game state is performed by a game end check (S68 and the like).

  Then, in the processing of the game end check (S68 and the like), the RWM clear processing of the condition device number other than the carryover combination (clearing of the condition device of the non-carryover combination), the turning off of the replay display LED, the clearing of the replay operation flag, A game state such as a bonus (here, BB) or RT is set. Further, when the game end check (S68 or the like) is completed, a predetermined value (start address) is set in the stack pointer at the beginning of the game progress main process (see FIG. 14) (S51). Therefore, the stack pointer can be cleared each time after the game end check (S68 and the like), and it is possible to prevent the process from looping in an abnormal state when any abnormality occurs.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the power is turned off, in the power-off processing (see FIG. 19), the value of the stack pointer is stored in the first predetermined storage set in the built-in RWM area (F000H to F14AH) shown in FIG. In the storage area (S568), checksum data is calculated for the storage area range (F000H to F3FFH) of the RWM including the work area, and the checksum value obtained by the calculation is stored in the first predetermined area in the same work area. The storage area is stored in the second predetermined storage area (S574). Further, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area described above are set in areas other than the first and last work areas. Therefore, the value of the stack pointer and the value of the checksum data can be saved while avoiding the beginning and end of the work area where the position can be easily specified, and it becomes difficult for a third party to specify the storage location of these values. This makes it possible to prevent fraud.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various control modes as described below can be adopted.
<Control mode related to error notification>

  First, a control mode related to error notification will be described. As a control mode related to the error notification, in the error management process (see FIG. 20) following the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), the error check (S754) and the like of the second control are performed to control the selector passage sensor 46 and the closing sensor 45. Monitoring is performed (see FIG. 38), and when an error occurs, a main command is transmitted to the sub-control board 31, and based on the main command, the sub-control board 31 causes the rendering unit 18 (see FIG. 1) to operate, for example. It is conceivable that error notification is performed by using this. In other words, an error notification can be given before the progress of the game is stopped (before the error display processing in each situation).

After the start lever 25 is operated, that is, when the blocker 47 is in the OFF state (returnable state), for example, if an error occurs in a state where the effect is being performed in the effect unit 18 (see FIG. 1), the error occurs. It is conceivable that the effect is canceled (stopped) and the effect is notified by the effect unit 18 or the like. Furthermore, as another aspect, similarly, in a state where the blocker 47 is in an OFF state (returnable state), for example, when an effect is performed in the effect unit 18 (see FIG. 1), for example, while the effect is continued, It is conceivable to display an error on a display device (for example, an acquired number display LED or the like) capable of error notification, or to execute error notification by voice using the speaker 50. Further, as another aspect, similarly, when the blocker 47 is in the OFF state (returnable state), for example, the directing unit 18 (see FIG. 1) has a high degree of expectation indicating that the degree of expectation that it is playing some role is high. If an error occurs while performing a specific effect such as a direct effect, a continuous effect that is performed with continuity across multiple games, etc., after all the torso stops, an error notification is executed. It is possible to do. For example, when the sub-control means (here, the sub-control board 31) receives the main command based on the input error setting process (see FIG. 25), the predetermined notification mode A (liquid crystal, first lamp, and When an error is notified by an information mode using an amplifier (speaker) and a main command based on error display processing (see FIG. 24) is received, another information mode B (liquid crystal, first lamp, second (A notification mode using a lamp and an amplifier (speaker)). At this time, the second lamp is a lamp that can navigate the operation order during the AT game (notification game). Even if an error occurs, the player is not disadvantaged in the game. It is possible to control the second lamp, and so on.
<Control mode related to game stop>

Further, as a control mode relating to the game stop, for example, in the timer interrupt processing, the selector passage sensor 46 and the insertion sensor 45 are monitored by error management (see FIG. 20) or the like (see FIG. 38), and an error is detected. At this point, instead of proceeding to the error display process (FIG. 24), the game is stopped by performing the loop process of S240 and S248 in FIG. 24, and the game is immediately stopped in the error check (FIG. 38) ( For example, blocker OFF processing is performed). Further, it is conceivable to execute an error notification using the staging unit 18, the speaker 50, and the like under the control of the sub-control board 31 in synchronization with the timing of stopping the game.
<Other control modes related to error detection>

  Further, the blocker 47 is in the ON state (passable state), and an error based on the closing sensor 45 is detected by an error check (FIG. 38) in the error management process (FIG. 20) from the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). In this case, the process may be shifted to a process of immediately stopping the game (for example, a blocker OFF process) within the error check (FIG. 38) without waiting for the process to proceed to the error display process (FIG. 24). Conceivable.

  Further, when an error based on the insertion sensor 45 or the like is detected by various processing in the game progress main processing (see FIG. 14), monitoring of the selector passage sensor 46 and monitoring of the insertion sensor 45 by timer interrupt processing are performed. Can be omitted. Further, as described above, while the processing for monitoring the selector passage sensor 46 and the processing for monitoring the insertion sensor 45 by the timer interrupt processing are not executed, the payout provided in the game medal payout apparatus 63 (see FIG. 2). A command set for monitoring the sensor (not shown) based on the timer interrupt cycle and transmitting an error command associated with the abnormality to a sub when an abnormality such as a game medal staying or backflow is detected by the payout sensor. It is conceivable to execute a process for

When the above-mentioned door (front door unit 11) is open (when the door switch is in an open state), an error notification regarding the opening of the door is performed using the LED and the speaker 50. However, the main control board 61 recognizes the occurrence of the error relating to the opening of the door, but does not recognize it as an error corresponding to stopping the game, and transmits the command related to the occurrence of the error to the sub-control board 31. I do. Then, the sub-control board 31 performs the error notification of the opening of the door. Therefore, even if the front door unit 11 is opened, it is possible to play a game with reel control. Further, when the front door unit 11 is closed while the door opening error notification is being performed, the sub-control board 31 determines that the door opening error release condition has been satisfied, and the LED or speaker 50 opens the door. End error notification. The notification of the opening of the door may be terminated after a predetermined time (for example, about several seconds) has passed since the sub-control board 31 closed the front door unit 11.
<Various modes related to management of minimum game time>

In the present embodiment, as described above, the management of the minimum game time is performed in various modes according to the situation. In the following, first, basic functions and management modes related to the minimum game time will be described. Next, various management modes of the minimum game time at normal time and at the time of occurrence of a predetermined error will be described with reference to FIGS. It will be described based on.
<<< Basic functions and management modes related to minimum game time >>>

  First, as described above, the minimum game time does not start the rotation of the body in the current game unless a predetermined time (4.1 seconds in this case) has elapsed from the start of the rotation of the body in the previous game. That's what we do. As described above, the timer measurement of the time (game time) related to the minimum game time is based on the timer measurement process (S551) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). Here, in the timer measurement processing (S551), counting (here, subtraction) of all timers is performed. Then, in the timer measurement process (S551), the 1-byte timer and the 2-byte timer are measured as described above, but the minimum game time is counted using the 2-byte timer.

  Further, when the time required for one game exceeds the minimum game time, a bet setting (bet) of a game medal is performed, and when the start lever 25 (see FIG. 1) is operated, the above-mentioned respective body 51L to 51L is operated. No rotation drum rotation waiting period (weight period) in which the rotation of the rotation drum is not performed does not occur, and each of the rotation drums 51L to 51L starts rotating. Here, in the present embodiment, the period of one game is a period from the start of rotation of the torso 51L to 51 to the stop of rotation.

  On the other hand, even if the betting of the game medal is set (bet) and the start lever 25 (see FIG. 1) is operated, if the minimum game time set in the previous game has not yet elapsed, Until the minimum game time elapses, a rotating body rotation waiting period (a weight period) in which the rotating bodies 51L to 51 are not rotated. In addition, during the turning rotation waiting period (weight period), even if the above-described stop buttons 24L to 24R are operated, these operations are not accepted.

  In the following, a period during which the rotation of the start lever 25 is detected after the rotation of the body is stopped in the previous game, and the period in which the rotation of the body is not started in the current game, is set as a waiting time for the rotation of the body after the rotation of the body is stopped. This is called a “wait period”, which is a period, and is distinguished from the aforementioned “4.1 second wait”, which corresponds to the minimum game time. In addition, the counting of the “wait period” can be performed using a timer included in the “other game standby measurement timer” in the timer measurement process (see S551 in FIG. 18).

As described above, the check of whether the minimum game time has elapsed and the setting of the timer related to the minimum game time (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “minimum game time timer”) are performed as described above. This is executed in the waiting for the rotation of the rotating drum used in the internal drawing start process (S60) of FIG. That is, the elapse check of the time related to the minimum game time and the timer setting are performed not by the interruption process but by the process executed according to the progress of the game. The timer measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time may be performed in a mode of counting down the timer value, or may be performed in a mode of counting up.
<< Management mode in normal time >>

  FIG. 50A shows a management mode of the minimum game time in the normal state. Here, in the present embodiment, the "normal time" can be broadly defined as a time in a normal state where a game is possible. In the present embodiment, for example, a situation in which a recoverable error or a non-recoverable error described later has occurred (see FIGS. 50B and 51A) and a situation in which the set value is confirmed (FIG. 52 (B)) can be excluded from the “normal time”.

  In addition, the above-mentioned “normal time” is narrowly defined in the present embodiment, for example, when a game medal is later settled or inserted (see FIGS. 51 (B) and 52 (A)). A situation where the management mode of the minimum game time is described can be excluded. The situation at the time of settlement or insertion of the game medals (see FIG. 65 (B) and FIG. 66 (A)) is also included in the “normal time”. For example, the “normal time” shown in FIG. The state at the time of settlement or insertion of the game medals shown in FIGS. 51 (B) and 52 (A) may be referred to as “specific normal time” or the like. .

  64 (A) to (g) in FIG. 64 (A) are the minimum game time timer, the rotation start permission state, the lever operation, the first trunk, the second trunk, the third trunk, and the display determination. Are schematically shown. In addition, the first, second, and third trunks in the figure are the same as the first and second trunks 51L, 51C, and 51R (see FIG. 1). It corresponds.

  In (a) to (g) of FIG. 50 (A), in the minimum game time of (a) shown in the uppermost row, the rise of the chart as shown at timing T1 is based on the timer measurement related to the minimum game time. Corresponds to the start. As described above, the minimum game time is set such that the current rotation of the body is not started unless a predetermined time (4.1 seconds in this case) has elapsed from the start of the rotation of the body in the previous game. It is for. Then, the timer measurement related to the minimum game time timer is performed by the timer measurement process (S551) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), as described above.

  Further, in FIG. 50 (A), in the minimum game time timer of (a), the period during which the chart rises (the period from T1 to T2) indicates that the count of the minimum game time timer is continued. The falling edge of the chart at the timing T2 indicates that the count of the minimum game time timer has stopped. Then, at the normal time shown in FIG. 50 (A), the timer measurement of the minimum game time timer is continued for 4.1 seconds, which is a period during which the rotation of the torso for the next game cannot be started, and during this period, It stops after the lapse, and the count of the minimum game time timer ends.

  Subsequently, in the state of permission of the rotation of the rotating drum shown in (b) of FIG. 50 (A), during the period when the chart is rising, the first rotating drum 51L, the second rotating drum 51C, and the third rotating drum are described. 51R (see FIG. 1) indicates a period during which rotation can be started. That is, (b) in FIG. 50 (A) is a state in which each of the torso cylinders 51L to 51R cannot start rotating while the time related to the minimum game time shown in (a) is being measured (start not permitted). While the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is not being performed, it indicates that each of the rotating drums 51L to 51R is in a state where rotation can be started (start permission state).

  Then, in (b) of FIG. 50 (A), as shown at the left end of the chart, the chart is started from a situation where the rotation of the rotating drum can be started (a situation before timing T1). When the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time in ()) is started (timing T1), a situation occurs in which the rotation of the winding drum cannot be started. Further, when the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is stopped (timing T2), the state becomes possible in which the rotation of the winding drum can be started. (Timing T3).

  Subsequently, for the lever operation shown in (c) of FIG. 50 (A), the rising of the chart shown at timing T4 indicates that the operation of the start lever 25 is detected. Further, (d) to (f) in FIG. 50 (A) show the states of the first torso (51L), the second torso (51C), and the third torso (51R), respectively. I have. The rising of the chart in (d) to (f) in the drawing indicates the start of rotation of each of the drums (51L to 51C), and the falling of the chart indicates that the rotation of each of the drums (51L to 51C) is stopped. Is shown.

  As shown at the left end in (b) of FIG. 50 (A), in a situation where the rotation of the winding drum can be started (a situation before timing T1), if there is a lever operation as shown in (c) of the figure. (Timing T4), the first torso (51L), the second torso (51C), and the third torso (51R) start rotating (Timing T1). At this time, timer measurement is started for the minimum game time timer in (a) in the figure, and rotation cannot be started for the rotation start permission of the bobbin in (b) in the figure.

  When the above-mentioned stop buttons 24L to 24R (see FIG. 1) are operated in the order of the first stop button 24L, the second stop button 24C, and the third stop button 24R (so-called forward push), the figure shows As shown, the first body (51L) and the second body (51C) stop sequentially, and finally, the third body (51R) stops, as shown at timing 5 in the figure. Here, the game in which the third torso (51R) stops last at the timing T5 among the above-mentioned respective torso (51L to 51R) will be described below as the N-th (N is a natural number of 1 or more) game. .

  Also, in order not to complicate the description and illustration, the respective stop buttons 24L to 24R are sequentially pushed, and the respective cylinders are stopped by the first cylinder (51L), the second cylinder (51C), and the third cylinder. The case of stopping in the order of the torso (51R) is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the order of stopping each torso (51L to 51R) may be any of the six types of left middle right, left right, middle left, right middle left, right left middle, right middle left. There may be.

  As shown at a timing T5 in FIG. 50A, when the last rotating drum (here, the third rotating drum 51R) is stopped, at a timing T5 in FIG. Then, a display determination (see S66 in FIG. 14) is performed.

  Here, even if the last torso stop (here, the stop of the third torso 51R) is performed (timing T5), the measurement by the minimum game time timer in (a) of FIG. 50A must be completed. For example, as shown at the timing T6 in the diagram (c), even if there is a lever operation for the next game (the (N + 1) th game), the rotation of the torso is not started immediately. Then, as shown by the timing T2 in the figure, when the minimum game time has elapsed, the rotation of each torso (51L to 51R) based on the lever operation at the timing T6 is started (timing T3).

  Then, when the operation of each of the stop buttons 24L to 24R is performed again by sequentially pushing, as shown in (d) to (f) in the drawing, the first barrel (51L) and the second barrel (51L). 51C), the rotation of the third torso (51R) is stopped, and the display determination relating to the (N + 1) th game is performed as shown at timing T7 in FIG.

  Note that various modes can be adopted for the mode of starting rotation of each of the rotating drums (51L to 51C) shown at timing T1 and timing T3 in FIG. For example, as shown in the figure, a mode in which three rotating drums start rotating simultaneously, a method in which a time difference is provided in the timing of starting rotation of each rotating drum, and the like can be exemplified. Further, as for providing a time difference in the timing of the rotation start of each spinning drum, for example, after the rotation is started for the two reels of the first reel and the next reel, the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time is started, Thereafter, the remaining (last) reel may be rotated. Further, a mode in which the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time is started after the rotation of the first reel is started, and then the remaining two reels are sequentially started to rotate can also be considered.

In addition, in addition to the above-described ones, for example, when the lever operation is performed, when the minimum game time set at the time of the start of the rotation of the torso in the previous game has not elapsed, the time difference between the start of the rotation of the respective torso and the time difference is provided. The remaining time (weight period) is divided into, for example, three equal parts, and when one third of the time has elapsed, the first (first) reel is started to rotate, and when two thirds of the time has elapsed. The second (second) reel is started to rotate, and the third (last) reel is started to rotate when the remaining 1/3 of the time has elapsed and the minimum game time has elapsed. Examples can be given.
<< Management mode in case of recoverable error >>

  Next, a management mode of the minimum game time when a returnable error (returnable abnormality) occurs will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the same portions as those in the normal state shown in FIG. 50A are illustrated in the same manner, and description thereof is omitted as appropriate.

  In FIG. 50 (B), (a) to (g) show the minimum game time timer, the rotation start permission, the lever operation, the first rotation (51L), as in the normal case of FIG. 50 (A). Each chart shows a second body (51C), a third body (51R), and a display determination chart. Here, when the game from the start of rotation to the stop of rotation of each of the rotating drums 51R to 51L shown on the left side in the drawing is the N-th game as described above, as shown on the right side of the drawing, The game of the next rotation and stop of 51R to 51L is the (N + 1) th game as described above.

  Further, (h) to (j) in FIG. 50 (B) show charts of a recoverable error, an abnormal state, and an abnormal release. As described above, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, an error that enables a return to the normal state by releasing the error (recoverable error), and a return to the normal state is not possible only by releasing the error. Error (unrecoverable error).

  Among them, the recoverable error is an error that can be canceled without starting the above-described setting change device processing (see FIG. 13) and performing the setting change device processing. On the other hand, the non-recoverable error can be cleared by turning off the setting key, turning on the power and starting the setting change device processing (see FIG. 13) after the power is cut off after the occurrence of the error. When the setting key is turned off, the error is returned from the setting change state to a normal state (a state in which a game can be played). And, (h) in FIG. 50 (B) shows detection (occurrence) of a recoverable error among these errors by the rise of the chart (timing T11).

  As described above, the recoverable errors include HE errors, HP errors, HQ errors, and FE errors, which are errors related to payout of game medals, and CP errors, which are errors related to insertion of game medals, as described above. There are C0 error, C1 error, CH error, and CE error. Among them, the HE error is an error when it is determined that the game medal in the game medal payout device 63 is empty, and the HP error is that the game medal is clogged at the game medal exit in the game medal payout device 63. Error.

  Further, the HQ error is an error when it is determined that an abnormal input has been made to a payout sensor (not shown), and the FE error is an error when it is determined that the game medal auxiliary storage 71 is full. Further, the CP error is an error when it is determined that the inserted game medal has passed illegally, and the C0 error is when it is determined that there is an abnormal input to the insertion sensor (here, the insertion sensor 2) as described above. Error.

  Further, the C1 error is an error when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the portion of the medal passage 105 where the insertion sensor 45 and the selector passage sensor 46 are provided. This is an error when it is determined that the medal has stayed. In addition, the CE error is an error when it is determined that the game medal has stayed in the portion provided with the insertion sensor 1 (115) or the insertion sensor 2 (116).

  The error release condition relating to these errors is that a release operation for changing the signal of the set / reset button 69 (set / reset button signal) from OFF to ON is performed with the cause removed. Further, when the door switch signal relating to the door switch 60 and the setting door switch signal relating to the setting door switch 67 are ON, the above-described release operation is effective.

  When a recoverable error is detected for (h) in FIG. 50 (B) (timing T11), an abnormal state is set as shown in the rise of the chart (timing T11) in (i) in FIG. Here, the detection timing (T11) of the recoverable error is the timing after all the rotating drums (51L to 51R) have stopped.

  When the recoverable error is released and the release of the abnormal state is detected (here, timing T2) as shown by the rising edge of the chart in (j) in the figure, the above-mentioned abnormal state ends (timing T12). ). In FIG. 50 (B), the timing of the abnormality release in (j) is illustrated so as to coincide with the end timing (timing T2) of the measurement by the minimum game time timer in (a). Is merely an example, and the timings of the two do not always match.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in (h) to (j) in FIG. 50B, even in a situation where a recoverable error has occurred (see timing T11 and thereafter), it is shown in FIG. As described above, the measurement (count) of the time related to the minimum game time is continued. Then, when 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the start of the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time, the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is stopped (timing T2). At this time, if the error state continues as shown in (i) in the figure, as shown in (a) and (b) in the figures, even if the measurement by the minimum game time timer is completed, the rotation of the torso is stopped. It is not possible to start rotation.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 50 (B), as shown in (a) and (b) in the figure, in the N-th game, even if the minimum game time set in the RWM has elapsed (timing T2). ), It is not immediately possible to rotate the torso. Then, when the abnormal state ends as shown in (i) in the figure (timing T12), the start of the rotation of the torso is permitted as shown in (b) in the figure (timing T12).

  Further, thereafter, as shown in (c) in the figure, if there is a lever operation in the (N + 1) th game (timing T6), the first torso (51L), the second torso (51C), the third torso The rotation of the torso (51R) is started, a timer setting relating to the count of the minimum game time timer is performed, and the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is started as shown in FIG. Along with this, as shown in (b) in the figure, a state in which the start of rotation of the rotating drum is not permitted.

  Then, when each of the stop buttons 24L to 24R is operated, the respective torso 51L to 51R stops based on the operation timing and operation order of each of the stop buttons 24L to 24R. Here, in the example of FIG. 50 (B), similarly to the case of FIG. 50 (A), in each of the N-th game and the (N + 1) -th game, the stop buttons 24L to 24R are sequentially operated. It is operated by pushing.

  The management mode at the time of this recoverable error can be described as follows. That is, while the game is stopped due to the returnable error, the measurement (count) of the time related to the minimum game time is continued. Then, in the N-th game, a period in which the game before the occurrence of the returnable error has been performed (a period from the start of the game to the occurrence of the returnable error) and a period in which the returnable error has occurred (returnable If the total of the error durations exceeds the minimum game time (4.1 seconds), the (N + 1) th game can be started without a wait period. On the other hand, if the total of the period in which the game before the occurrence of the returnable error has been performed and the period in which the returnable error has occurred is less than the minimum game time (4.1 seconds), the (N + 1) th game is , Can start after a wait period.

  According to the management mode at the time of the recoverable error as described above, when the recoverable error occurs, the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time is continued, so that the elapse of the minimum game time is prevented as much as possible. Gaming machine control. Further, the time related to the minimum game time can be counted regardless of the state of the gaming machine (here, the slot machine 10) or the gaming state. Then, it is possible to smoothly advance the game, and it is possible to secure the maximum number of games per predetermined time (for example, a game time by one player or a business day for a game hall). Become.

In other words, as described above, the period relating to the minimum game time is a period during which the next rotation of the body can not be started, and by stopping the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time, the next rotation of the body cannot be started. The period will be extended. For this reason, in order to secure the maximum number of games and allow the player to enjoy the game, it is desirable that the period during which the rotation of the torso cannot be started is not increased beyond the minimum necessary period (4.1 seconds). . According to the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent a period during which a game cannot be progressed from increasing beyond a predetermined time (4.1 seconds) as much as possible. However, as many game times as possible can be secured.
<< Management mode at the time of unrecoverable error >>

  Next, a management mode of the minimum game time when an unrecoverable error (unrecoverable abnormality) occurs will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the same portions as those at the time of the recoverable error shown in FIG. 50B are shown in the same manner, and the description will be appropriately omitted.

  In FIG. 51 (A), (a) to (f) show the minimum game time timer, the start of rotation of the torso, the operation lever, and the first 51L), a second barrel (51C), and a third barrel (51R). 51 (g) in FIG. 51 (A) shows the state of the power supply, and indicates that the power supply is ON during the rising period of the chart.

  Further, (h) in FIG. 51 (A) shows detection (occurrence) of an unrecoverable error by the rise of the chart (timing T16). As described above, this non-returnable error is an error that cannot be canceled unless the setting change device process (see FIG. 13) is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, a game clerk or the like temporarily turns off the power of the slot machine 10 (timing T17) to turn off the error, and then turns on the setting key switch 68 (see FIG. 4). In this state, it is necessary to turn on the power again to start up (timing T18) and operate the setting change device (timing T19).

  Such non-recoverable errors include the E1, E5, E6, and E7 errors as described above. Among them, the E1 error is an error in the case where the power-off recovery cannot be performed normally, and the E5 error is an error in the case where the combination display of the symbols when the body is stopped all the time is abnormal. The details of the E5 error will be described later. Further, the E6 error is an error when the set value is out of the range, and the E7 error is an abnormal frequency of the clock input to the random number update RCK terminal (not shown) in the main CPU 81 or a built-in random number (16 bit). This is an error when an update state abnormality of (random number) is detected.

  The E5 error among the various non-recoverable errors described above is determined when the display determination (S66) in the above-described game progress main processing (see FIG. 14) is performed as a result of the display determination and the symbol combination display is abnormal. appear.

  Next, the non-recoverable error processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the non-recoverable error processing shown in FIG. 29, the interrupt is prohibited (S411), and error display data is set in the order of the lower digit and the upper digit of the error display (S412, S413). Further, a clear output port address and the number of output ports are set (S414), the output ports (here, 0 to 6) are turned OFF (S415), and the next output port address is set (S416).

  Then, it is determined that the output has been completed (S417). If all the outputs for the output ports (0 to 6) have been completed (S417: YES), the error display process (S418) is performed to output ports 3 and 4. Output for error display. Then, switching between the upper digit and the lower digit is performed (S419), and the process returns to the above-described clear output port address and output port number setting process (S414).

  On the other hand, in the output end determination process (S417), if the output has not ended (S417: NO), the process returns to the output port OFF process (S415). Until output for all the output ports (0 to 6) is completed, the processing of turning off the output port (S415) and setting the next output port address (S416) is repeated. Further, after the output of all the output ports (0 to 6) is completed (S417: YES), the process proceeds to the error display process (S418).

  As described above, the detection (occurrence) of the non-recoverable error as described by taking the E5 error as an example results in an abnormal state as shown by the rise of the chart in (i) of FIG. 51A (timing T16). Then, for example, a game arcade clerk turns off the power switch 72 (see FIG. 4) once (timing T17) in order to activate the setting change device and release the unrecoverable error, and thereafter, as described above. The power switch 72 is turned on while the setting key is turned on, and the power is turned on (timing T18). Then, as shown by the rising edge of the chart in (j) of the figure (timing T19), the setting change device operates, and the abnormal state due to the unrecoverable error is eliminated (also timing T19).

  Further, in the present embodiment, in a situation where an unrecoverable error has occurred, as shown in (a) of FIG. 51A, the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is stopped (timing T16).

  When the error is removed as shown in (j) of FIG. 51A (timing T19), the state in which the rotation of the winding drum can be started is made as shown in (b) of FIG. 51 (timing T2). . Further, thereafter, if there is a lever operation as shown in (c) in the figure (timing T6), as described above, the first torso (51L) and the second torso (51C) related to the (N + 1) th game. ), The rotation of the third torso (51R) is started, and the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time is started as shown in (a) of the figure (timing T3).

  The management mode at the time of this non-recoverable error can also be described as follows. That is, while the game is stopped due to the non-returnable error, the measurement (count) of the time related to the minimum game time is stopped. The unrecoverable error is an abnormality that cannot be cleared unless the setting change device process (see FIG. 13) is started as described above. Then, when the setting change device process is performed, the internal numerical values and flags handled by the main CPU 81 are cleared. Therefore, the count value associated with the time measurement is also cleared. That is, when the non-recoverable error is released, the value of the counter set before that is cleared, so that when the start lever 25 is operated after the non-recoverable error is released, no wait period occurs. The reel starts to rotate.

According to the management mode at the time of the non-returnable error as described above, when the non-returnable error occurs, the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time is stopped, so that the load on the program processing can be reduced. become. In other words, the non-recoverable error is an error that cannot be cleared unless the installation changing device is operated (initializing operation), and there is no way to cancel the error other than the initialization operation. For this reason, if the measurement of the minimum game time is continued when the non-returnable error occurs, the program processing for continuing the measurement is wasted. Therefore, as described above, by stopping the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time when an unrecoverable error occurs, it is possible to prevent the execution of useless program processing and reduce the processing load. Become.
<< Management mode at the time of game medal clearing >>

  Next, a management mode of the minimum game time when the settlement of the game medals is performed will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the same portions as those at the time of the recoverable error shown in FIG. 51B are shown in the same manner, and description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

  In FIG. 51 (B), (a) to (g) show the minimum game time timer, the start of the rotation of the torso, the operation lever, and the first torso (the same as in the case of the recoverable error shown in FIG. 50 (B)). 51L), a second barrel (51C), a third barrel (51R), and a display determination chart. Also, (h) in FIG. 51 (B) shows the state of the medal clearing, in which the game medal is cleared in the rising period of the chart (period after timing T26). Is represented.

  Such a game medal clearing is based on the game medal clearing process described above (see FIG. 28), and a game medal management process (S56 in FIG. 14 and FIG. 26) related to the game progress main process (see FIG. 14). This is executed when the settlement button is ON (see S325 in FIG. 26: YES). Then, in the game medal clearing process (see FIG. 28), as described above, it is determined whether or not the game is a replay (S371, S372), and according to the determination result, the game medal bet (bet) is determined. A process based on the stored game medals (such as S383 to S390) and a process based on the stored game medals (such as S383 to S390) are executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, even in a period from the end of the game to before the lever operation at the start of the next game, the above-mentioned game medals can be cleared by operating the clearing button. This game medal settlement is an operation that can be performed even during the minimum game time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even in the situation where the game medals are cleared as described above, the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is continued as shown in (a) of FIG. 51 (B). . Then, when 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the start of the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time, the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is stopped, and as shown in FIG. It is possible to start the rotation of the torso in the second time (timing T2).

  Note that the start timing (T26) of the settlement of the game medals is between the N-th and (N + 1) -th games if there is a bet game medal or a stored game medal. It can occur at various timings based on the will of the person.

  The management mode at the time of the game medal clearing can be described as follows. That is, while the game is stopped by the game medal clearing, the measurement (count) of the time related to the minimum game time is continued. In the N-th game, a period in which the game before the game medal clearing is performed (a period from the start of the game to the start of the game medal clearing) and a period in which the game medal clearing is performed (the game medal clearing) Is greater than the minimum game time (4.1 seconds), the rotation of the torso in the (N + 1) th game can be started without the weight period. On the other hand, if the total of the period in which the game is performed before the game medal clearing and the period in which the game medal clearing is performed is shorter than the minimum game time (4.1 seconds), the round in the (N + 1) th game is performed. Torso rotation can begin after a weight period.

According to the management mode at the time of the game medal clearing described above, by continuing the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time, the same as in the case of the above-described returnable error (see FIG. 50B), The gaming machine control can be performed without hindering the elapse of the minimum game time as much as possible. Further, the time related to the minimum game time can be counted regardless of the game state. Then, it is possible to smoothly advance the game, and it is possible to secure the maximum number of games per predetermined time (for example, a game time by one player or a business day for a game hall). Become.
<< Management mode when inserting a game medal >>

  Next, a management mode of the minimum game time when a game medal is inserted will be described with reference to FIG. At the time of a recoverable error shown in FIG. 50 (B), the same parts as those at the time of game medal clearing shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 52 (A), (a) to (g) show the minimum game time timer and the number of times, as in the case of the recoverable error shown in FIG. 50 (B) and the game medal clearing shown in FIG. 51 (B). Each chart shows a body rotation startable state, an operation lever, a first body (51L), a second body (51C), a third body (51R), and a display determination. (H) in FIG. 52 (A) shows the state of medal insertion, in which game medals are inserted during the rising period of the chart (the period from timing T5 to T6). It represents that.

  Note that the “insertion of medals” referred to here includes entering game medals into the game medal insertion slot 21, operating various bet buttons to bet (gaming) game medals stored (credited), In addition, automatic insertion (automatic bet) is performed when the result of the role drawing in the previous game (previous game) is a replay.

  When such a game medal is inserted, as described above, as a result of the check (S54) regarding the presence or absence of a game medal in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), it is determined that the game medal has been inserted. (S54: YES), the process proceeds to the game medal management process (see S56 and FIG. 26). Then, in the game medal clearing process (see FIG. 28), as described above, it is determined whether or not the game is a replay (S371, S372), and according to the determination result, the game medal bet (bet) is determined. A process based on the stored game medals (such as S383 to S390) and a process based on the stored game medals (such as S383 to S390) are executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned game medals can be inserted even during a period (a wait period) from the end of the game due to the rotation of the torso to the end of the operation of the lever at the start of the next game. . In other words, during the wait period, the medal insertion from the game medal insertion slot 21 (see FIG. 1) or the operation of the three-sheet insertion button or the one-sheet insertion button in the main input unit 26 starts the next game. Required for the game medal (bet setting) can be executed. In addition, when the result of the lottery in the previous game is a replay, automatic insertion can be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even in the situation where the game medals are inserted as described above, the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is continued as shown in (a) of FIG. 52 (A). I have. Then, when 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the start of the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time, the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is stopped, and as shown in FIG. It is possible to start the rotation of the torso in the second time (timing T2).

  Here, although the illustration is made assuming that the insertion of the game medals is started simultaneously with the rising of the display determination chart in the Nth game (timing T5) (timing T5), the present invention is not limited to this. Rather, the game medals are inserted at various timings based on the will of the player who intends to play the (N + 1) th game after the stop (timing T5) of all the torso (51L to 51R) in the Nth game. What can be done in

  The management mode at the time of inserting the game medal can also be described as follows. That is, while the game is stopped by inserting the game medal, the measurement (count) of the time related to the minimum game time is continued. In the N-th game, a period in which the game is performed before the game medal is inserted (a period from the start of the game to the start of the game medal insertion) and a period in which the game medal is inserted (the game medal insertion) Is greater than the minimum game time (4.1 seconds), the (N + 1) th game can be started without a wait period. On the other hand, when the total of the period in which the game is performed before the game medal insertion and the period in which the game medal insertion is performed is less than the minimum game time (4.1 seconds), the (N + 1) th game is It can start after a wait period.

According to the management mode at the time of inserting the game medal as described above, the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is continued, so that in the case of the above-described returnable error (see FIG. 50 (B)) and the game As in the case of the medal clearing (see FIG. 51 (B)), the gaming machine control can be performed without hindering the elapse of the minimum gaming time as much as possible. Further, the time related to the minimum game time can be counted regardless of the game state. Then, it is possible to smoothly advance the game, and it is possible to secure the maximum number of games per predetermined time (for example, a game time by one player or a business day for a game hall). Become.
<< Management at the time of setting value confirmation >>

  Next, a management mode of the minimum game time when the setting value is confirmed will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the same portions as those at the time of a recoverable error shown in FIG. 50B and at the time of a non-recoverable error shown in FIG. 51A are shown in the same manner, and description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

  In FIG. 52 (B), (a) to (g) show the minimum game time timer, the start of rotation of the torso, the operation lever, the first torso ( 51L), a second barrel (51C), a third barrel (51R), and a display determination chart. (H) in FIG. 52 (B) shows a state of setting value confirmation, and indicates that the setting value is confirmed at the rising edge of the chart (timing T31).

  The confirmation of the set value indicated by (h) in FIG. 52 (B) is performed by checking the presence or absence of a game medal in the above-described game progress main process (see FIG. 14) (S54), and displaying the display at the time of waiting for the game medal insertion. The process moves to the process (S55) (S54: NO), and can be performed when the set value can be confirmed. In a state where the set value can be confirmed, the progress of the game (see S56 and thereafter) is possible.

  As described above, the setting value is checked by operating the setting key so that the setting key switch 68 is turned on while the power of the slot machine 10 is on, and setting the setting change device to the operating state. Be done. Then, to confirm the set value, the set value (here, any of “1” to “6”) is displayed on the setting display LED 66 (see FIG. 4) mounted on the main control board 61 (see FIG. 4), The displayed set value can be made by a game clerk or the like visually checking through the transparent main board case 65. In this state, in which the set value can be checked, the set value does not change even if the set / reset button 69 is operated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even in the situation where the set value is confirmed in this way, the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is continued as shown in (a) of FIG. 52 (B). Then, when 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the start of the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time, the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time is stopped, and as shown in FIG. ) Can be started (timing T2).

  The management mode at the time of confirming the set value can be described as follows. That is, while the game is stopped by checking the set value, the measurement (count) of the time related to the minimum game time is continued. In the N-th game, a period in which the game before the set value check is performed (a period from the start of the game to the start of the set value check) and a worker such as a game clerk check the set value. In the case where the total of the time periods (the duration of the set value confirmation) exceeds the minimum game time (4.1 seconds), the (N + 1) th game can start the torso rotation without the wait period. On the other hand, when the total of the period in which the game before the set value check is performed and the period in which the set value check is performed is less than the minimum game time (4.1 seconds), the (N + 1) th game is The rotation of the torso can be started after a wait period.

According to the management mode at the time of setting value confirmation as described above, by continuing to measure the time relating to the minimum game time, the above-mentioned returnable error (see FIG. 50 (B)) and medal clearing (FIG. 50 (B)) 51 (B)) and when the medal is inserted (see FIG. 52 (A)), the gaming machine control can be performed with minimum interruption of the gaming time as little as possible. Further, the time related to the minimum game time can be counted regardless of the state of the gaming machine (here, the slot machine 10) or the gaming state. Then, it is possible to smoothly advance the game, and it is possible to secure the maximum number of games per predetermined time (for example, a game time by one player or a business day for a game hall). Become.
<< Processing mode during measurement of minimum game time >>

  Next, another mode of the minimum game time management in the slot machine 10 of the embodiment will be described. First, in the present embodiment, processing that is not related to the minimum game time is not performed between the elapse determination of the time related to the minimum game time after the start of the next game and the processing of the minimum game time set. .

  That is, for example, if the normal time shown in FIG. 50A is used as an example, in the N-th game as described above, the measurement result of the time related to the minimum game time set at the start of the rotation of the torso is determined by the timing Starting from T1, until the timing T2 at which the measured value becomes 0 arrives, the rotation of the torso according to the (N + 1) th game is not in a state where it can be started. Until the measurement result of the time relating to the minimum game time becomes 0 or less, it is checked whether the measurement result of the time relating to the minimum game time has become 0 or less (whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed) ( The processing of the determination relating to the progress check) is looped.

  As described above, such a loop process related to the elapse check of the minimum game time can be performed during the above-described spinning rotation start standby process used in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14). Further, the processing of the elapse check of the time relating to the minimum game time loops until the measured result becomes 0 or less, and when the measured result becomes 0 or less, the loop of the processing related to the elapse check ends (S521). Then, in the present embodiment, no other processing is executed from the start of the processing relating to the progress check to the end of the loop until the measurement result becomes 0 or less.

  Then, if it is determined by the processing relating to the elapse check of the minimum game time that the measurement result has become 0 or less, the value of the minimum game time relating to the (N + 1) th game (the next game) is changed as described above. During the spinning drum rotation start standby processing of the game progress main processing (see FIG. 14), it is set in the area of the minimum game time timer in the RWM (S522), and the spinning drum rotation can be started. Furthermore, when the minimum game time set here elapses, the rotation of the torso in the (N + 2) th game can be started.

  Here, in the above-mentioned “after the next game start” in the management mode relating to the minimum game time, more specifically, in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14) relating to the (N + 1) th game, the rotation of the torso is performed. It can be said that it is after the start (S51). Furthermore, it can be said that the above-mentioned "minimum game time elapse determination" means that after the start of the rotation of the torso during the (N + 1) th game, the elapse check of the time relating to the minimum game time is performed while repeating the loop processing. . In addition, it can be said that the above-described “processing of the minimum game time set” is processing of setting the value of the minimum game time to RWM at the start of the (N + 2) th rotation of the torso.

  In addition, considering the N-th game as a starting point, in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14) related to the N-th game, the minimum game starts after the rotation of the torso (S51). The time is set, the elapse of the minimum game time is checked by a loop process, and the processing not related to the minimum game time is performed until the value of the minimum game time is set to RWM at the start of the (N + 1) th rotation of the rotating drum. It can also be said that it was not done.

  In addition, even during the measurement of the minimum game time as described above, it is conceivable that a power cut will occur, but the power cut processing related to the power cut in this case is a “process not related to the minimum game time”. May not be applicable.

According to such a management mode of the minimum game time, the time related to the minimum game time can be measured without interruption as much as possible. Then, the time relating to the minimum game time can be counted accurately and promptly by the continuous measurement. In this way, it is possible to prevent the period during which the game cannot proceed from increasing beyond the predetermined time (4.1 seconds) as much as possible, and as much as possible even under the restriction by the minimum game time. Games can be secured.
<<< Management Mode Related to Test Signal Output >>

  Next, a management mode of the minimum game time related to the relationship with the test signal output will be described. In this embodiment, in an error management process (see FIG. 20) related to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), a test signal output process (S762) is executed, and a test signal output process is executed for each timer interrupt process. . Further, as described above, in the test signal output process (S762), a process of outputting a test signal to a predetermined output port is performed.

  The output of the test signal is performed using one or a plurality of pulses, and the first output timing of the pulse representing the output content is determined based on the measurement result of the test signal output timer that measures the timing of the test signal output. Is done. Then, each time the measurement result of the test signal output timer reaches a predetermined time (4.1 seconds or more in this case), the output of the test signal is started. Here, the content of the test signal includes a signal represented by one pulse (single pulse) and a signal represented by a plurality of pulses (plural pulses). It will be the same regardless of the number.

  In the present embodiment, the setting of the test signal output timer is performed immediately after the setting of the minimum game time timer. In other words, in the present embodiment, the minimum game time timer is set during the turnaround rotation start standby process according to the game progress main process (see FIG. 14) as described above, but the test signal output timer is set. Is executed without any other processing as the next processing after the setting of the minimum game time timer. Therefore, the setting of the minimum game time, the test signal output, the end of the minimum game time, and the context of the next test signal output are always kept constant.

  FIG. 53 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the measurement period of the minimum game time and the test signal output start timing. In FIG. 53, “measurement start” indicates the timing of the start of measurement of the time related to the minimum game time, and “measurement end” in the figure indicates “4. Start of measurement” of the time related to the minimum game time. This represents the timing of measurement after one second has elapsed. “Start of test signal output” in the figure indicates the timing at which the above-described test signal output is started.

  Here, the test signal includes a plurality of pulses and a single pulse as described above, and the timing of ending the output of the test signal varies depending on circumstances such as the number of pulses. And an example of a single pulse are shown, and the description of the test signal output stop timing is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting of the test signal output timer is executed without any other processing as the next processing after the setting of the minimum game time timer. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53, the start timing of the test signal output is immediately after the timing of starting the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time. Then, in the test stage, by confirming that the time interval between the start timing of the test signal output at a certain time and the start timing of the next test signal output is 4.1 seconds or more, 4.1 seconds of the test signal output is obtained. It is possible to estimate that the minimum game time is secured.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the measurement start timing of the test signal output timer occurs at an interval equal to or longer than the minimum game time (4.1 seconds). For this reason, in the test stage in which the test signal is monitored, the interval between the output start timing of the test signal output first and the output start timing of the test signal output thereafter (test signal output start interval) is set. If it is possible to monitor and confirm that the interval between the start and the end of the test signal output before and after is secured for 4.1 seconds or more, the minimum game time of 4.1 seconds is indirectly secured by that. Can be confirmed.
<<< Management aspect related to power interruption determination >>

  Next, a management mode of the minimum game time related to the above-described power-off processing (S543 in FIG. 18, see FIG. 19) will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, the power-off determination is performed by determining whether or not there is a power-off detection signal (S561 in FIG. 19) in the power-off process (S543) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). As described above, in the determination of the presence or absence of the power-off detection signal (S561), when the power-off detection signal is detected (S561: YES), the subsequent processing (see FIG. 19) is executed.

  When the power-off detection signal is not detected (S561: NO), the power-off process is terminated, and the process of updating the interrupt counter value (S544 in FIG. 18) is executed. In the update processing of the interrupt counter value (S544), the value of the predetermined range (here, “0” to “255”) is updated by “1” every time the timer interrupt processing is performed, so that the timer interrupt is executed. You can confirm that it has occurred. Thereafter, as described above, a timer measurement process (S551) for measuring the time related to the minimum game time is performed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the timer measurement process (S551) is executed as a process after the power-off process (S543) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) as in the power-off process (S543). The power interruption determination is performed before the subtraction of the minimum game time timer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the time that has been subtracted in the timer interrupt processing at that time is not used for a game due to a power interruption occurring after the subtraction of the minimum game time timer, and the minimum game time can be ensured only by the game time. Can be secured. The counting mode of the timer is not limited to the mode of performing the subtraction (countdown), and may be, for example, the mode of performing the addition (countup).
<< Relationship between game medal payout and weight period >>

  Next, the relationship between the payout of game medals and the weight period will be described. First, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, a display determination is made at the end of the game (S66 in FIG. 14), and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination (payout) for paying out the game medals is stopped. If it is displayed, payout of the number of game medals corresponding to the payout is executed (S67). These processes are executed even during the wait period. For this reason, even if the start lever 25 is operated after the betting is set and the rotation of the rotating bodies 51L to 51R is not started, the payout of the game medals may be performed.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be variously modified. For example, at the time of normal operation shown in FIGS. 50 (A) and 50 (B) or at a recoverable error, at the time of game medal settlement shown in FIG. 51 (B), at the time of game medal insertion shown in FIGS. 52 (A) and 52 (B), setting Not only at the time of checking the value but also in other situations, the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time may be continued without stopping.
<Response to irregular operation in setting change work>

Next, while the setting is changed using the above-described setting unit 62 (see FIG. 4), an irregular operation (an irregular operation) is performed, and a situation such as a power cut (power cut) or an error occurs. The action to be taken in the event of occurrence will be described. In the following, first, a procedure of a normal setting change in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment and a processing mode of set value data (set value data) will be described. And various corresponding patterns in the case where a power failure or an error occurs during a setting change due to an irregular operation will be described.
<< Regular setting change procedure >>

  In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, a normal operation for changing the setting of the setting unit 62 (see FIG. 4) is performed as follows. First, for example, a game arcade clerk or the like opens the front door portion 11 of the slot machine 10 in a power-off state (see FIGS. 1 and 2). When the front door 11 is opened, a predetermined key is inserted into the lock 23 (see FIG. 1) of the front door 11 which is locked in the closed state, and the key is unlocked in the unlocking direction. (For example, counterclockwise).

  Further, the setting door provided in the setting unit 62 shown in FIG. 4 is opened, and although not shown, the setting key cylinder into which the setting key is inserted can be accessed. Also, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder, and the setting key is rotated (ON) in the ON direction (for example, clockwise). Then, the power switch 72 is turned on to supply power to the slot machine 10.

  When the power is turned on, the front door unit 11 and the setting door (not shown) are both in the open state, so that the above-described door switch 60 and setting door switch 67 are both turned on. Also, since the setting key is being rotated in the ON direction, the setting key switch 68 is also turned ON. The door switch 60, the setting door switch 67, and the setting key switch 68 constitute a designation switch (see S9 in FIG. 12) as described above. Therefore, an affirmative determination is made (S9: YES) in the process (S9) of determining whether or not the designated switch is ON in the process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 12).

  Then, when an affirmative determination is made in the above-described determination process (S9), the other conditions are satisfied, and the operation starts in a state in which the setting change device process (see FIG. 13) can be executed. In the present embodiment, such a state is referred to as a state of “operation of the setting change device”. In the present embodiment, the “other conditions” that enable the execution of the setting change device processing are that the power-off recovery data is abnormal (S10: YES) or that the setting change disable flag is ON. (S11: NO).

  Further, as described above, when power is supplied to the slot machine 10, the setting value is displayed on the setting display LED 66 mounted on the main control board 61 (see FIG. 4). A so-called 7-segment display is used for the setting display LED 66. Further, in this embodiment, the setting display LED 66 displays any one of the set values (here, six from “1” to “6”) that is an integer value within a predetermined range. The value becomes visible through the transparent main board case 65.

  Here, the setting value displayed on the setting display LED 66 when the setting is changed is the setting value that was determined at the time of the most recent power-off after the normal setting change operation. Further, as described in the setting change device processing (see FIG. 13), at the start of the setting change, the setting value data indicates a value within a normal predetermined range (here, “1” to “6”). If not (S29: NO), the displayed set value is "1", which is the lowest degree of advantage for the player.

  When the above-described setting / reset button 69 (see FIG. 4) is pressed in the operation of the setting change device as described above, the display of the set value changes. In this embodiment, each time the set / reset button 69 is pressed, the display of the set value is incremented by one step. For example, when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on at the setting 1 (the setting value is 1) and the setting / reset button 69 is operated once, the setting 2 is set. Thereafter, each time the set / reset button 69 is pressed, the display of the set value changes in the ascending order of “2”, “3”,.

  Further, when the set / reset button 69 is operated once with the set value 6 which is the highest set value, the setting 1 which is the lowest set value is set. Then, in a situation where the value displayed on the setting display LED 66 is the set value intended for selection, a game clerk or the like operates the above-described start lever 25 (see FIG. 1) to turn the start switch (not shown). By turning ON, the set value is determined.

  As described above, when the setting / reset button 69 is pressed, the mode of the change related to the display of the set value is not limited to the one in which the display of the set value is incremented by one step. May be decremented step by step and change in descending order. Further, the range of the set value that can be changed by the setting change device process (see FIG. 13) is not limited to six stages of “1” to “6”, but is, for example, four stages of “1” to “4”. May be.

  Subsequently, the setting key is turned in the OFF direction (for example, counterclockwise direction) (OFF operation), the setting door provided in the setting unit 62 is closed, and the operation of the normal setting change is completed, and the game is possible. (Normal state).

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the operation of the setting / reset button 69 is enabled after the above-described “setting change device operation” status, the setting value is being changed. Name. This “setting value change is possible” is a state in which the setting value can be changed (selected) by operating the setting / reset button 69.

  In the present embodiment, a state in which the set value is determined by the operation of the start lever 25 (lever operation) after “the set value can be changed” is referred to as a “set value determined” state. When the set value is to be changed, the setting / reset button 69 is operated as described above in the "setting value is being changed" and the start lever 25 is operated in a state where the set value is reached. The setting value is confirmed. Then, in the situation of “set value confirmation”, even if the set / reset button 69 is operated, the display of the set value does not change.

  In this embodiment, the state of waiting for the setting key to be turned off after the above-mentioned “set value determination” is referred to as “set value determination wait” state. Even in the "waiting for setting value determination" situation, it is impossible to change the setting value by operating the setting / reset button 69. Further, in this embodiment, the state in the setting change operation (the state related to the setting change in the setting unit 62) can be divided into the first state and the second state. When the power is turned on in a state where the setting key is turned on, the state shifts to the first state, and when the start lever 25 is operated thereafter, the state shifts from the first state to the second state. Further, when the setting key is turned off in the second state, the second state ends.

  As the display mode of the set value in the above-described states such as “setting value change is possible”, “set value determined”, and “waiting for set value determination”, a lighting mode, a flashing mode, or a setting mode An example in which dots are displayed on the side (in the vicinity of the lower right) is exemplified. Then, the display mode of the setting value in each situation can be made different from the display mode of the setting in other situations, so that it is possible to distinguish the situation.

  Further, as a display mode of the set value after “set value determination”, a display other than a numeral representing the set value can be performed. Further, examples of the display other than the numeral representing the set value include an integer value (for example, “0”) outside the range of the settable value, and predetermined characters, graphics, and symbols other than the numeral. Further, after the operation of the setting / reset button 69 is started, the same number, character, graphic, symbol, etc. other than the number indicating the set value is continuously displayed regardless of the number of selection operations. It is possible. Further, it is also possible to adopt a display mode in which each time the set / reset button 69 is operated, a numeral other than the numeral indicating the set value is changed.

Thereafter, in the above-described “waiting for setting value determination” state, by turning the setting key in the OFF direction (for example, counterclockwise direction) and turning it back, the operation of the changing device is completed, and the normal operation is completed. A situation in which a game can be started (sometimes referred to as a “normal state” or a “normal game state”) is provided. In the “normal state”, the state in which the setting change is already completed has been completed, and the setting value display on the setting display LED 66 and the display indicating that the setting change is being performed are not performed. ing.
<< Processing mode of data related to setting change >>

  Next, a processing mode of setting value data and other data when a setting change operation is performed will be described. First, the set value data immediately after the power is turned on is backed up when the power is turned off most recently, and is effective when the power is turned on. That is, when the power is turned off, the set value data at that time is stored in a predetermined area in the RWM area to be backed up. Here, the RWM area to be backed up can be referred to as, for example, “storage at power failure” or “storage area at power failure”. The time storage area can be referred to as a “power-off storage area for set value data”.

  Then, at the time of power recovery from the subsequent power failure (at the time of power failure recovery), the backup set value data is used as the set value data relating to the set value (operation start value) at the start of operation of the slot machine 10, and A return is performed. The above-described operation start value is stored in a partial storage area in the storage area at the time of power failure that is to be backed up. As described above, among the set value data, the storage area at the time of power failure for the set value data that is the operation start value can be referred to as the “operation start value storage area”.

  The display of the set value on the setting display LED 66 during the period from when the power is turned on until the first operation of the set / reset button 69 is performed (the period before the start of the setting value selection) is performed by the above-described operation. The setting value data stored in the start value storage area is referred to.

  Further, after the setting / reset button 69 is operated and the selection of the set value is started, the set value data relating to the selected set value (selected set value) is stored in the predetermined temporary storage means of the main control board 61. It is stored in a storage area (a predetermined temporary storage area). Then, when the setting value is displayed on the setting display LED 66 after the selection is started, the setting value data (setting value data relating to the selected setting value) stored in the predetermined temporary storage area is referred to.

  Here, as the above-mentioned "predetermined temporary storage means" and "predetermined temporary storage area", a predetermined area of RWM and a predetermined register can be exemplified. The "predetermined temporary storage means" and "predetermined temporary storage area" can be referred to, for example, as "set value temporary storage means" and "set value temporary storage area".

  Further, as described above, when the setting value is displayed on the setting display LED 66 during the setting change operation, various processing modes relating to the reference to the setting value data can be adopted. First, as the first processing mode, an example in which the above-described setting value temporary storage area is provided as an RWM area for temporarily storing setting value data (herein, referred to as a “temporary storage RWM area”) can be exemplified. Then, the setting value data is read directly from the temporary storage RWM area, and the numerical value indicated by the setting value data is displayed on the setting display LED 66.

  Further, as a second processing mode related to the reference of the set value data, for example, both a register and the above-described temporary storage RWM area are provided as the set value temporary storage area, and the set value of the temporary storage RWM area is stored in the register. An example in which a set value is displayed by referring to a register later can be exemplified. Further, as the third processing mode, even in the case where a register serving as a temporary storage area is provided, as in the above-described first mode, an example in which set value data is directly read from the temporary storage RWM area can be exemplified.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first processing mode related to the above-described setting value data is adopted. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-described second processing mode and third processing mode can be adopted. For example, when the second processing mode is adopted, the set value is operated by operating the setting / reset button 69. Each time the selection is made, the set value data can be transferred from the temporary storage RWM area to the register, and the set value can be displayed on the setting display LED 66.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data indicating the state of the setting key (setting key state data) can be cited as another data relating to the setting change. As the setting key state data, a signal indicating the state of the setting key is monitored, and data obtained based on the monitoring result, flag data indicating the state of the setting key, and the like can be exemplified.

  Furthermore, among these, as the data obtained based on the monitoring result of the signal indicating the state of the setting key, the level of the signal (ON level or OFF level) is determined, and the data obtained based on the level of this signal is exemplified. it can.

  Alternatively, an edge when the signal indicating the state of the setting key changes from OFF to ON is acquired as setting key state data indicating the change to ON, and the signal indicating the state of the setting key is obtained. It is conceivable that an edge when the direction changes from ON to OFF is acquired as setting key state data indicating a change to OFF.

  Further, when the setting change operation is completed, the setting key state is switched from ON to OFF as described above, so that the setting value data (setting related to the selection value) held in the above-described setting value temporary storage area is changed. Value data) is written to the above-mentioned power-shut-off storage area to be backed up. In this embodiment, the set value data at the end of the setting change operation is stored in the above-described operation start value storage area. In addition, before the setting value data at the end of the setting change operation is written and overwritten, the operation start value storage area stores the setting value data at the start of the setting change operation at that time. Here, the data stored in the power-off storage area may be directly obtained from the power-off storage area at the time of the subsequent power-off recovery, or may be temporarily stored in a predetermined storage area at the time of the power-off recovery. The information may be acquired after being stored.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned on in a state where the setting key is turned on and the state is shifted to the above-described first state, the setting value data relating to the beginning of the setting change work is referred to as “first setting value data”. The set value data relating to the set value selected during the first state can be referred to as “second set value data”. The set value data when the start lever 25 is operated to shift from the first state to the above-described second state is referred to as “third set value data”, and the first set value data and the second set value data described above are referred to as “third set value data”. Can be distinguished. The first set value data to the third set value data are transmitted at predetermined timings according to various corresponding patterns also described later when an irregular operation described later is performed. It can be stored in the storage area at the time of disconnection. In addition, the second set value data or the third set value data can be used as the set value data related to the start of the setting change operation according to various corresponding patterns.
<< Specific example of irregular operation related to setting change >>

  Next, an irregular operation (an irregular operation) during the setting change will be described. First, examples of non-regular operations that can be performed during a setting change include turning off the power during the setting change, inserting a game medal during the setting change, and retaining the game medals. Then, due to these irregular operations, processing relating to power interruption and processing relating to errors will be executed.

  Among these emergency situations, the power interruption during the setting change may be erroneously performed by a game arcade clerk or the like, or may be intentionally performed by a fraudulent person. In addition to the power interruption caused by human operation as described above, there are power interruptions that occur without human intervention, such as a power failure or a momentary power failure. Power recovery (also referred to as power recovery or power recovery) may be performed manually or automatically when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure.

  The timing of the power interruption during the setting change may be the timing before or after the selection of the setting value by operating the setting / reset button 69, or after the start lever operation after the selection of the setting value (after the setting value is determined). ) Can be exemplified. Further, when power is turned on after a power interruption, a case where the power is turned on while the setting key is kept ON, a case where the power is turned on after the setting key is turned off, and the like can be assumed.

More specifically, as the error during the setting change, more specifically, the error related to the insertion of the game medal (CP error, C0 error, C1 error, CH error, and CE error), and the payout of the skill medal. Such errors (HE error, HP error, HQ error, and FE error) can be exemplified. Other than this, a communication error between the main control board 61 and the sub control board 31, a random number abnormality, and the like can be cited.
<< First response when power failure occurs (Pattern 1 related to power failure when setting key is ON) >>

  Next, various patterns will be described for dealing with the case where the above-described emergency occurs during the setting change operation. In the following, first, a first response (hereinafter, referred to as “pattern 1 relating to power interruption” or “pattern 1 relating to power interruption when setting key is ON”) in a case where power interruption occurs during setting change is described below. This will be described with reference to FIG. The pattern 1 relating to the power interruption returns the state of the set value to the state at the start of the setting change operation when the power interruption is restored. Further, in the pattern 1 relating to the power interruption, if the setting key is ON, the set value data at the time of the power interruption recovery is the same even if the situation at the time of the power interruption is different.

  54 (a) and (a2) in FIG. 54 (a) show the pattern 1 relating to the power interruption in separate charts based on the difference in the situation at the time of the power interruption. Among these, FIG. 54 (a1) shows a case where a power interruption occurs in the state where there is no operation of setting the set value by operating the start lever (hereinafter referred to as “no set value fixed”), and FIG. ) Shows a case where a power interruption occurs in a state where a setting value decision operation by a start lever operation has been performed (hereinafter, referred to as “set value decision”). Further, the pattern 1 related to the power interruption is employed in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment.

  FIGS. 54 (a1) and (a2) show various situations in the setting change operation from the top to the bottom in the order of occurrence (see the “order” and “status” columns). In FIGS. 54 (a1) and (a2), the ON / OFF state of the setting key in each situation (orders 1 to 7) is shown in the column of “setting key”. Column shows the set value data in each situation. In the column of “set value display” in the figure, the display contents of the setting display LED 66 in each situation are shown, and in the column of “stack contents” described at the right end of the figure, In the situation, the return address (return data) stored in the stack pointer is shown.

  When a setting change operation is performed, the slot machine 10 is powered on (order 1) as shown at the top of the “Status” column in FIG. 54 (a1). ", The state of the setting key at this time is ON. In FIG. 54 (a1), the “set value” described as “a” is the set value at the time of the most recent power cut, and the “set value” is set according to the set value at the time of the power cut. "Are different. In other words, “power-on” in order 1 is power-on performed after power-off after completing the setting change operation in a regular procedure, and the “set value” at the time of power-on is This is the set value (one of “1” to “6”) that was backed up when the power was turned off.

  The reason why the display content of the setting display LED 66 shown in the “setting display” column is blank (blank) is that at this stage, the normal power supply for the setting change has just been turned on, and the display has been started yet. It means that there is no. Further, the fact that the “stack contents” is “n” indicates that return data that is not constant is stored in the stack pointer according to the situation at the time of the previous power failure.

  After such a power-on situation, the above-described "setting change device operation" situation (order 2) is reached. In this “setting change device operation”, as shown in FIG. 54 (a1), the “setting key”, the “setting value”, and the “contents of the stack” indicate the status of “power on” (order 1). No change compared to (). However, the “setting display” which is the display content of the setting display LED 66 is “a” based on the setting value data.

  Subsequently, when the state of “setting value change is possible” (order 3) is reached, the “setting key” remains ON, but if the setting / reset button 69 is operated, the setting key shown in FIG. As shown in the parentheses, the “set value” differs from the previous “a” and changes to the selected new value “b”. Also, “setting display” is “b” corresponding to “setting value”, and “stack content” remains “n”.

  Then, in the case of “no set value decision” shown in FIG. 54 (a1), if the power is turned off during “setting value change is possible” (order 4), the set value data of “set value” is “b”. However, the “stack content” is the return data in the immediately preceding “setting value changeable” situation (order 3). That is, when a power failure occurs, the return address after the power failure recovery is set (saved) in the stack pointer (see S568 in FIG. 19). Then, in the example of FIG. 54 (a1), return data relating to “setting change is possible” is set in the stack pointer, but in the figure, in order to indicate this, “stack contents at power-off” "Is described as" order 3. "

  Further, as shown in FIG. 54 (a1), when the power is turned on while the setting key is ON (order 5), in the subsequent situation of “setting change device operation” (order 6), the “setting value Returns to the same “a” as before the occurrence of the power interruption, and the “setting display” also becomes “a”. In addition, even in the situation of “setting value change is possible” (order 7), “setting value” and “setting display” remain “a”.

  In addition, for example, in the situation of “operation of the setting change device” in the order 2, it is possible to cause the setting display LED 66 to start blinking of the set value. Then, in this case, after the power supply is turned on in the order 5 and the operation of the setting change device is started in the order 6, the power is restored with the setting display LED 66 blinking the set value. Is possible.

  Next, the case of "set value determined" shown in FIG. 54 (a2) will be described. The description of the same parts as those in the case where the set value is not determined will be omitted as appropriate. In the case where the set value is determined, “set value change” in order 4 is performed after “set value change is possible” in order 3. At this time, the “setting key”, “setting value”, and “setting display” do not change, and are “ON”, “b”, and “b”, respectively, similarly to “setting value change is possible” in order 3. .

  Further, as shown in the order 5 in FIG. 54 (a2), the above-described “waiting for setting value determination” situation occurs, but the “setting key”, “setting value”, and “setting display” at this time also change. , And remain “ON”, “b”, and “b”, respectively. If power is cut off in this state (order 6), the “setting key”, “setting value”, and “setting display” do not change. In addition, since the power failure occurred before the “setting key” was turned off, the setting change work was not performed in a regular procedure, and the set value data “b” at this time was It is not stored in the above-mentioned power-off storage area (here, the above-mentioned operation start value storage area). Then, “a” remains stored as set value data in the storage area at the time of power failure.

  Subsequently, after the power is turned on (sequence 7) and the status of the “setting change device operation” is reached (sequence 8), a power failure occurs before the “setting key” is turned off, and the selected setting value is set. Since “b” is not stored in the storage area at the time of power failure and is not backed up, “set value” becomes “a” before the selection operation is performed, and “set display” is also based on the set value data. It becomes "a".

  That is, in the situation of “waiting for setting value determination” after the “setting of the setting value” shown in FIG. 54 (a2) (order 5), if a power interruption occurs while the “setting key” is ON, the “stack contents” No return address is set, and the "stack contents" remain empty. Then, when the power is turned on thereafter, the subsequent processing is executed by referring to the state of the setting key (remaining ON), and the state after the power failure recovery is “setting change device operation”.

  Here, for example, in the situation of “operation of the setting change device” in the order 2, the blinking of the set value is started on the setting display LED 66, and when the operation of “set value determination” in the order 4 is performed, the blinking of the set value is performed. It is also possible to end the display and switch to the lighting display. In this case, when the power is turned on in the order 7 and the operation of the setting change device is performed in the order 8, the power is restored with the setting display LED 66 blinking the set value. Is possible.

  Further, in the pattern 1 related to the power interruption shown in FIG. 54 (a), the case where the set value is not determined (see FIG. 54 (a1)) and the case where the set value is determined (see FIG. 54 (a2)) Although not shown in the figure, if the setting key is turned off when the setting change operation is properly completed, the set value data is stored in the above-mentioned temporary storage area (for example, a register or the like) at the time of a power failure that is to be backed up. The data is transferred to a predetermined storage area (here, an operation start value storage area).

  As described above, in the pattern 1 relating to the power interruption, a response to a power interruption in a state where the setting key is not turned off after the setting value is selected by operating the setting / reset button 69 is defined. Further, in the pattern 1 relating to the power interruption, a data processing mode when a power interruption occurs in a situation where the set value has not yet been determined and a data processing when the power interruption has occurred in the situation where the set value has been confirmed. An aspect is defined.

  Then, in the pattern 1 relating to the power interruption, after the set value is selected, unless the set key is turned off, the selected set value is set in both the case where the set value is not confirmed and the case where the set value is confirmed. The value is not written in the storage area at the time of power failure, and the power is restored without inheriting the selected set value. Then, in the pattern 1 relating to the power interruption, the power interruption is recovered using the set value data (operation start value) in the “setting change device operation” state before the power interruption occurs. Further, according to the pattern 1 concerning the power interruption, if the power is interrupted in an irregular procedure during the setting change, the set value data is not backed up.

  From these facts, according to the pattern 1 concerning the power interruption, when the power is interrupted in the middle of the setting change operation, the setting change operation can be performed again from the state of the same set value data. Further, when a setting change operation is performed in an irregular procedure other than the regular procedure for setting change as described above, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being changed. Then, when the setting is changed by a procedure other than the normal procedure, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an unexpected disadvantage by taking over the set value data at the time of power failure recovery at the time of power failure recovery.

  Here, as the work of setting change in a procedure other than the regular procedure, for example, a setting value having a high degree of advantage is selected, and an intentional process is performed in the middle stage before finishing the work in the regular procedure related to the setting change. An example of a fraudulent act of turning the power off and on again can be exemplified. According to the above-described pattern 1 regarding the power failure, even if there is such an illegal act, by performing the power failure recovery without inheriting the selected set value, it is possible to prevent the setting from being illegally changed. it can.

  In the pattern 1 related to the power interruption, the set value is selected by the set / reset button 69 and the set value is determined by the start lever 25. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A dedicated setting button may be provided to select a set value, instead of using the same. Further, for example, the set value may be determined using other existing buttons such as buttons provided on the sub input unit 27 (see FIG. 1). Further, a dedicated button for confirming the set value may be provided in, for example, the setting unit 62 in the housing 12.

  In the above-described pattern 1 related to the power interruption, the process at the time of the power interruption recovery is performed using the data of “stack contents” (for example, when the set value is not determined as shown in FIG. 54 (a1)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to perform the process at the time of power failure recovery without using the data of “stack contents”. As a processing mode for performing the process at the time of power failure recovery without using the data of “stack contents”, a mode of a state setting using a predetermined flag can be considered.

Further, as an aspect of the state setting using the above-mentioned predetermined flag, for example, when the setting key is turned on and the power is turned on, the “setting change flag” is turned on, and the setting key is turned off while the power is turned on. Thus, the above-described "setting change flag" is turned off, but the setting change flag remains on even if the setting key is turned off during power interruption. When such a state setting mode is adopted, the state after the recovery from power interruption can be set with reference to the setting change flag. If the setting change flag is ON, even if the setting key is OFF, In a setting change state (a state where the change of the set value performed in advance is valid), the subsequent processing can be executed.
<< Second response to power failure (Pattern 2 related to power failure when setting key is ON) >>

  Next, as another embodiment of a response pattern relating to the occurrence of a power failure, a second response to the case where a power failure occurs during a setting change (hereinafter referred to as “pattern 2 relating to power failure” or “ 54 (b) will be described. The same portions as those in the pattern 1 (see FIG. 54A) relating to the above-described power interruption are illustrated in the same manner, and the description of the overlapping portions will be omitted as appropriate.

  In the pattern 2 relating to the power interruption, if the power interruption occurs in a situation where the set value is not determined during the “setting value change is possible”, the power interruption recovery is performed in the same manner as the above-described pattern 1 relating to the power interruption. Sometimes, the state of the set value is returned to the state at the time of power failure. However, if a power failure occurs in a situation where the set value is determined while the set value is being changed, unlike the aforementioned power failure pattern 1, when the power failure is restored, the set value state will be This is the state at the time of disconnection.

  In other words, (b1) in FIG. 54 (b) is similar to FIG. 54 (a1) of the pattern 1 relating to the power interruption, in the case where the power interruption occurs without the operation of setting the set value by the start lever operation. FIG. 54 (b2) shows a case where a power failure occurs in the state where the set value determination operation by the start lever operation has been performed, as in FIG. 54 (a2) of the power failure pattern 1. The correspondence is shown.

  Then, in the case where the set value is not determined in the pattern 2 related to the power interruption, as shown in FIG. 54 (b1), the operation of selecting the set value is performed during the “setting value change is possible” and the set value “b” is set. Is selected and there is no operation for confirming the set value, and the power is turned off (order 4), the set value data of the “set value” at this time is selected in the same manner as in the case of the pattern 1 related to the power cut. The latter value is “b”. Further, the “stack contents” is return data indicating the status of the immediately preceding “setting value change is possible” (order 3). However, the set value data “b” at this time remains stored in the temporary storage area, is not stored in the storage area at the time of power failure, and the set value data in the storage area at the time of power failure is the time when the setting change work is started. It remains as “a” at the time.

  Further, when the power is turned on while the setting key is ON (order 5), in the subsequent situation of “setting change device operation” (order 6), the “set value” is set to the power-off storage area setting. Based on the value data, the display returns to the same “a” as before the occurrence of the power interruption, and the “setting display” also becomes “a”. In addition, even in the situation of “setting change device operation” (order 7), “setting value” and “setting display” remain “a”.

  On the other hand, in the case where the set value of the pattern 2 related to the power interruption is determined (see FIG. 54 (b2)), the “set value change” in order 4 is followed by the “set value determined” in order 4 Done. At this time, there is no change in the “setting key”, “setting value”, and “setting display”, and they are “ON”, “b”, and “b”, respectively, similarly to “setting value change is possible”. However, the set value data “b” at this time is also stored in the power interruption storage area based on the fact that “set value determination” has been performed, and the setting value data in the power interruption storage area is used for the setting change operation. "B" selected after the start of.

  Furthermore, as shown in the order 5 in the figure, the above-mentioned "set value determination wait" situation occurs, but there is no change in the "set key", "set value", and "set display" at this time. "ON", "b", and "b" remain. When power is cut off in this state (order 6), the “setting key”, “set value”, and “setting display” do not change, but when the power is turned on (order 7), the above-described power is turned off. Unlike the pattern 1 (see FIG. 54 (a2)) relating to the disconnection, both the “setting value” and the “setting display” are “b”.

  That is, in the pattern 2 related to the power interruption, when the set value is determined by the operation of the start lever or the like, the set value data held in the predetermined temporary storage area is restored at the time of the power interruption as the backup target. The data is written in a predetermined area of the storage area (a power-off storage area for setting value data). Then, the set value data is backed up when a power failure occurs (order 6), and is restored when the power is turned on (order 7). Then, in the situation of “operation of the setting change device” (order 8), “set value” and “set display” become “b” based on the restored set value data. Note that the power-off storage area for the set value data in the case where the setting value determination operation is performed as described above may be referred to as a “power-off storage area for the determined set value data”. .

  According to the power interruption pattern 2 described above, when the setting change operation is performed in an irregular procedure for causing the power interruption before the set value is determined, the above-described power interruption pattern 1 ( As in the case of FIG. 54 (a), the power interruption recovery is performed without inheriting the set value data. On the other hand, when the set value is determined, the set value data is taken over, and the power interruption recovery is performed based on the set value data in a situation where the set value is determined to be operated.

  Therefore, when a power failure occurs in a state where the set value has not been determined (see FIG. 54 (b1)), the same operation and effect as those of the above-described pattern 1 can be obtained. Unexpected disadvantage can be prevented by inheriting the setting value data at the time of disconnection. If a power failure occurs in a situation where the set value has been determined (see FIG. 54 (b2)), the power failure occurs even if the remaining work such as setting key OFF related to the setting change is not completed. It is possible to end the setting change at the time, and the setting change operation can be simplified as compared with, for example, the case where the setting value is not fixed as shown in FIG. 54 (b1).

  That is, in the case where the set value is not determined (see FIG. 54 (b1)), the set value changed before the power interruption is not inherited after the power interruption, so that the setting change work is often repeated after the power is turned on. Thus, the setting change operation may be complicated. However, as in the case where the setting value is determined as shown in FIG. 54 (b2), the setting value is inherited even if the setting change operation is not completed, so that the operation until the setting value is determined after the power is turned on can be omitted. And the setting change operation can be simplified.

  In the pattern 2 related to the power interruption, the setting value data is stored in the storage area at the time of power interruption when the operation of determining the set value is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, whether or not a setting value confirmation operation has been performed is represented by predetermined data (set value confirmation data), and the set value confirmation data is designated as a backup target every time the setting value confirmation operation is performed. It can be stored in a predetermined area of the storage area at the time of power failure (the storage area at the time of power failure for set value determination data).

Furthermore, an area (selection value storage area) for storing the setting value data selected each time a setting value selection operation is performed can be provided as a power interruption storage area for setting value data. Then, when the power is restored, it is determined whether or not the set value determination data is stored. If the set value determination data is not stored, the set value stored in the operation start value storage area as described above is determined. It is possible to adopt a process of performing a power-off recovery using data, and performing a power-off recovery using the set value data in the above-described selection value storage area when the set value determination data is stored. It is. Further, the above-described set value determination data may be a set value determination flag.
<< Third response to power failure (Pattern 3 related to power failure when setting key is ON) >>

  Next, as another embodiment of a response pattern related to power failure occurrence, a third response to a power failure occurring during a setting change (hereinafter referred to as “power failure power supply pattern 3” or “power failure when setting key is ON”). (Referred to as “pattern 3 relating to disconnection”) will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the same portions as those in the pattern 1 (see FIG. 54A) related to the above-described power interruption are illustrated in the same manner, and the description of the overlapping portions will be omitted as appropriate.

  (C1) in FIG. 54 (c) shows a response when a power failure occurs in the absence of a setting value confirmation operation, and (c2) in FIG. 54 (c) shows a setting value confirmation. It shows a response to a case where a power failure occurs in a state where an operation has been performed. In the pattern 3 relating to the power interruption, as shown in FIG. 54 (c1), when the power interruption occurs in the “setting change is possible” state (order 4), when the power is turned on (order 5), the “setting “Value” and “Setting display” are “b”. In the subsequent “operation of the setting change device” and “during change of the set value”, “set value” and “setting display” are maintained at “b”.

  That is, in the pattern 3 relating to the power interruption, unlike the above-described various patterns, even when the set value is not fixed by the operation of the start lever or the like, the set value data is selected every time the set value is selected. Is written from the temporary storage area to the above-mentioned power-off storage area. Then, the set value data is stored when a power interruption occurs (order 4), and when the power is turned on (order 5), the data is restored and referenced.

  Furthermore, in the situation of “operation of the setting change device” (order 6) and the situation of “setting value change is possible” (order 7), “set value” and “setting display” are based on the restored set value data. It becomes "b". Here, when the set value is determined in the pattern 3 related to the power interruption (see FIG. 54 (c2)), “the set value is determined” in the pattern 2 related to the above-described power interruption illustrated in FIG. 54 (b2). Is the same as

  According to the pattern 3 relating to the power interruption as described above, the setting value data is taken over before the setting value is determined and after the setting value is determined, and the power interruption is restored based on the setting value data. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the setting value has been determined, the setting change can be completed when a power failure occurs, without completing the remaining operations such as the setting key OFF related to the setting change. Further, the setting change operation can be further simplified as compared with the pattern 2 related to the power interruption.

  In addition, according to the pattern 3 relating to the power interruption, every time a setting value is selected, the setting value data is written to the storage area at the time of power interruption to be backed up. It is not necessary to store the value data and transfer and write the set value data to the RWM to be backed up when the set value is determined. Therefore, a temporary storage area for temporarily storing the set value data before storing the set value data in the storage area at the time of power failure is not required, so that the memory capacity and the processing can be reduced.

According to the pattern 3 relating to the power interruption, the setting value change operation is completed without performing the setting value fixing operation without performing the two-step procedure of the setting value selection and the setting value determination. Will be able to do that. For this reason, even in the procedure of the regular setting change work, the work load on the person who performs the setting change work can be further reduced.
<< Fourth response to power failure (Pattern 1 related to setting key OFF during power failure) >>

  Next, as another response mode in the event of a power failure during the setting change operation, a response pattern when the setting key is turned OFF during the power failure is described with reference to FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (d2). explain. In the following, first, a fourth response to a case where power failure occurs during setting change (hereinafter referred to as “pattern 4 relating to power failure” or “pattern 1 relating to setting key OFF during power failure”) is described below. This will be described with reference to FIG. The same portions as those of the corresponding patterns described above are illustrated in the same manner, and the description of the overlapping portions will be omitted as appropriate.

  In pattern 4 related to power interruption shown in FIG. 55 (a) (pattern 1 related to setting key OFF during power interruption), order 1 to order 4 correspond to the above-described power interruption shown in FIG. 54 (a1). This is the same as Pattern 1 (Pattern 1 related to power interruption when setting key is ON). First, the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on (order 1), and the state of the setting key at this time is ON as shown in the “setting key” column on the right side in the figure. Further, the “set value” and “stack contents” at the time of power-on are “a” and “n”, similarly to the above-described pattern 1 related to power interruption (see FIG. 54 (a1)).

  After the above-described power-on state (order 1), the state of “setting change device operation” (order 2) is reached. The “setting key”, “setting value”, and “contents of stack” do not change compared to the “power-on” status (order 1), but the “setting display” Becomes “a” based on the set value data.

  Subsequently, when the state of “setting value change is possible” (order 3) is reached, the “setting key” remains ON, but if the setting / reset button 69 is operated, the setting key shown in FIG. As shown in the parentheses, the “set value” changes to “b” different from “a” up to that time. Also, “setting display” is “b” corresponding to “setting value”, and “stack content” remains “n”.

  Then, if the power is cut off in the state of “setting value change is possible” without performing the setting value fixing operation (order 4), the setting value data of “setting value” remains “b”, The “stack content” is data to which the immediately preceding “setting value change is possible” status (order 3) is to be returned. Further, when the setting key is turned off and the power is turned on with the setting key OFF as shown in the order 5 in FIG. 55 (a), the “setting value” at this time becomes “b” after the selection operation. And the "stack contents" return to the data of the return address in the situation of order 3. Then, in the subsequent situation of “setting change device operation” (order 6), the setting key remains OFF, and the “set value” and “setting display” are “order 3 setting operation”. Similarly, both are “b”.

  In other words, in the pattern 4 related to the power interruption, even when there is no operation for confirming the set value, the set value data of the “set value” or the return destination of the “stack contents” are selected each time the set value is selected. Data is written to the above-mentioned power-shut-off storage area. Then, the set value data and the return destination data are stored when a power failure occurs (order 4), and when the power is turned on (order 5), a determination process is performed to determine whether or not the setting key is OFF. On the condition that the setting key is OFF, the set value data and the return data are restored.

  Further, even if the setting key is OFF when the power is turned on, in order to recognize that the setting is being changed, it is possible to use, for example, the return data of the “stack contents” when the power is turned on. Then, in this case, if the return data at the time of power-on indicates the processing during the setting change work, the state at the time of power interruption recovery can be set to the state during the setting change work. .

  Further, in the pattern 4 relating to the power interruption, the “set value” and the “setting display” are also set in the “set change device operation” status (order 6) and the “set value change enabled” status (order 7). Becomes “b” based on the returned set value data. Here, even when the set value is determined, the set value data may be written to the above-mentioned power-shut-off storage area.

  According to the pattern 4 relating to the power interruption as described above (pattern 1 relating to the setting key OFF during the power interruption), the power interruption occurs during “the setting value can be changed”, and the setting key is turned on when the power is turned on thereafter. If it is OFF, the set value data and “stack contents” are inherited, and the power interruption recovery is performed in the “set value changeable” state. If the power is turned off without finalizing the set value and the setting change is performed in an irregular procedure of turning off the setting key during the power cut, the setting key is turned off. Nevertheless, the power is restored in the state of “setting value change is possible”.

  That is, when the setting change operation is performed in a regular procedure, the setting key is in the ON state if the setting value is being changed. However, when the work of the irregular procedure as described above is performed, when the "set key" is OFF and the "set value can be changed" normal work is performed. Can create situations that never happen.

  Therefore, the fact that the setting change work has been performed by an improper procedure can be notified to the person in charge of the hall based on a difference in the situation from that at the time of the regular work. The provision of such a function makes it easy to detect fraud. In addition, it is possible to exert a deterrent against fraudulent acts, and to prevent unauthorized changes in settings.

  In other words, the above-described pattern 4 related to the power interruption (pattern 1 related to the setting key OFF during the power interruption) is described in another way. The pattern is used when the setting change work is not performed in a regular procedure. It can be said that the trace is left. Further, as another mode of the process for leaving such a trace, a process of detecting a combination of a state of a setting key and a situation in which a setting is being changed is performed, and a process of determining whether the detection result is appropriate is executed. An error notification may be made when a combination of irregular situations, such as the situation “setting value change is possible”, is detected.

  The confirmation that the setting key is OFF may be performed by detecting a rising (or falling) edge when the signal indicating the state of the setting key changes from ON to OFF, Alternatively, the detection may be performed by detecting whether the level of the signal indicating the state of the setting key is ON or OFF.

In the pattern 4 relating to the power interruption, when the setting key is ON even when the power is turned on, the pattern 2 relating to the power interruption described above (see FIG. 54 (b)) or Processing can be performed in a pattern similar to the pattern 3 (see FIG. 54C).
<< Fifth response to power failure (Pattern 2 related to setting key OFF during power failure) >>

  Next, a fifth response (hereinafter, referred to as “pattern 5 relating to power interruption” or “pattern 2 relating to setting key OFF during power interruption”) in the event of power interruption during setting change will be described with reference to FIG. Explanation will be made based on b). The same portions as those of the above-described pattern 4 relating to the power interruption (pattern 1 relating to the setting key OFF during the power interruption) shown in FIG. 55 (a) are illustrated in the same manner, and the description of the overlapping portions will be omitted as appropriate. I do.

  The pattern 5 relating to the power interruption assumes a case where the set value is determined during “the set value can be changed”. That is, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the order from 1 to 3 is the same as the pattern 4 related to the above-described power interruption (see FIG. 55 (a)), but the “set value change is possible”. When the set value is selected and the set value is confirmed (order 4), “set value”, “setting display”, and “stack contents” are “b”, “0”, and “n”, respectively. Here, the “setting display” being “0” indicates that the setting value is determined to be set by the setting value fixing operation for the description of the subsequent situation.

  Then, in the situation of “waiting for setting value determination” to wait for the setting key to be turned off (order 5), “setting value”, “setting display”, and “stack contents” are the same as “b” and “0” as before. , “N”, if a power failure occurs here (order 6), the “stack contents” becomes the return data in the situation of “waiting for setting value determination” (order 5).

  Further, when the setting key is turned off and the power is turned on with the setting key OFF as shown in the order 7 in FIG. 55 (b), the “setting value” at this time becomes the “setting value” after the above selection. b ”, and the“ stack contents ”return to the data indicating the return address in the situation of the order 5. Then, in the subsequent state of “waiting for setting value determination” (order 8), the setting key remains OFF, and the “setting value” and “setting display” are changed to “setting changing device operation” in order 5, Similarly, they are "b" and "0".

  In the pattern 5 relating to the power interruption (Pattern 2 relating to the setting key being turned off during the power interruption), the power interruption occurs in the “waiting for setting value determination” state (order 5) after the setting value is determined, and the power supply If the setting key is OFF at the time of insertion (order 6), the set value data and the "stack contents" are taken over, and the power interruption recovery is performed in a "wait for set value determination" state. If the setting change is performed in an irregular procedure of turning off the setting key without turning off the setting key and turning off the setting key during the power cut, the setting key is turned off. Nevertheless, the power is restored in the state of “waiting for setting value determination”.

  In other words, when the setting change work is performed in a regular procedure, the setting key is in the ON state in the state of “waiting for setting value determination”, but the work in the irregular procedure as described above is performed. When the operation is performed, a situation different from the case where the normal work is performed can be generated, similarly to the above-described pattern 4 related to the power interruption (Pattern 1 related to the setting key OFF during the power interruption). .

  Therefore, the fact that the setting change work has been performed by an improper procedure can be notified to the person in charge of the hall based on a difference in the situation from that at the time of the regular work. The provision of such a function facilitates unauthorized detection. In addition, it is possible to exert a deterrent against fraudulent acts, and to prevent unauthorized changes in settings.

  In other words, the pattern 5 related to the power interruption (the pattern 2 related to the setting key OFF during the power interruption) is described in another way. As in the case of the OFF-related pattern 1), it can be said that a trace is left when the setting change work is not performed in a regular procedure. Further, similarly to the above-described pattern 4 related to power interruption (pattern 1 related to setting key OFF during power interruption), an irregular combination of the state of the setting key and the state of “waiting for setting value determination” is detected. Error notification may be performed based on the detection result.

The pattern 5 relating to the power interruption (Pattern 2 relating to the setting key OFF during the power interruption) is applied to the slot machine 10 in combination with the pattern 4 relating to the power interruption (see FIG. 55A). It is possible. In the pattern 5 relating to the power interruption, when the setting key is ON even when the power is turned on, the above-described pattern 2 relating to the power interruption (see FIG. 54B) or the power interruption is performed. 54 (see FIG. 54 (c)).
<<< 6th response to power failure occurrence (Pattern 3 related to setting key OFF during power failure) >>>

  Next, a sixth response to a case where a power failure occurs during a setting change (hereinafter, referred to as “pattern 6 relating to power failure” or “pattern 3 relating to setting key OFF during power failure”) in FIG. 55 ( Explanation will be made based on c). The same portions as those of the above-described pattern 5 (see FIG. 55B) related to the power interruption are illustrated in the same manner, and the description of the overlapping portions will be omitted as appropriate.

  The pattern 6 relating to the power interruption shown in FIG. 55 (c) has the set value “changeable in set value” like the pattern 5 relating to the power interruption (pattern 2 relating to the setting key OFF during the power interruption). It is assumed that a decision is made. That is, as shown in FIG. 55C, steps 1 to 6 are the same as those in FIG. 55B. Then, as a result of the recovery from the power interruption, the state becomes the “normal state” as shown in order 8. In the “normal state”, the setting key state is OFF and the setting value data is “b”, but nothing is displayed as the “setting display”.

  In other words, in the pattern 6 relating to the power interruption, when the setting key is ON at the time of the recovery from the power interruption, it is determined that the setting is being changed, and the state of the setting being changed is returned to by referring to the “stack contents”. To determine. On the other hand, if the setting key is OFF when the power is restored, the normal state is determined and the normal state is set regardless of the “stack contents”. The “normal state” described above indicates a state in which a normal game is available after the setting change operation is completed. In the “normal state”, “b” which has been set before the power failure occurs is used, and the state after the recovery from the power failure differs depending on the state of the setting key.

  In the pattern 6 related to the power interruption, the set value is selected during “setting change is possible” in order 3, and the power interruption occurs before the “set value determination” in order 4 is performed. When the power is turned on while the setting key is ON (when the setting change operation in the normal procedure is not completed), the return data of the “stack contents” is used to execute “setting” in order 3 It returns to the state before the setting value selection of “can be changed” is made.

  According to the pattern 6 relating to the power interruption as described above (pattern 3 relating to the setting key OFF during the power interruption), the power interruption occurs in the situation of “determination of the set value”, and the setting key is turned on when the power is turned on thereafter. If it is OFF, the set value data is inherited, but the “stack contents” are not inherited, and power recovery is performed in the “normal state”. If the setting change was performed in an irregular procedure of turning off the setting key during the power cut without turning off the setting key, the setting change was not completed. Nevertheless, the power is restored in the “normal state”.

That is, the same state is obtained when the setting change work is completed in a regular procedure and when the work in the irregular procedure as described above is performed. For this reason, even if the work is performed according to the irregular procedure, the situation does not shift to a special situation as long as the setting value determination is performed according to the regular procedure. For example, in the case where a game store clerk who is performing a setting change operation simply inadvertently mistakes the operation procedure, the setting change operation can be completed as it is, and the operation procedure can be simplified. Becomes possible.
<<< 7th response to power failure occurrence (Pattern 4 related to setting key OFF during power failure) >>

  Next, a seventh response to a case where a power interruption occurs during a setting change (hereinafter, referred to as “pattern 7 relating to power interruption” or “pattern 4 relating to setting key OFF during power interruption”) in FIG. Description will be made based on d1) and (d2). 55 (a) to 55 (c), the same portions as the above-described patterns 4 to 6 related to the power interruption are illustrated in the same manner, and the description of the overlapping portions will be omitted as appropriate.

  In the pattern 7 related to the power interruption, as shown in FIG. 55 (d1), when the “setting key” is ON, the “power-on” status (order 1), and the “setting change device operation” status (Order 2), the state of “Setting value change is possible” is advanced (Order 3), and then “power is turned off” (Order 4). Then, the setting key is turned off, and the power is turned on with the setting key OFF as shown in the order 5 in FIG. 55 (d1).

  Further, while the “setting key” remains in the OFF state, the state of “setting value change is possible” (order 6) and the state of “set value decision” (order 7) are performed. In the situation (order 6), a new setting value different from “b” is not selected. Then, in the situation of “waiting for setting value” (order 8), the state of the “setting key” has been kept OFF from the previous situation, but in the situation of “waiting for setting value decision”, the power is cut off again. Occur (order 9).

  Subsequently, the power is turned on again with the "setting key" being OFF (order 10). At this time, the “set value” is “b”, and the return destination based on the “stack contents” is “wait for set value determination”, which is the status of order 8 (order 11).

  On the other hand, FIG. 55 (d2) shows a corresponding pattern in a case where an operation of fixing the set value is performed in a state where the setting key is ON, and thereafter the power is cut off. In the example of FIG. 55 (d2), the process up to “set value change is possible” in order 3 is the same as that of FIG. 55 (d1) described above, but thereafter, “set value decision”, “set value decision wait” (Order 4 and order 5), and the power is cut off during "waiting for setting value determination" (order 6). Then, when the power is turned on (order 7), the normal state is established (order 8) regardless of the "stack contents", as in the case of the pattern 6 related to the power interruption described above.

  That is, in the pattern 7 relating to the power interruption, when the power interruption occurs after the “set value determination”, the state after the power interruption recovery differs depending on the state of the setting key. Then, as shown in FIG. 55 (d1), power interruption occurs when the setting key is “OFF” (see FIG. 55 (d1)), and if the setting key at power-on is OFF, “ The power is restored to the status of “waiting for setting value decision”. However, similarly, even if a power failure occurs after the “set value determination”, as shown in FIG. 55 (d2), the power failure occurs with the setting key being “ON”, and when the power is turned on. If the state of the setting key is OFF, the power is restored to the “normal state”.

  As described above, it is possible to make the power recovery destination different according to a combination of situations before and after the power interruption (or power-on) by executing the following processing. For example, first, data indicating whether the set value is determined (the above-described set value determined data) and data indicating the state of the setting key at the time of power failure (setting key state data at the time of power failure) are first stored. Are stored in a storage area for setting value determination data and a storage area for setting key state data in a storage area at the time of power failure to be backed up.

  When the power is turned on after the power failure, the state of the setting key at that time is checked, and the set value determination data and the setting key status data stored before the power failure and the setting key at the time of power failure recovery are checked. Refer to the data indicating the status (setting key status data at power-on).

  Further, the current “setting key” data is compared with the restored “setting key” data. If the setting key has been switched from OFF to ON when a power failure occurs and when the power is turned on, Alternatively, if the setting key remains ON and does not change, it is determined that the setting key is ON. If the setting key has been switched from ON to OFF, or if the setting key remains OFF and remains unchanged, it is determined that the setting key is OFF.

  In the example shown in FIG. 55 (d1), when the power is turned off in order 4 and the power is turned on in order 5, the setting key is switched from ON to OFF, and the set value is determined. Since the power supply is not turned on, the “set value” is “b” selected in “set value changeable” in order 3 and the status after the power failure recovery is the same as order 3 according to “stack contents”. "Setting value can be changed" is displayed (order 6).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 55 (d1), in the case of power interruption in order 9 and power-on in order 10, unlike the above-described case, the set value is determined (order 7). However, since the state of the setting keys before and after the power interruption (or power-on) is both OFF, the state after the power interruption recovery is the same as the order 8 in accordance with the “stack contents”, as in the case described above. "Wait for setting value determination" (order 11).

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 55 (d2), the set value is determined (order 4) before the power cut in order 6, and the setting key is turned on before and after the power cut (or power-on). Is switched from OFF to OFF, the “setting value” after power-on is “b” selected in “setting value change is possible” in order 3, and the status after power interruption recovery is “stack contents”. , And becomes the "normal state" (order 8).

  In the pattern 7 relating to the power interruption, when the state of the setting key does not change while the setting key remains ON, the pattern 2 relating to the power interruption described above (see FIG. 54 (b)), or It is possible to perform processing in the same pattern as the pattern 3 (see FIG. 54 (c)) relating to power interruption.

  In the case of the pattern 7 relating to the power interruption described above, in the case shown in FIG. 55 (d1), similarly to the pattern 5 relating to the power interruption described above (see FIG. 55 (b)), a regular procedure is used. A trace can be left when the setting change operation is not performed. The provision of such a function makes it easy to detect fraud. In addition, it is possible to exert a deterrent against fraudulent acts, and to prevent unauthorized changes in settings.

  In the case of the pattern 7 relating to the power interruption, in the case shown in FIG. 55 (d2), the setting during the power interruption is performed similarly to the case of the pattern 6 relating to the power interruption (see FIG. 55 (c)). If the setting change operation is performed in an irregular procedure of turning off the key, the power is restored in the “normal state” even though the setting change operation has not been completed ( Order 8). Then, the same situation occurs when the setting change work is performed in a regular procedure and when the work in the irregular procedure as described above is performed.

  Therefore, for example, in the case where a game store clerk during the setting change operation is inadvertently mistakenly making a mistake in the operation procedure, the setting change operation can be completed as it is, and the operation procedure can be simplified. Can be achieved.

  It is to be noted that such a pattern 7 related to the power interruption changes the state after the power interruption is restored depending on whether or not the setting key is turned ON / OFF before and after the power interruption (or power-on). . In addition, it can be said that the state after the power failure recovery is set by looking at the state after the switching of the setting key.

The pattern 7 relating to the power interruption can determine the state of the setting key based on the signal level as described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination of the state of the setting key may be performed by detecting a signal edge as described above. That is, it is also possible to determine the state of the setting key by detecting the rising (or falling) edge when the signal indicating the state of the setting key changes from ON to OFF. Such signal edge detection can be performed, for example, when the power is turned on (see steps 5 and 10 in FIG. 55 (d1) and step 7 in FIG. 55 (d2)).
<< First Response when Error Occurs (Pattern 1 Related to Error) >>

  Next, an error notification pattern at the time of occurrence of an error will be described as a response to an emergency other than a power cut. The same portions as those of the above-described various patterns are illustrated in the same manner, and the description of the overlapping portions will be omitted as appropriate. First, a first response (hereinafter, referred to as “error-related pattern 1”) when a predetermined error occurs during the setting change will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the pattern 1 relating to the error, during a setting change operation, when a predetermined operation causing an error is performed after selecting a setting value, the state of the setting key is turned OFF after the setting value is determined by a start lever operation or the like. Then, an error notification is executed.

  That is, conventionally, when an operation that causes an error is performed during a setting change, the setting value is set to a value outside the specified range (here, a value other than “1” to “6”) and the setting change operation is performed. There was something to ban. In addition, when the setting change operation is prohibited, error notification is not performed unless the power is turned off. In these conventional correspondence patterns, it is not easy to smoothly change the setting and determine whether an error has occurred.

  On the other hand, in the error pattern 1 according to the present embodiment, when an error occurs during the setting change, the error notification is performed after the setting change is completed and the operation of the post-setting changing device is stopped. Then, during the operation of the setting change device, even if an error has occurred, the setting change operation can be continuously performed. Further, the selection result of the set value is reflected every time the selection operation is performed, and the display of the set value data and the set value is switched.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), when the power is turned on while the setting key is turned on (order 1), the state of “setting change device operation” is obtained in the same manner as the various patterns described above (order 1). 2) "Setting value change is possible" (order 3). In this situation, for example, even if an error (CE error) occurs when it is determined that the game medals have stayed at the portion where the above-described insertion sensor 1 (115) or the insertion sensor 2 (116) is provided, the "setting" “Value change is possible” continues (order 5), and after setting values are determined (order 6), the state becomes “waiting for setting value determination”. Then, as shown in the figure, when the "setting key" is turned off, an "error state" is set (order 8), and error notification is executed.

  Here, the errors that occur during the “setting change device operation” include a selector passage sensor abnormal passage (C1 error), a coin passage sensor retention error (CE error), and a inserted game medal when a backflow of the game medal is detected. Error (C1 error, CH error, CE error) error when the paid medal is jammed (HP error), error when a payout sensor (not shown) has an abnormal input (HQ) Error), an error (FE error) when the game medal auxiliary storage 71 is full, and the like. In addition, there are a communication error that occurs when the main control board 61 and the sub-control board 31 are disconnected, an error that occurs when an illegal payout of game medals is detected, and a random number error. In the pattern 1 relating to the error, an error state in which an error notification is performed even when various errors occur in which a normal state in which a normal game can be played is handled as an error and an error notification is performed. And not.

According to the pattern 1 relating to the error as described above, when an error occurs during the setting change operation, the error notification is performed after the operation of the setting change device is stopped, so that the error notification is performed without hindering the setting change operation. It becomes possible. Thus, the setting change operation can be smoothly performed. For example, the priority of error notification may be determined in advance based on the importance of the error, and the error notification during the setting change may be performed only when an error of a predetermined priority or higher is detected. .
<< Second response at the time of error occurrence (error-related pattern 2) >>

  Next, as another example of a response pattern relating to the occurrence of an error, a second response (hereinafter, referred to as “error-related pattern 2”) when a predetermined error occurs during a setting change will be described with reference to FIG. ). Note that the same portions as those of the pattern 1 related to the above-described error are illustrated in the same manner, and the description of the overlapping portions will be omitted as appropriate. In pattern 2 relating to this error, during a setting change operation, when a predetermined operation causing an error is performed after selecting a set value, the state of the setting key is turned off after the set value is determined by a start lever operation or the like. Even if it does, error notification is not performed, and the state shifts to the normal state.

  That is, in the pattern 2 relating to the error, when an error occurs during the setting change, the error notification is not performed even after the operation of the setting change device is stopped, and the normal game is possible after the operation of the setting change device is stopped. It becomes a "normal state".

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), for example, in the situation of “setting value change is possible” (order 3), even if a CE error related to the retention of game medals occurs, As in pattern 1 (see FIG. 56 (a)), “setting value change is possible” continues (order 5), and after setting value determination (order 6), the state becomes “set value determination wait”. Then, as shown in the figure, when the "setting key" is turned off, the "normal state" is set (order 8), and no error notification is executed.

  According to the pattern 2 relating to the error as described above, during the setting change operation, if an error occurs in which a normal state in which a normal game can be played is handled as an error and an error notification is performed, By not performing the error notification even after the operation of the setting change device is stopped, it is possible to suppress the error notification in unnecessary scenes and to improve the efficiency of the setting change operation. As a result, the setting change operation can be smoothly performed without hindering the setting change operation.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be variously modified. For example, various data processing modes related to power interruption and errors during setting change and various storage area configurations can be adopted as long as the same processing can be performed. is there. The setting key switch 68 shown in FIG. 4 may be provided separately from the setting unit 62.
<Various measures in other complex situations>

Next, various countermeasures that can be taken in the event of an effect display or turning control in the slot machine 10 when a problem such as a power failure or a rotation failure has occurred will be described. The same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
<(1) Countermeasures for failure in special status display (countermeasure pattern 1)>

  Hereinafter, a countermeasure in a case where the effect display and various inconveniences are combined will be described. Here, a special state display is assumed as the effect display. Furthermore, as the “special state display” assuming a countermeasure against a malfunction, for example, a moving image displayed on an image display unit such as the staging unit 18 (FIG. 1) when the special state is different from the normal state is considered. be able to. Here, the reason why “the effect unit 18 and the like” is used is that a display device for effect display can be provided in addition to the effect unit 18.

  Further, as the special state, the above-described bonuses (main bonus) such as BB and RB, RT (replay time), AT (assist time), and ART (assist replay) in which replay or bell is established with a higher probability than usual. Time). Among these special states, bonuses such as BB and RB and RTs are managed by the main control board 61. ATs and ARTs in other special states may be managed by the sub-control board 31 or may be managed by the main control board 61.

  Further, as the special state, an advantageous section (advantageous game state) in which the player can perform an advantageous game state can be exemplified. As the advantageous section, a game state in which a game such as an AT or an ART can be performed by management of the main control board 61 can be exemplified. In this advantageous section, a game such as AT may or may not be performed. For example, when a predetermined lottery is hit or control for displaying a predetermined symbol combination is performed, And so on, control for games can be performed. Further, the advantageous section may end in a predetermined period (eg, a period of 1500 games). In addition, there may be a plurality of types of periods of the advantageous section.

  Further, as the special state, a so-called additional special zone game state can be exemplified. This additional specialization zone is a period of a gaming state in which it is easy to add the number of games for a predetermined game such as AT or ART (the probability of additional addition increases). The period of the additional specialization zone may be one type or a plurality of types.

  As a special state display related to such a special state, a series of displays can be considered by being divided into a plurality of sections arranged in chronological order. As the display divisions of the special state display, a start display of the special state (special state start display), a display during the special state (display during the special state), and an end display relating to the special state (special state end display). Examples can be given. Each of these displays can be exemplified by a display that constitutes a series of display contents using a plurality of display data in chronological order. Further, as the special state start display among these, an example in which video display and effect sound output are performed as an introductory effect of, for example, several seconds to several tens of seconds can be exemplified. The video display may include a moving image display, a still image display, or a combination thereof. For example, a display state in which a predetermined still image or another predetermined moving image is displayed after the display of a predetermined moving image and the display is shifted to a special state display described later can be adopted as the special state start display. is there.

  In addition, as the effect at the time of displaying the special state start, in addition to this, for example, a freeze (start freeze) effect that can be performed in various modes as described above using the turning drums 51L to 51R under the management of the main control board 61. And an example of executing the image display and the output of the effect sound by the management of the sub-control board 31 together.

  Here, the relationship between a freeze effect, which is an effect managed by the main control board 61, and an effect such as video display (a display effect related to the freeze effect), which is managed by the sub-control board 31, can be variously determined. It is. For example, a freeze effect and an effect such as image display are started at the same timing, an effect such as image display is started before the freeze effect, or an effect such as image display is started after the freeze effect. Or it is possible.

  More specifically, when a freeze effect is started by the management of the main control board 61, the sub-control board 31 can start an effect related to the freeze effect based on a command from the main control board 61. . Further, before the start of the freeze effect, it is possible to transmit a command relating to the freeze effect from the main control board 61 to the sub-control board 31 to start the effect by the management of the sub-control board 31, and thereafter to start the freeze effect. is there. Further, after the start of the freeze effect, a command relating to the freeze effect can be transmitted from the main control board 61 to the sub-control board 31 to start the effect by the management of the sub-control board 31.

  Further, as the above-mentioned display during the special state, for example, the progress status such as the number of games (elapsed games) or the number of game medals that are sequentially increased in the special state is controlled by sub-control based on a command from the main control board 61. An example in which the display is displayed together with the effect by the management of the substrate 31 can be exemplified. The display during the special state may be, for example, a “normal display in the special state” or a “normal screen in the special state”.

  The above-mentioned special state end display is, for example, a state in which a character (a hero character, an ally character, or the like) in an effect wins or defeats an enemy character in the battle effect by managing the sub-control board 31. And the like that are executed following the production in the special state. Further, as the special state end display, any or all of the game results such as the number of games executed during the special state, the number of acquired game medals, and the number of continuous sets, A so-called ending effect that is displayed based on a command from the main control board 61 can be exemplified. The “number of continuous sets” described above indicates the degree of stacking of the special state by the number of sets in which a plurality of games (40 games, 70 games, 100 games, etc.) constitute one set.

  The display of the game result in the special state, such as the number of games, the number of acquired games, and the number of continuous sets, in the ending effect is, for example, additionally displaying the number of games, the number of acquired games, the number of continuous sets, one by one, or one. It is possible to switch and display each time. Further, the ending effect can be performed in such a manner that all kinds of game results such as the number of games, the number of acquired games, the number of continuous sets, and the like are all displayed (batch result display).

  Furthermore, at the time of the ending effect, it is also possible to execute the above-described freeze effect as managed by the main control board 61 as an end freeze effect. Further, an example of an effect mode in which the hero character or the ally character executes an effect of a story defeating the enemy character and then executes the ending effect as described above.

  Further, when the special state continues, for example, when shifting from the ART to the bonus, the management of the sub control board 31 based on the command from the main control board 61 causes the special state end display related to the previous special state to be displayed. Subsequently, a special state start display relating to a later special state may be executed.

On the other hand, an inconvenience that occurs in the special state display situation includes a power cutoff (power cutoff) determined by the main control board 61. In the following, a control operation (basic operation) in the case where no failure occurs will be described, and thereafter, a difference from the basic operation will be described for two cases where the power-off occurrence timing is different.
<<< Basic operation related to special state display (basic operation related to countermeasure pattern 1) >>>

  In FIG. 58A, various operation states in the basic operation in which no problem occurs are denoted by reference numerals G1 to G10 and are shown in chronological order from top to bottom. In this basic operation, first, a turning-stop operation (G1) detected under the control of the main control board 61 during a normal game is started, and then, in a special state under the control of the sub-control board 31. After the start display start status (G2), the process proceeds to a start display elapse wait status (G3).

  Of these, the turning cylinder stop operation (G1) shown at the top is for the last turning cylinder (third stop turning drum) among the above-described first to third turning bodies 51L to 51R. This indicates that the operation of the stop button (any one of the first stop button 24L to the third stop button 24R) is performed. When a button operation (third stop) for stopping the third stop cylinder is detected under the management of the main control board 61 (G1), the above-described special state starts by the management of the sub-control board 31. The display shifts to the display start situation (G2).

  As described above, the special state display can be considered in stages, such as a special state start display, a special state display, and a special state end display. The execution time (not limited to one) is determined in advance for the special state start display, the special state in-progress display, and the special state end display. These times can be referred to as “start display time”, “special state display time”, and “end display time”.

  Further, waiting for the “start display time”, “display time during special state”, and “end display time” to elapse is referred to as “waiting for display of start display”, “waiting for display of special state”, and , "Waiting for end display progress" or the like. Furthermore, the times during which these wait states are set can be referred to as “start display elapsed wait time”, “special state display elapsed wait time”, “end display elapsed wait time”, and the like.

  In the example of FIG. 58 (a), when the special state start display is started (G2), a state of waiting for the start display is reached, and the time for waiting for the start display is measured (G3). During the waiting time for the start display to elapse, for example, various effects can be considered as effects to be executed in the effect unit 18 or the like. For example, when the above-described freeze effect by the management of the main control board 61 is performed, On the basis of a command from the main control board 61 to the sub-control board 31, it is possible to execute an effect display related to the freeze effect.

  When the above-described start display elapsed waiting time ends (G4), the special state start display ends (G5), and the state shifts to the special state display (G6). After the start of the special state display (G6), when a predetermined special state end condition (described later) is achieved (G7), the state is shifted to the special state end display state (G8). Here, the special state ending condition of G7 is that the number of paid out game medals has reached a predetermined number during the special state, that the number of games in the special state has reached a predetermined number, or that a predetermined symbol That the combination has been displayed can be adopted. Then, any one of them can be set as the special state end condition, or a plurality of combinations can be set as the special state end condition.

Further, the special state end display is continued, and when the end display elapsed waiting time ends (G9), the special state end display ends, and the game state is shifted to the following game state according to the situation (G10). In the example of FIG. 58A, the end display elapsed waiting time ends (G9), and when the special state end display ends, in G10, a normal medium state (also referred to as a normal state) different from the special state is started. ing.
<< Power interruption pattern 1 during special state display (Countermeasure pattern 1-1) >>

  Next, a first combination of the above-described special state display and power-off as a failure (power interruption pattern 1 during the special state display) will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same situations as the basic operation shown in FIG. 58 (a), and description thereof will be omitted. In the example of FIG. 58 (b), when the power-off (G17) occurs in a state from the state of waiting for the start display elapse (G3) to the end of the start display elapse waiting time (G4). Is assumed. For example, as described above, when a freeze effect is being performed during the start display elapsed waiting time, power interruption occurs during the freeze effect.

  In such a case, the power is turned off (G16) after the start of the start display elapsed waiting time (G3), and the power is turned off (G17; hereinafter, referred to as "power return"). Without receiving the command related to the special state start display from the control board 61, a predetermined start end wait display is started in the rendering unit 18 or the like by the management of the sub control board 31 (G18). That is, in the sub-control board 31, the sub-main CPU 86 executes a start-time end wait display (G18) as an effect display after the power is restored in a state where the command from the main control board 61 is not received.

  Here, the display data (first display data) related to the special state start display at the time of the occurrence of power failure is configured by sequentially executing a plurality of display data, for example, display data A, display data B, and display data C, The display data (second display data) relating to the display of waiting for completion at the start after power restoration (G18) can be constituted by a plurality of display data of display data D and display data E. Further, it is possible to set the second display data to a special state display, which is a general screen of a special state to be shifted to after the freeze ends. This allows the player to recognize that the player is in a special state when the power is restored during a freeze and the power is restored, thus providing a sense of security to the player even if there is an accident that the power is cut off. Can be.

  Further, the last few seconds of the special state start display can be configured by looping the display of predetermined display data. For example, the display data A is defined as 0 to 10 seconds, the display data B is defined as 10 to 18 seconds, and the display data C is defined as 18 to 20 seconds. Then, it is conceivable to loop the display using the display data C. At this time, as described above, in the display data B, as described above, a plurality of types of game results such as the number of games, the number of acquired games, and the number of continuous sets are sequentially displayed. Display data). In such a case, the display data A and the display data B can be the first display data, and the display data C can be the second display data.

  Further, the configuration of the first display data and the second display data can be changed depending on circumstances such as a power-off timing. For example, when the power is cut off while the display data B is being executed after the display data A, the display data up to the display data B becomes the first display data, which is used for the start-end wait display after the power is restored. The display data D and the display data E that constitute the second display data. Further, when the power is cut off while the display data A is being executed, the display data up to the display data A is the first display data, and the display data D and the display data E are changed to the second display data in the same manner as described above. Is formed.

  Further, the configuration of the first display data may be such that the display of the special state start is completed by the execution up to the display data C when the power is not cut off. Furthermore, in the configuration of the first display data, when the power is not cut off, other display data (for example, the display data F, the display data G, etc.) are executed after the display data C, and the special state start display ends. It may be as follows.

  The second display data may be composed of three or more display data. In addition, the second display data is not limited to a configuration including a plurality of display data. For example, the second display data includes only the above-described display data E (or only the display data D). There may be. Further, the second display data can be considered as a single display data by integrating the display data D and the display data E.

  In addition, if the freeze effect under the management of the main control board 61 is being executed at the time of displaying the special state start, a command related to freeze effect information, such as indicating the remaining time of the freeze effect, is displayed when the power is restored. There is no transmission / reception. For this reason, in the sub-control board 31, the effect by the start waiting display (G18) using the second display data (here, the display data D and the display data E) is performed without the information relating to the freeze effect. Execute in parallel with

  The start-time end wait display (G18) here is, for example, a display for a special state, a display of a game not in the special state (normal state), or a stand-by state of no game. Any of predetermined displays among the predetermined standby displays can be adopted. When the display for the special state is performed as the start end wait display (G18) using the second display data, it is indicated to the player that the special state will be resumed after the power is restored. Can be. In addition, as a start end wait display (G18), a display during a game that is not in a special state (normal state), or when the above-described standby display is performed, when the power supply is restored, It is possible to indicate to the player that the display-time control has been restarted.

  As described above, the display content of the above-described start waiting display (G18) is based on the second display data, and the second display data includes a plurality of display data (here, display data D and display data E). Can be used in time series.

  More specifically, as the display of the display data D, for example, a moving image display of a battle (fighting) scene is performed, and as the display of the display data E, the display of the final phase of the battle is repeatedly displayed (loop display). Can be In this case, the transition from the battle (fighting) scene to the scene of the final phase of the battle is performed, and while the special state is being expected from the player, the special state display relating to the special state is thereafter performed.

  Further, a display content such as using a still image as the display data E, shifting to the special state display after displaying the still image after the moving image (display after the start), and the like can also be illustrated.

  Further, it is also possible to execute the remaining effects of the effects interrupted by the power-off as the start-time end wait display (G18). In this case, it is conceivable that the progress of the effect is managed using a timer or the like, the information on the progress is stored when the power is turned off, and the effect is restarted based on the stored information when the power is restored. .

  Examples of the above-mentioned "standby display" include a demonstration display (display of a demonstration) for displaying the contents of effects and games during standby, a brand display for displaying a company name, a model name, and the like. As the display data for the demonstration display and the brand display, it is possible to use the data displayed when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on. Further, during the standby display, it is also possible to display a selection menu of a language (Japanese, Korean, Chinese, English, etc.) used for displaying characters of the game description. And such a standby display can also be constituted by a plurality of display data (for example, display data D, display data E).

  Here, in the example of FIG. 58 (b), the special state start display is not completed due to the power interruption occurring during the special state start display. For this reason, after the end of the above-mentioned start display elapsed waiting time (G4), the state of the special state start display in the basic operation of FIG. (G6). Then, similarly to the basic operation of FIG. 58A, the state shifts to the state after the start of the special state display (G6).

  When the power is restored (G17), the sub-control board 31 may not have information on the remaining time of the freeze effect, but may not store information indicating the progress of the effect (effect information on the effect). Conceivable. When such a control mode is adopted, for example, at the end of the start display elapsed waiting time (G4) or at the start of the special state display (G5), the main control board 61 switches to the sub control board. A command indicating that a freeze effect is being performed at the start of the special state (command during start freeze) is transmitted to 31. Then, on the sub-control board 31, based on the command during the start freeze, the effect related to the freeze effect is executed, or one of a plurality of effects is selected and executed. Conceivable.

  In addition, after the power is restored after the power is turned off in the state where the freeze effect and the special state start display are being performed, the start end completion display (G18) is displayed during the special state such as ART (for example, “ART normal display”). , Or “ART normal screen”), the following control mode can be considered.

  First, as a first control mode (first control mode at the time of start), the sub-control board 31 executes a command from the main control board 61 while executing a start completion wait display (G18) after the power is restored. wait. At this time, the start-time end wait display (G18) uses the display data of the content related to the freeze effect at any timing (or even from the beginning). Further, the main control board 61 transmits to the sub-control board 31 a command for notifying the end of the freeze effect (a freeze effect end command at the start of the special state) at the timing of the end of the freeze effect. Then, the sub control board 31 recognizes that the freeze effect has ended based on the received freeze effect end command, ends the start end wait display (G18), and starts displaying the above-described ART normal screen. .

  Subsequently, as a second control mode (second control mode at the start), the main control board 61 counts (measures) the timer during the freeze effect at the start of the special state, and counts the count value (freeze effect progress). Time value) to the sub-control board 31. When the count value reaches a predetermined value (when the freeze effect end time comes), the sub control board 31 shifts the display content of the effect unit 18 and the like from the special state start display related to the freeze effect to the ART normal screen.

  Then, at the time of the power-off recovery from the power-off during the special state start display, the main control board 61 transmits the count value that has continued to the count value at the time of the power-off occurrence to the sub-control board 31. When the count value reaches the predetermined value, the sub-control board 31 shifts the display content of the effect section 18 and the like from the special state start display relating to the freeze effect to the ART normal screen, as in the case where there is no power interruption.

  Subsequently, as a third control mode (third control mode at the start), the main control board 61 transmits a status command (status command) indicating the state of the effect to the sub-control board 31. For example, as the state command, a state command indicating that the game state is in a freeze effect, a command indicating that the game state is in a special state, a command indicating that the game state is in a normal state, and the like are provided. When the sub-control board 31 receives a state command indicating that the freeze effect is being performed, it starts an effect related to the freeze effect. If it is received, an ART normal screen is displayed, and if a command in a bonus state is received, an effect during a special game such as a bonus normal screen is started. In addition, during the freeze effect, the main control board 61 performs, for example, at predetermined intervals, a predetermined timing during the freeze effect (rotating the winding drum to align the seven symbols on a straight line, or rotating the winding drum in the reverse direction). (E.g., the timing at which the command is executed).

  Further, at the time of the power-off recovery from the power-off during the special state start display, the sub-control board 31 starts the start-time end wait display (G18) based on the above-mentioned standby command. In this case, the standby command is provided with information indicating the progress status (stage of progress) of the freeze effect, and when the power is turned off, the display data is selected based on the received standby command, and the special state start display before the power is turned off is continued. It is conceivable to perform sexual display. Note that, as described above, the second display data can be an ART normal screen.

  As described above, when the power is cut off during the special state start display, the start end wait display (G18) is performed when the power is restored. It is possible to prevent an unexpected operation from being performed after the power is restored, and it is possible to surely end the special state start display standby state. By executing the start-time end wait display (G18) using the second display data, the display is not interrupted even when the main control board 61 does not transmit a command designating an effect at the time of power return. It is possible to wait for the start elapsed time to end smoothly (G4).

  Further, by displaying the end-at-start waiting display (G18), if the power is cut off in a situation where the freeze effect is being performed by the management of the main control board 61, the turning drum is used when the power is restored. It is possible to prevent a situation in which only the frozen effect is performed and no effect display is performed in the effect unit 18 or the like.

  For example, considering a case in which a special state is entered by winning a BB or the like managed by the main control board 61 and the special state start display and the freeze effect are executed together, the effect from the main control substrate 61 when the power is restored is considered. No command is sent to specify the display. For this reason, a situation where nothing is displayed on the rendering unit 18 or the like may occur. In addition, as the start-time end wait display (G18), it is conceivable to perform a game (normal state) that is not in the special state or to perform the above-described standby display. Then, in such a case, it is conceivable that anxiety may be given to the player as to whether the winning has been canceled due to the power-off, although the control has been resumed.

  However, in the case where the start end wait display (G18) is performed when the power is restored, and the above-described display during the special state is performed as the start end wait display, the player is provided with a special display even after the power is restored. It can be shown that the game in the state is guaranteed. Then, it is possible to execute control that can give the player a sense of security without making the player uneasy due to the power-off.

  In addition, as the start end wait display (G18) using the second display data, even if the game is not in the special state (normal state) or if the above-described standby display is performed, the player may be provided with: After that, it can be shown that the game can be continued. For this reason, compared to the case where nothing is displayed on the rendering unit 18 or the like after the power is restored, it is possible to give the player a sense of security and a guideline regarding the subsequent operation state.

In addition, by performing the start / end wait display (G18) by the standby display, it is possible to secure a preparation time for displaying the moving image on the staging unit 18 or the like. For example, when displaying a real-time 3D moving image in which rendering of 3DCG (three-dimensional computer graphics) is performed in real time, an appropriate time is required before image display is started. However, by performing the standby display as described above as a wait sign for end at the start (G18), the preparation time is secured by using a video with a small data amount and a small processing load, and it is possible to respond to a CG moving image with a high sense of reality. It will be easier.
<< Power interruption pattern 2 during special state display (measures pattern 1-2) >>

  Next, a pattern 2 (countermeasure pattern 1-2) relating to the combination of the special state display and the power-off as a defect will be described with reference to FIG. 58 (c). Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same situations as the basic operation shown in FIG. 58 (a), and description thereof will be omitted. In the example of FIG. 58 (c), it is assumed that the power is turned off in a state from the state of the special state end display (G8) to the end of the end display elapsed waiting time (G9). .

  In such a case, if the power is cut off (G16) after the start of the special state end display (G8) using the first display data for the end, and the power is restored (G17) after that, the production section At 18, etc., a predetermined end-time wait display using the end-time second display data is started (G21).

  The first display data for the end time described above is constituted by a plurality of display data (for example, the display data K, the display data L, the display data M, etc.), like the first display data for the start time. Can be. Further, the power-off can occur even when any of the display data K, the display data L, and the display data M is being executed. Note that the first display data for the end time may be configured by two or four or more display data, or may be configured by a single display data.

  In addition, as the above-mentioned end-time end display (G21), for example, any of the above-described normal state display and the above-described standby display can be adopted. Further, a plurality of display data (for example, the display data N) is used as the display data of the end-time waiting display using the second display data for the end time, similarly to the start-time end wait display (G21 in FIG. 58B). , Display data O, etc.). Note that the second display data for the end time may be composed of three or more, or a single piece of display data.

  Here, in the example of FIG. 58 (c), the special state end display is not completed due to the power interruption occurring during the special state end display. Then, while executing the above-described end-waiting display (G21) using the second display data, the process waits for the end of the end-display elapsed waiting time in G9, and when the end-display elapsed waiting time ends (G9), The special state end display ends, and the game state is shifted to the subsequent game state (here, the normal state) according to the situation (G10).

  As described above, when the power is cut off during the special state end display using the first display data, the end state waiting display (G21) is performed when the power is restored using the second display data. Even if a power failure occurs during the end display, it is possible to prevent an unexpected operation from being performed after the power is restored, and it is possible to surely end the state (G9) waiting for the end display to elapse. By executing the end wait display at the end of G21, it is possible to smoothly wait for the end display elapsed wait time to end (G9) without interrupting the display.

  In addition, a freeze effect by the management of the main control board 61 may be performed together with the special state end display. In such a case, as the freeze effect after the return of the power, an effect that is continuous with the effect at the time of occurrence of the power failure is executed. Further, as the end waiting display (G21) by the management of the sub-control board 31, an effect such as displaying a game result related to a special state such as the number of game medals obtained, the number of games, and the number of continuous sets is displayed. An embodiment can be exemplified.

  In addition, as a display of the game result, a collective result display (final display) in which all of the game medals obtained, the number of games, the number of continuous sets, and the like are not displayed one by one but all of them appear collectively. Is performed. The display data of such a batch result display is referred to as the above-described display data O. For example, after displaying the display data N such as a defeat scene of the main character or the ally character, the batch result display is executed based on the display data O. It is also possible to do.

  Further, in a case where the power is cut off in a state where the freeze effect is being executed in conjunction with the special state end display, the command is not transmitted from the main control board 61 when the power is restored, so that the management of the main control board 61 is performed. , Only a freeze effect is performed, and no effect display by the management of the sub-control board 31 is performed. However, by displaying the end-of-end wait display (G21) after the power is restored, such a situation can be prevented even if there is no command transmission from the main control board 61.

  Further, as the end wait display (G21) at the end, during the game which is not in the special state (normal state) or when the standby display is performed, the special state at that time is ended for the player. Can be shown. For this reason, compared to the case where nothing is displayed on the rendering unit 18 or the like after the power is restored, it is possible to give the player a sense of security and a guideline regarding the subsequent operation state.

  In addition, when the special state ends, a freeze effect by the management of the main control board 61 and a special state end display by the management of the sub-control board 31 are performed. In this case, various control modes related to transmission and reception of commands can be considered. Then, as the game state after the special state end display, a normal state (G10) which is not the special state can be considered.

  First, as the first control mode at the end of the special state (the first control mode at the end), similarly to the first control mode at the start, the main control board 61 transmits a command to notify the end of the freeze effect (special control). A freeze effect termination command at the end of the state) is transmitted to the sub-control board 31. More specifically, the sub-control board 31 waits for a command from the main control board 61 while executing the end wait display (G21) after the power is restored after the power is turned off during the special state end display. At this time, the end waiting display (G21) is displayed at any timing (or from the beginning) using display data of contents related to the freeze effect (for example, when the main character or the ally character battles). , Etc.). Further, in the final stage (may be from the beginning) of the end waiting display (G21) at the end, the above-mentioned ending effect (including the case of the batch display result) can be performed.

  The main control board 61 transmits a freeze effect end command relating to the end of the above-described special state to the sub-control board 31 at the timing of the end of the freeze effect. Then, the sub-control board 31 recognizes that the freeze effect has ended based on the received freeze effect end command, ends the end-time end wait display (G21), and displays the above-mentioned normal state (G10). The display using the data (the screen in the normal state) is started.

  Subsequently, as a second control mode (second control mode at the time of termination), similarly to the above-described second control mode at the time of start, during the freeze effect at the end of the special state, the main control board 61 counts the timer ( The sub-control board 31 is notified of the count value (the value of the elapsed time of the freeze effect). When the count value reaches a predetermined value (when the freeze effect end time comes), the sub-control board 31 shifts the display content of the effect unit 18 and the like from the special state end display related to the freeze effect to the normal state screen.

  Then, at the time of the power-off recovery from the power-off during the display of the end of the special state, the main control board 61 transmits to the sub-control board 31 the count value that has continued from the count value at the time of the power-off. When the count value reaches the predetermined value, the sub-control board 31 shifts the display content of the effect section 18 and the like from the special state end display related to the freeze effect to the normal state screen.

  Subsequently, as a third control mode (third control mode at the time of termination), the main control board 61 instructs the sub-control board 31 to output a state command ( Status command). Regarding the freeze effect, the main control board 61 transmits a state command indicating that the freeze effect is being performed to the sub-control board 31 at the timing when the freeze effect is started. In addition, the main control board 61, for example, at a predetermined interval, at a predetermined timing during the freeze effect (rotating the winding drum so that the seven symbols are not aligned on a straight line, or stopping the rotating winding drum. A standby command is transmitted. When the sub-control board 31 receives the above-mentioned state command indicating that the freeze effect is being performed, the sub-control board 31 executes a special state end display related to the freeze effect, ends the special state, and indicates the normal state. When the command is received, the display shifts to the display state related to the normal state (G10), and the display of the normal state screen is started.

Further, at the time of power-off recovery from the power-off during the special state end display, the sub-control board 31 starts the end-time end display (G18) based on the above-mentioned standby command. In this case, the standby command has information indicating the progress status (progress stage) of the freeze effect, and when the power is turned off, the display data is selected based on the received standby command, and the display is continued from the special state end display before the power is turned off. It is conceivable to perform sexual display. In addition, a normal screen can be set as the second display data. As a result, when the power is turned off during the end freeze and the power is restored, the normal screen can be displayed instead of the ART screen, so that the power return processing can be performed without giving the player an excessive expectation.
<(2) Countermeasures for malfunctions in the rotating drum acceleration (Countermeasure pattern 2)>
<< Overview of rotating speed control >>

  Next, the relationship between the rotational drum acceleration and the malfunction will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the "rotary wheel acceleration" referred to here is a period during which the rotational speed of the rotary drum changes as shown schematically in FIG. Means the control state. More specifically, as shown at the left end in FIG. 60A, the turning drums 51L to 51R start rotating through a start lever operation (lever ON) and a role drawing, and gradually increase the rotation speed. And reaches a constant speed, and after the acceleration period, reaches a “constant speed” in the turning drum control.

  Thereafter, when a corresponding stop button (in this embodiment, any one of the first stop button 24C to the third stop button 24L) is operated and a stop input (stop input) is made, a brake is applied to the rotation of the torso, and A prize-winning determination is made when the rotation of the torso is stopped. Here, the rotation speed mode shown in FIG. 60 (a) shows a basic operation. For example, immediately after the lever is turned on or immediately after a stop input, the turning drums 51L to 51R are operated in an effect not shown. (Freeze effect).

As described above, the four-phase rotating body stepping motor (not shown) is used for the rotating body rotating device 54 (see FIG. 4). To describe the control of the rotating body rotating device 54 in more detail, the control related to each of the rotating bodies 51C to 51L is mainly performed by the processing of the aforementioned rotating body drive management (S546 in FIG. 18). One step of the rotating body stepping motor is set to about 1.071 °, and each rotating body makes one rotation in 336 steps. In addition, the number of symbols for a single body is 21, and the number of steps for one symbol is 16 steps. In addition, when the number of symbols of one body is set to, for example, 20, symbols with 16 steps and 17 symbols are provided.
<< Start rotation of the torso >>

When the rotation of the rotating drums 51L to 51R is started, predetermined data is set in each RWM that controls the rotating drums 51C to 51L in order to start acceleration of the rotating drums 51C to 51L. Specifically, for each of the rotating bodies 51C to 51L, the rotating body drive state number indicates 1 indicating rotation standby, the rotating body drive pulse output counter indicates 1, and the rotating body drive pulse switching number (during acceleration) indicates 10 times. , The symbol number (for the passing position) indicates FFH indicating that the trunk sensor has not passed, the symbol number (for the stopping position) indicates FFH indicating that the symbol number has not been set, and the detection of the rotation failure of the trunk. 0 is set in the counter. Here, the description of the process of waiting for the rotation start performed at the start of the rotation of the rotating drum is omitted.
<< Acceleration of the torso >>

  Subsequently, the operation in the processing for accelerating the torso will be described. The acceleration process is the same for each round. In the state where the rotating body driving state number is 5 (during acceleration), the following processing is performed when the rotating body driving pulse output counter is decremented by 1 every interruption and becomes 0. First, the counter for retrieving the rotation pulse data is incremented by 1, and the excitation output is performed based on the data extracted from the rotation pulse table based on the lower three bits (0 to 7), thereby moving the rotation drum by one step. Let it. If the number of times of the rotation of the rotating drum drive pulse during acceleration is decremented by 1, and if it is not 0, data is extracted from the rotating body rising pattern table based on the value, and set in the rotating drum drive pulse output counter. Then, when the number of times of the rotation of the rotating body driving pulse at the time of acceleration becomes 0, the rotating body driving state is set to 4 (during constant speed).

Regarding the rotation time of the rotating drum, the excitation switching time from the start of rotation of the rotating drum is defined according to the number of steps from the start of rotation. In the present embodiment, the excitation switching time in the first step from the start of rotation is about 114 ms corresponding to 51 interrupts, about 70 ms corresponding to 31 interrupts in the second step, and about 9 ms corresponding to 4 interrupts in the third step. In the 4th to 7th steps, about 6.7ms corresponding to 3 interrupts, in the 8th step, about 4.5ms corresponding to 2 interrupts, and in the 9th step reaching constant speed, about 2.2ms corresponding to 1 interrupt. ing. Further, the cycle of one interrupt is 2.235 ms as described above, and the total number of interrupts from the first step to the ninth step is 92 (= 51 + 31 + 4 + 3 + 2 + 1).
<< Constant speed processing of the torso >>

  Subsequently, the constant speed processing of the rotating drum will be described. Regarding the operation in the constant speed processing of the rotating drum, the following processing is performed for each interruption when the rotating drum driving state number is 4 (during constant speed). That is, 1 is subtracted from the rotation drive pulse output counter, and it is confirmed that the rotation drive pulse output counter is 0, and 1 is set again to the rotation drive pulse output counter. If the counter for retrieving the rotation pulse data is an even number, 1 is added to the rotation failure detection counter. Further, the counter for retrieving the rotating body drive pulse data is incremented by 1, and the excitation output is performed by the data extracted from the rotating body drive pulse table based on the lower three bits (0 to 7), and the rotating body is moved by one step. Let it. When the rotation sensor signal changes from OFF to ON, and the origin position (initial position) of the rotation is detected, the step number of one symbol is 4, the symbol number (for the passing position) is 0, and the rotation defect detection counter of the rotation. Is set to 0.

  When the origin position of the torso cannot be detected (except when the torso sensor signal changes from OFF to ON), the step number of one symbol is decremented by one for each interruption. If the result of subtracting the step number of one symbol becomes 0, the step number of one symbol is set to 16 and 1 is added to the symbol number (for the passing position). Furthermore, when the result of adding 1 to the symbol number (for the passing position) exceeds 20, the symbol number (for the passing position) is set to 0.

Regarding the design of the rotation speed in the constant speed processing of the rotating drum, the time required for one rotation of the rotating drum in the constant speed state is such that the excitation is switched by 336 steps at a constant speed every interruption (2.235 ms). Therefore, it is 750.96 ms. Therefore, the design rotation speed in the constant speed state is 79.90 rotations / minute.
<<< Process in case of rotation failure of rotating body >>

  Subsequently, a process in the case where the rotation of the winding drum has failed will be described. During rotation of the torso, the passage of the initialization (index) that blocks the torso sensor may be delayed due to poor rotation of the torso. In such a state, the number of interrupts required for one rotation of the torso exceeds 336 times, and it may be impossible to accurately detect the symbol position. Therefore, an inspection of the rotation failure of the rotating drum is performed by using the (rotating drum) rotation defective detection counter.

  The rotation failure detection counter is incremented by 1 when the rotating body driving pulse number search counter is an even number when the rotating body driving state number is 4 (during constant speed), and is normally counted in the range of 0 to 167. However, if the passage of the initialization (index) that blocks the torso sensor is not confirmed, the count exceeds 167 as it is. Here, the rotation of the rotation of the torso is controlled by 336 steps. In the slot machine 10, the counting is performed for each even-numbered step, and the counted number is a value of 0 to 167 as described above.

  The following processing is performed for the detection of the rotation failure of the torso. That is, it is determined that the rotation of the rotating drum is defective when the count of the detection error of the rotating drum rotation is 184 or more. In order to re-accelerate the torso, data is set in each RWM that controls the torso. Specifically, for each rotating body, the rotating body driving state number indicates that acceleration is in progress, the rotating body drive pulse output counter is 1, the rotating body drive pulse switching number (during acceleration) is 10, and the symbol number ( FFH indicating that the rotation sensor has not passed, FFH indicating that the symbol number has not been set, and FFH indicating that the symbol number has not been set. Is set.

Here, the reason for setting the value of the rotation drum rotation failure detection counter to 184 or more when it is determined that rotation drum rotation is defective is as follows. That is, at the time of rotation failure, the value of the winding drum rotation failure detection counter becomes a value exceeding one rotation of the winding drum (here, 167). However, if the threshold value for judging the rotation failure of the trunk is set to “167”, and if the period of the non-detection of the index exceeds one rotation, the judgment of the rotation failure of the rotation is performed immediately, In some cases, it is determined that the rotation of the torso is defective. Further, if the threshold value of the counter value for judging the rotation failure of the rotating drum is set to be excessively large, the detection accuracy of the rotation failure of the rotating drum decreases. Under such circumstances, the threshold value of the counter value for judging the rotation failure of the torso is set to “184” so that the detection of the rotation failure of the torso can be appropriately performed.
<< Deceleration process of the torso during normal game >>

  Next, the details of the deceleration process of the torso during the normal game will be described. When the stop buttons 24C to 24L are received, the symbol number to be displayed is set to the symbol number (for the stop position), and 3 (start of deceleration) is set to the rotating body drive state number. In the deceleration start processing of the rotating drum related to the normal game, when the rotating body drive state number is 3 (deceleration start), the step number of one symbol is 13, and the symbol number (for the passing position) and the symbol number (stop) If the position) coincides, 2 (during deceleration) is set in the drum drive state number.

In the process of decelerating the rotating body during the normal game, when the rotating body drive state number is 2 (during deceleration), the excitation output outputs four-phase ON, and the value of the rotating body drive pulse output counter is changed from 85 to 85. When 1 is subtracted for each interrupt, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0 and about 190 ms (= 85 × 2.235 ms) has elapsed, 0 (in this case, stopped) is set to the rotating body drive state number, and the excitation output is set. Turn off.
<<< Basic operation during rotation acceleration>

  The basic operation of the turning drum by the turning drum control as described above can be schematically shown in FIG. 59 (a). Here, in FIG. 59 (a), a malfunction (improper rotation of the rotating drum) has occurred during the constant speed state of the rotating drum, but the operation when no malfunction occurs during the acceleration of the rotating drum is set as a basic operation. I have. As a basic operation, it is also possible to envisage an operation in which no rotation failure occurs even when rotation failure is detected in a constant speed state.

  In FIG. 59A, various situations in the basic operation are denoted by reference numerals H1 to H9 and are shown in order from top to bottom. In this basic operation, first, if the start lever 25 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the state of the turning body start operation (H1) is reached. This state (H1) of the turning drum start operation corresponds to a situation in which the main CPU 81 of the main control board 61 detects the turning drum start operation. Further, the rotating drums 51L to 51R start rotating and shift to an accelerated state (H2), and the acceleration state processing (acceleration state processing) as described above (H3).

  Here, the control state of the main CPU 81 also indicates the accelerating state (H2) of the rotating drum and the processing (H3) of the accelerating state. The acceleration state (H2) of the rotating drum and the processing of the accelerated state (H3) correspond to the processing in a state in which the above-described rotating state of the rotating drum is “5” and the vehicle is accelerating. Then, by the acceleration processing of the above-described predetermined period (here, nine steps, 92 interrupts), processing for reaching the ninth step of constant speed is performed, and the acceleration state ends (H4).

When the acceleration state ends (H4), the above-mentioned constant speed state (rotating drum constant speed state) is established (H5). This constant speed state (H5) corresponds to the processing in the situation where the above-mentioned rotating body drive state number is “4” and the constant speed is in progress. Then, the constant speed state is maintained (H6), and when the rotation failure of the rotating drum occurs due to some factor in the constant speed state (H7), the rotation failure is detected in the rotation failure detection (H8), and the re-acceleration is performed. The situation is reached (H9). The process here corresponds to the various processes described above as << the process in the case where the rotating body has a rotation failure >>. The processing for re-acceleration may be the same as the acceleration state processing (H2 to H4), or may be different.
<< Faulty rotation pattern 1 during spinning drum acceleration (Countermeasure pattern 2-1 (other than power-off)) >>

  Next, pattern 1 relating to a combination of rotation acceleration and rotation failure will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same situations as the basic operation in FIG. 59 (a), and description thereof will be omitted. In the example of FIG. 59 (b), it is assumed that a rotation failure (H7) occurs due to a factor other than power-off in a state between the execution of the acceleration state processing (H3) and the end of the acceleration state processing (H4). I have. As an example of the rotation failure here, it is possible to exemplify that one of the rotating drums during acceleration cannot rotate in a scheduled acceleration state due to, for example, a step-out of a motor or other factors. The above-mentioned "other factors" include the fact that the rotating body is difficult to rotate due to contact with the display window (the rotating body display panel 28) due to an error at the time of assembling or deterioration over time, or the failure of the rotating body stepping motor. And the like. Further, as "other factors", it is also possible to suppose fraud such as manually pressing the torso.

  In such a case, in the situation where the rotation failure (H7) has occurred, the detection of the rotation failure (rotation failure detection) is not performed, and the processing of the remaining acceleration state is continued (H11). The processing (H11) of the acceleration state at this time corresponds to the processing in the state in which the rotating body driving state number is “5” and the vehicle is accelerating. Then, even if the rotating drum cannot be accelerated in the expected manner, the accelerating state processing is completed to the end (H4), and the constant speed state (rotating drum constant speed state) is performed similarly to the basic operation shown in FIG. ) (H5), and the constant speed state is maintained (H6). The constant speed state at this time corresponds to the process in the situation where the rotating body driving state number is “4” and the constant speed is in progress, as in the basic operation. Further, in this situation, rotation failure detection (step-out detection processing) is performed (H8). Here, rotation failure is detected because the rotation of the rotating drum has occurred. (H9).

  By doing so, even if a rotation failure occurs during the acceleration state, an unexpected operation can be prevented from being performed, and the acceleration state can be reliably terminated. Then, the transition to the constant speed state can be performed promptly, and the transition to the main situation such as the processing for notifying the result of the combination drawing and the payout processing of the game medals (including the processing for storing) can be performed quickly. It is possible to do it.

  In addition, for example, as described above, in accelerating the rotating body by repeating a predetermined number of interrupts, the state of the rotating body reaches a constant speed rotation without normally requiring all the necessary number of interrupts. Cases can also be assumed. In other words, although a predetermined number of interrupts are normally repeated to accelerate to a constant speed for control purposes, the speed may reach the constant speed during a limited acceleration time after the power is restored depending on the situation. In this case, no rotation failure is detected, and no re-acceleration (H9) is performed.

  In other words, when power is restored, irrespective of the actual state of the rotating speed of the rotating drum, if the same number of interrupts as in normal times are always executed for acceleration, then time is wasted. However, as described above, in the situation where the rotation failure (H7) has occurred, the detection of the rotation failure (rotation failure detection) is not performed, and the processing of the remaining acceleration state is continued (H11), and in the expected manner. Even if the rotating body cannot be accelerated, by completing the acceleration state processing (H4), the rotating body rotation control can be smoothly advanced without spending unnecessary acceleration time.

  Here, the following control mode can be adopted as the control mode during the rotation of the rotating drum. For example, with respect to the processing of the main CPU 81, the processing at the time of accelerating the torso is performed without setting the interrupt to be prohibited, and the processing at the time of stopping the rotary drum is performed in a state in which the interrupt is prohibited in a certain period. . More specifically, at the time of accelerating the rotating drum, even if any interruption occurs, the rotation of the rotating drum stepping motor is continued for control. As a result, if a failure of the rotating body stepping motor or contact between the rotating body and the display window (the rotating body display panel 28) does not occur, even if some kind of interrupt occurs, the rotating body stepping motor has a considerable rate. Is considered to continue accelerating and reach a constant speed.

In contrast to the concept of accelerating the rotating drum, when the rotating drum stops, more precise and accurate control is required. Therefore, interrupting is prohibited, and the rotating drum control is affected by the interrupt. To prevent a decrease in For example, when the number of steps in one symbol is 16, the symbol A and the symbol B are continuous, and when the stop is received by the eighth step of the symbol A, the symbol A stops and the symbol B starts from the ninth step of the symbol A. When the stop is received by the 8th step, the symbol B is stopped. Here, when the turning stop control process is performed without performing the interrupt prohibiting process, the stop receiving process is performed by some interrupt. Is delayed, and the process for accepting the stop is performed with a deviation from the appropriate timing, and the symbol to be stopped by performing the stop accepting at the position after the ninth step is stopped with a shift of one symbol. obtain. However, by prohibiting other interrupt processing only while performing the interrupt processing related to the reception of the stop, it is possible to prevent the stop position of the symbol from being shifted, and to perform accurate symbol stop.
<< Faulty rotation pattern 2 during rotation acceleration (measures pattern 2-2 (power cut-off)) >>

  Subsequently, a pattern 2 (countermeasure pattern 2-2) relating to the combination of the rotation speed of the drum and the rotation failure will be described with reference to FIG. The same reference numerals are given to the same operations as those of the basic operation shown in FIG. 59A and the rotation failure pattern 1 (countermeasure pattern 2-1) shown in FIG. Is omitted. In the example of FIG. 59 (c), it is assumed that a rotation failure due to a power-off (H16) occurs in a state between the execution of the acceleration state processing (H3) and the end of the acceleration state processing (H4). I have.

  In such a case, if the power is turned off (H16) after the execution of the acceleration state process (H3), and then the power is restored (H17), the state of the rotation failure of the winding drum (H18) occurs because the winding drum is stopped. However, in this situation, detection of a rotation failure (rotation failure detection) is not performed, the rotation of the rotating drum is started, and processing in an accelerated state is performed (H11). The processing (H11) of the acceleration state at this time corresponds to the processing in the state in which the rotating body driving state number is “5” and the vehicle is accelerating. In addition, as the execution mode of the acceleration process, a mode in which the process in the accelerated state is executed from the beginning, a mode in which the process is executed only in the remaining time, and the like are considered. Then, even if the rotating body cannot be accelerated in the expected manner, the acceleration state processing is completed (H4), and the basic operation shown in FIG. 59A and the countermeasure pattern 2-1 shown in FIG. Similarly, a constant speed state (rotating drum constant speed state) is set (H5), and the constant speed state is maintained (H6). As in the case of the above-described countermeasure pattern 2-1, depending on the situation, the speed may reach the constant speed during the limited acceleration time after the power is restored, and thus the acceleration process is not performed again in the same period as the normal time. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly advance the rotation control of the rotating drum without spending unnecessary acceleration time. Further, in this situation, rotation failure detection is performed (H8). If rotation failure of the rotating drum has occurred, rotation failure is detected, and the state of re-acceleration as described above occurs (H9). In the above-described rotation failure detection (H8), if rotation failure is not detected, although not shown, normal rotation control is performed instead of re-acceleration (H9).

By doing so, even if the power supply is cut off during the acceleration state, the same operation and effect as the above-described rotation failure pattern 1 (measures pattern 2-1) during the turning cylinder acceleration can be obtained. Further, as soon as the power is restored, the remaining processing up to the constant speed state can be performed immediately.
<(3) Countermeasures for failure in stop acceptance (countermeasure pattern 3)>

Next, a description will be given of a relationship between a stop reception and a malfunction when the operation of stopping the torso is performed. First, "stop reception" here means that it is detected that any one of the first stop button 24L to the third stop button 24R has been operated in a situation where stop reception is possible as described above. Means Here, mainly, a description will be given of a relationship with a malfunction in a case where a stop reception has already been received for two winding drums (two rotation drums have already stopped) and a stop reception has been received for the remaining one rotation drum. As described later, similar measures can be taken for the first stop reception and the second stop reception.
<< Basic operation related to stop reception >>

  FIG. 61 (a) schematically shows the basic operation of stop acceptance when a winning combination such as a bell is won. In the example of FIG. 61 (a), as shown at the top, in the situation where the winning combination has been won (J1), the rotation of the turning drum has been started (J2). In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the first stop button 24L to the third stop button 24R are pressed in any order, the first body 51L to the third body 51L will be displayed in a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination won. The torso 51R can be stopped.

  As described above, when each of the rotating drums 51L to 51R starts rotating, it shifts to a constant speed state via an acceleration state (J3). Then, each of the rotating drums 51L to 51R maintains the constant speed state (J4), and shifts to the stop-receivable state (J5) if the minimum game time has elapsed. Further, when the player presses any one of the stop buttons (any one of 24L to 24R), a stop is accepted for the stop button (and the torso) that was first stopped. (J6).

  Here, the stop reception for the first torso that has been stopped is referred to as “first torso stop reception”, and the subsequent stop reception for the stop operation is sequentially referred to as “second torso stop reception”, “ This is referred to as "3rd trunk stop reception". In addition, the torso according to the “first torso stop reception” is referred to as “first stop torso”, and the torso according to the “second torso stop reception” and the “third torso stop reception” are respectively referred to as the “first torso stop reception”. It is referred to as "two-stop rotating body" or "third stopping rotating body". Also, when the first rotation stop is received, the processing of the main CPU 81 (FIG. 5A) shifts to a rotation stop state for stopping the first stop rotation, but in FIG. 61A, Illustration of the rotating body stopped state is omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 61 (a), since a winning combination is won, a symbol constituting a winning combination symbol is displayed for the first stop body (J7). Subsequently, in response to the second torso stop reception (J8), the above-mentioned second stop torso is shifted to a torso stop state (not shown), and then a symbol constituting a winning combination symbol combination is displayed ( J9).

  Further, after the third torso stop acceptance (J10), the above-mentioned third stop torso is shifted to the torso stop state (J11), and thereafter the symbols constituting the winning combination symbol combination are displayed (J12). Through these situations, the state is reached where the torso is stopped (J13), in which all the torsions are stopped, and after a winning determination, payout (including storage) of a number of game medals according to the winning combination is started (J14). . The "winning determination" here may be performed in the display determination (S66) of the game progress main process (see FIG. 14).

Further, when paying out the game medals (J14), a predetermined payout sound is output (payout sound output). Here, for any of the first to third stop cylinders, the symbols constituting the symbol combination of the winning combination are displayed (J7, J9, J12), so the stop reception (J6, J8, J10) ) Is performed at the timing within the number of shift frames (pull-in point) described above.
<< Rotation failure pattern 1 after stop reception (measures pattern 3-1 (power cut-off)) >>

  Subsequently, pattern 1 (measures pattern 3-1) relating to the combination of stop reception and rotation failure will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same states as those in the basic operation shown in FIG. 61A, and description thereof will be omitted. In the example of FIG. 61 (b), it is assumed that there is a third body stop reception (J10), and a power failure occurs in a state (J11) in which the state has shifted to the body stop state (J16).

  In such a case, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the winding drum moves to the stop position (J17), and the main CPU 81 executes the above-described power-off process (see FIG. 19) (J18). Thereafter, when the power is restored (J19), a winning combination display (described later) is displayed on the third body (J12), and all the bodies are stopped in the same manner as in the above-described basic operation (FIG. 61 (a)). The spine is stopped (J13), and the payout of the number of game medals according to the winning combination is started (J14).

  That is, in the slot machine 10, payout is not performed by determining whether or not the symbol has stopped at a regular position (whether or not an actual result is correct). Then, if the processing in the main CPU 81 proceeds normally without any abnormality, the processing proceeds assuming that the result is correct, the symbol does not stop at a regular position, and there is a shift in the apparent stop position of the symbol. Even so, payouts are made as usual.

  Note that the above “winning symbol display” refers to a situation in which a symbol corresponding to a winning symbol is illuminated from behind by driving or flashing the backlight LED for the torso in a predetermined color. (The situation where the backlight is being produced). The “winning winning combination display” is not limited to the driving of the backlight LED for the torso, but may be, for example, a display of a winning combination using the rendering unit 18 or the like (an image display of a symbol indicating the winning winning combination), a front door, or the like. It is possible to include driving of the above-described effect light source of the unit 11 and the like.

  In addition, it is possible to output a sound effect (prize sound output) for notifying the prize, in addition to the display of the prize combination. As the winning sound output, the above-described payout sound output can be used in common, and can be shared by any one of the payout sound outputs. Further, the display of the winning combination and the output of the winning sound performed by the sub-control board 31 may be comprehensively referred to as, for example, “production relating to the winning combination” or “production of the winning combination”. There is also a display unit that performs management on the main control board 61. Examples of this type of display unit include the above-described display units (acquired number display unit, replay display unit, etc.) of the operation unit 14 (FIG. 1) described above. be able to. Then, of the display units managed by the main control board 61, for example, a replay display unit or a notification unit such as a winning lamp (a so-called WIN lamp) that is used when there is any winning due to a winning combination. May be included in the above-described “effects relating to winning combinations” and “effects relating to winning combinations”.

  By doing in this way, when the power is cut off between the reception of the third body stop (J10) and the winning combination display of the third stop body (J12), an unexpected operation is performed after the power cut is restored. This can be prevented, and a winning combination display and payout can be reliably executed for the third stop body.

FIG. 61B shows an example in which the power is turned off (J16) after the third torso stop reception (J10). However, for example, the information of the reception of the third torso stop may be updated during a period from the detection of the power interruption to the stop of the operation of the main CPU 81. In this case, after the start of the power-off process (J18), there is a third torso stop reception (J10), and the power is restored based on the information of the third torso stop reception (J10) at this time. A situation in which later processing is performed can also be assumed.
<< Faulty rotation pattern 2 after stop acceptance (measures pattern 3-2 (other than power off)) >>

  Subsequently, a pattern (countermeasure pattern 3-2) relating to a combination of stop reception and rotation failure will be described with reference to FIG. 61 (c). Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same states as those in the basic operation shown in FIG. 61A, and description thereof will be omitted. In the example of FIG. 61 (c), there is a third body stop reception (J10), and it is assumed that a rotation failure has occurred due to a factor other than power-off in a state (J11) in which the state has shifted to the body stop state. Yes (J21). As the mode of the rotation failure here, as in the case of the rotation failure pattern 1 (countermeasure pattern 2-1) during which the rotation of the third stop rotation drum is the rotation stop, the motor loses synchronism or has other steps. For example, it can be illustrated that the turning drum cannot perform the expected operation due to a factor. Further, as a mode of the rotation failure when the rotation of the countermeasure pattern 3-2 is stopped, a case where the rotation speed is not constant in a situation where the rotation of the rotating drum is to be performed at a constant speed, or a case where the control brake is not applied and the rotation is not normal. Examples of a vehicle that cannot be decelerated can be given.

  In such a case, when a poor rotation of the torso is detected (J21), the pattern to be stopped on the activated line is in a situation where it can not reach the target activated line in appearance (on the surface) (J22). ). FIGS. 60 (b) and 60 (c) show an example of a situation in which a stopped symbol is shifted, and FIG. 60 (b) shows an operation (basic operation) in a normal case. c) shows an operation in the case where a symbol shift occurs. FIGS. 60 (b) and 60 (c) show the operation when the symbol with the symbol number "10" is stopped.

  Then, in a normal case, when there is an operation of stopping the third torso as shown on the left side of FIG. 60 (b), stop control for the rotating body stepping motor is performed, and the rotation speed of the corresponding rotating body is constant. After shifting from the constant speed of the rotating body driving state number 4 which is the speed state to the deceleration start state of the rotating body driving state number 3 which is also the constant speed state and moving to the target position, the brake is applied. The process shifts during deceleration of the rotating body driving state number 2. At this time, for example, assuming that the position corresponding to the eighth step for the symbol with the symbol number “10” is to be stopped on the active line, in the situation where the rotation position is several steps before the eighth step, The brake control of the stepping motor (here, all four phases described above are turned ON) is performed. Then, due to factors such as the inertia force during rotation, the turning drum stops when the process proceeds to the eighth step. When the torso is stopped, the main CPU 81 holds information corresponding to the symbol with the symbol number "10" as the information of the symbol to be stopped, and the symbol on the predetermined activated line that the player sees on the predetermined activated line is also stored. , The symbol with the original symbol number "10".

  That is, when the pattern is normal as shown in FIG. 60B, the symbol recognized as being stopped by the control in the main CPU 81 (in this case, the symbol of symbol number “10”) is displayed on the predetermined effective line. There is no inconsistency between the symbol actually stopped (the symbol having the symbol number "10" in this case), and the two coincide.

  On the other hand, in the example in which the malfunction shown in FIG. 60C occurs, the cause of the rotation failure has occurred, and in the situation before the symbol with the symbol number “10” reaches the target stop position. The torso has stopped. In the example of FIG. 60 (c), the position corresponding to the symbol with the symbol number “9” (eg, the position corresponding to the 16th step of the symbol with the symbol number “9”) stops on the activated line. It has become.

  When the rotation failure occurs as described above, the symbol recognized as being stopped for control by the main CPU 81 is the symbol of symbol number “10”, but it looks like a predetermined valid symbol. It may be impossible to determine whether the stop on the line is the symbol of symbol number "10" or the symbol other than symbol of symbol number "10" (in this case, symbol of symbol number "9"). , The symbol number “9” is stopped. Then, there is an inconsistency between the control stop symbol and the apparent stop symbol, and the two symbols do not match. It should be noted that the symbol with the symbol number "10" is generally located on the target effective line, but it is considered that the symbol has shifted if the symbol is slightly shifted from the normal stop position. Can be.

  Then, in the countermeasure pattern 3-2 shown in FIG. 61 (c), the third stop cylinder does not reach the planned rotation position (normal stop position) as in the example of FIG. 60 (c) described above. Even as it is (J23), the backlight LED for the torso is driven to display the above-mentioned winning combination. Here, the present invention is not limited to the winning combination display, but may be a winning combination effect in a wider sense described above. Then, as in the case of the above-described basic operation shown in FIG. 61 (a), the spine is stopped (J13) in which all the spines are stopped, and thereafter, the payout of the number of game medals according to the winning combination is started. (J14).

  That is, in the example of the countermeasure pattern 3-2 shown in FIG. 61C, even when the symbol related to the winning combination is shifted from the original stop position, the winning combination is displayed as in the case where there is no rotation failure, and the game is performed. The payout of medals is executed. This is the same even when the symbol to be stopped has passed the normal stop position.

  By doing in this way, if a rotation failure occurs due to a factor other than power-off during the period from the reception of the third cylinder stop (J10) to the winning combination display of the third cylinder (J12), an unexpected failure occurs. Without performing the operation, it is possible to surely execute the winning combination display and the payout of the game medals relating to the third stop body. Then, even when a winning combination is displayed in a state where the symbol combination is not properly formed and an inconsistency in appearance (appearance or surface) occurs, control is performed so as not to be disadvantageous to the player. Is possible.

  Here, the function of paying out when a failure occurs as in the above-described countermeasure pattern 3-1 and the above-described countermeasure pattern 3-2 is more effective for a symbol combination with a pull-in rate of 100% (PB = 1). It is believed that there is. In other words, in the slot machine 10, with respect to a so-called common bell (a bell that is established regardless of the pressing order) and a symbol combination of replay (replay), the order in which the first stop button 24L to the third stop button 24R are The symbol arrangement of each body 51L to 51R is determined so that the symbol combination is always displayed even when pressed at the timing.

  For this reason, even if the design does not stop at an apparently appropriate position due to a failure such as a step-out or a power failure, there is a situation in which the designs are properly aligned under the control of the CPU 81, such as watermelon and cherry. It is more likely to occur than a symbol or symbol combination that does not have PB = 1. Therefore, for the winning combination with PB = 1, the function of the countermeasure pattern 3-1 and the function of the countermeasure pattern 3-2 are more effective than when the winning combination with PB = 1 is not hit. It can be used for

  The countermeasure pattern 3-1 and the countermeasure pattern 3-2 have been described using the third stop as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same processing can be performed for the first stop and the second stop. is there. In other words, even if the rotation of the rotating drum occurs during at least one of the first stop and the second stop, and the symbol related to the first stop or the second stop does not stop at a normal position, the winning combination is obtained in control. If the condition is satisfied, the payout may be performed.

  Further, the countermeasure against the rotation failure at the time of accepting the stop is not limited to the one illustrated as the countermeasure pattern 3-1 (FIG. 61B) and the countermeasure pattern 3-2 (FIG. 61C). It is also possible to adopt a response. For example, when the power is restored or when a rotation failure other than a power failure is detected, the rotating drum (here, the third stopped rotating drum) is rotated so that an initial position (initial position) related to the rotation of the rotating drum can be detected. On the basis of the information on the detected initial position, it is also possible to stop the torso at the scheduled original stop position (a position where the winning combination is stopped on a predetermined effective line).

  It is also conceivable to adopt a control mode in which the number of shifted frames (pull-in point) does not become constant when the power is restored, for example. For example, information on a predetermined number of shifted frames (here, three symbols) is held in the RWM, and using this information, a part of the number of shifted frames (here, two symbols) is used. Consider the situation where a retraction is taking place.

In this situation, when the power is turned off and the power is restored after that, the information on the number of already drawn frames (two symbols) is not stored, and the number of shifted frames (three symbols) is not stored again. Is performed. As a result, a total of 5 symbols (2 symbols + 3 symbols) are drawn in before and after the power is turned off. In the case where the power is cut off in a situation where one symbol has been pulled in, three symbols are drawn in again after the power is restored, so that a total of four symbols (one symbol +3) before and after the power is turned off. Symbol). As described above, the symbol displayed to be stopped after the power is restored may be different depending on the timing of the occurrence of the power interruption at the time of accepting the stop.
<Measures for failure related to winning determination (measure pattern 4)>

  Next, the relationship between the winning determination and the defect will be described. First, the “winning determination” here can be performed in the display determination (S66) of the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), similarly to the above-described countermeasure pattern 3. Further, it is assumed that there is a small winning combination (here, the bell of PB = 1 has been established) by the "winning determination". This “small winning combination” signifies a situation in which a winning combination is won by a lottery drawing, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the activated line.

  In addition, the “fault” exemplified here includes, in addition to the power-off, a door opening, a setting key operation, a game medal insertion, and the like in an irregular (non-regular) procedure. Of these, the opening of the door means the above-described door opening error (error relating to door opening) in which the front door unit 11 is unlocked and opened.

Further, the basic operation here is a mode in which the payout of game medals (including the storage) is performed when the stop button related to the third stop body is pressed in the small win (bell formation). Can be mentioned. Then, in the basic operation, when paying out the game medals, a winning combination display (backlight effect) and a winning sound output are performed. Here, the pressing of the stop button related to the third stop cylinder is hereinafter referred to as “third stop pressing”. Release of the finger from the stop button related to the third stop press and release of the stop button is hereinafter referred to as “release” or “third stop press release”.
<< Response to payout across power interruptions (measure pattern 4-1) >>

As a countermeasure pattern 4-1 relating to a countermeasure (countermeasure pattern 4) for the failure in the winning determination, it is possible to consider a countermeasure against a situation in which the processing from the formation of the small role to the payout of the game medal is performed across power interruptions. it can. Further, several situations can be assumed as the countermeasure pattern 4-1.
<< Response to Power-off and Power-Return During Third Stop Press (Countermeasure Pattern 4-1-1A) >>

  For example, it is possible to consider a case where power is turned off and power is restored in the state of pressing the third stop when the bell is hit as a small combination. Hereinafter, a countermeasure against such a complex situation is referred to as a “countermeasure pattern 4-1-1A”. In addition, as a situation in which the third stop press is detected, in addition to a situation in which the player releases the normal press operation in a short time (less than about 0.5 seconds), the player continues the press operation longer than usual. The third stop button is pressed (for a short time or for a long time), and a stop button sensor 49 for the third stop button or the third stop button (see FIG. The situation where the signal indicating the pressed state is continuously output due to the operation failure of 3) can be cited. FIG. 62A schematically shows the countermeasure pattern 4-1-1A. In FIG. 62A, the states of the start lever operation, the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop are shown in order from the left end in the figure. Then, in the example of FIG. 62A, the power is cut off in the situation where the third stop (the third stop is pressed).

  Further, for example, the power is restored in a situation where the third stop press is continued without releasing the finger from the stop button, and the third stop press is continued after the power is restored. After that, a third stop press release is performed, and the third stop press release is detected. In the example of FIG. 62 (a), although not shown, in a situation where a winning combination such as a bell is won, a payout of game medals is executed with the third stop press release. It is also conceivable that the power is cut off in a situation where the third stop press is continued. In this case, it is possible to define a process of executing both a winning combination display (backlight effect) and a winning sound output, executing one of them, or not executing both.

  By doing so, it is possible to perform a process in which the profit of the player is prioritized with respect to the power cutoff in a very short time when the small combination is established. Further, by not displaying the winning combination or outputting the winning sound, it is possible to distinguish the notification of the formation of the small combination from the normal (non-normal), and if the power interruption is intentional due to an illegal act. Even if there is, it is possible to give the game store clerk passing by and the surrounding players a chance to notice the misconduct.

  Here, as described above, in the game progress main process (FIG. 14), a process of checking all-body torso stop (S64) and a process of paying out game medals by winning (S67) are executed. Then, as described above, in the all-round body stop check process (S64), it is checked whether or not any of the stop buttons 24L to 24R has been properly operated and the operation has been properly completed. Be done. The determination as to whether or not the third stop pressing is continued or whether or not the third stop pressing has been released can be performed in the all-body-body stop check process (S64).

  In addition, it is possible to determine a relationship between the countermeasure pattern 4-1-1A and an effect sound (third stop sound) for notifying the third stop. For example, it is possible to output the above-mentioned third stop sound (output the third stop sound) when there is a third stop press release after the power is restored.

  Furthermore, it is also possible to determine the relationship with the display performed by the effect unit 18 or the like with respect to the countermeasure pattern 4-1-1A, for example. More specifically, for example, in a case where the power is cut off during an AT (assist time), an assist display indicating a stop button for performing a third stop is provided in the effect unit 18 or the like when the power is restored. It is conceivable that the display for extinguishing is executed again.

  Further, with respect to the countermeasure pattern 4-1-1A, when the power is restored, the above-described processing of causing the internal LED to emit light and illuminating the button is performed with respect to the three-sheet insertion button (MAX bet button) of the main input unit 26. It is possible to perform processing such as not accepting button operation of the three-sheet insertion button.

  Regarding the countermeasure pattern 4-1-1A, even if there is a third stop press release after the power is restored, for example, while the third stop press is continued, various other buttons (first stop , Second stop, bet, start, etc.) and then performing the third stop press release, the payout is not executed. In other words, it can be set as a payout condition that none of the various buttons of the main system is operated.

  The present invention is not limited to this, and even if one of the predetermined buttons is operated, the payout may be performed unless the other predetermined button is operated. For example, at the time of power return, if any one of the stop buttons is being pressed and the start lever is operated, payout is not performed as it is, but all the stop buttons are released in this situation. It is conceivable that a payout is made. It is also conceivable that payout is performed by releasing the stop button when both the start lever and any one of the stop buttons are in the ON state.

  Further, regarding this countermeasure pattern 4-1-1A, it is conceivable that payout of game medals is executed without performing the third stop / press release. Further, in this case, it is possible to define a process of not displaying a winning combination (backlight effect) or outputting a winning sound. More specifically, even if the third stop is pressed when returning from power cut, after the power return process (FIG. 21), the game medal payout process (S67) by winning in the game progress main process (FIG. 14) is performed. Execution and payout can be exemplified.

Further, when an error occurs, it is possible to eliminate the cause of the error and not to perform the payout even if the release operation for operating the error release button (here, the setting / reset button 69) is performed as described above. For example, the above-mentioned HE error (an error when it is determined that the game medal in the game medal payout device 63 is empty) may be considered as a situation that can be combined with the third stop press, power-off, game medal payout, and the like. Can be. That is, when the power is turned off during the third stop pressing, and when the HE error occurs while the third stop is pressed when the power is restored and the payout is performed, the game medals are supplied during the third stop pressing. Even if the error cause is removed and the error release button (set / reset button 69) is operated, the error is not released and the payout is not performed because the third stop is being pressed. Can be exemplified.
<<< Response to Third Stop Press Release Before Power Return (Countermeasure Pattern 4-1-1B) >>

  Subsequently, it is also possible to define a process for a case where there is a third stop press release while the power is off. FIG. 62B shows a countermeasure pattern 4-1-1B in a case where there is a third stop press release before the power is restored (while the power is turned off). In the countermeasure pattern 4-1-1B, FIG. 62A shows the state of the operation of the start lever 25, the first stop, the second stop, the third stop (pressing the third stop), and the occurrence of power interruption. This is the same as the countermeasure pattern 4-1-1A. However, there is a third stop press release while the power is off, and thereafter the power is restored (power is restored). In this case, although not shown, it is conceivable that the payout is executed when the power is restored.

  In addition, even when the third stop press release is performed while the power is turned off, the relationship with the third stop sound or the like can be determined. More specifically, when there is a third stop press release while the power is off, it is possible to pay out when the power is turned on (when the power is restored) and to output a third stop sound when the power is restored.

In the countermeasure patterns 4-1-1A and 4-1-1B shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), the relationship between the third stop and the power-off or power-return has been described. Not limited to this, for example, when the power is turned off and the power is restored between the start lever operation and the first stop, or between the first stop and the second stop (or between the second stop and the third stop) It is also possible to assume a case where there is power interruption and power restoration. Then, in these cases, it is possible to set the same relationship as the relationship between the third stop and the power interruption or the power restoration.
<< Response to Third Stop Press, Power-Off, and Door Opening (Countermeasure Pattern 4-1-2) >>

  Subsequently, as another pattern of the countermeasure pattern 4-1, a countermeasure (countermeasure pattern 4-1-2) in a case where the third stop is pressed and the power is turned off and the door is further opened can be considered. More specifically, when the bell is pressed as a small role, when the power is turned off in the state of the third stop press and the power is restored in the state of the third stop press, the front door unit 11 is closed and the door opening is released. Can be considered. In this case as well, it is possible to define a process in which payout is executed in the same manner as the above-described countermeasure pattern 4-1 and no winning combination display or winning sound output is executed.

By doing so, the same operation and effect as the above-described countermeasure pattern 4-1-1 can be obtained. Furthermore, even if the power-off involves an unauthorized door opening, if the front door unit 11 is closed, the notification mode is merely set to the non-normal mode without hindering the progress of the game. , Etc. Here, the opening of the door also occurs when the setting is changed or the set value is confirmed.
<< Response to Power Return and Door Opening after Third Stop Press Release (Countermeasure Pattern 4-1-3) >>

  Subsequently, as another pattern of the countermeasure pattern 4-1 (countermeasure pattern 4-1-3), a countermeasure for a case where the power is turned off and the third stop button is released (released) after the power is turned off and the power is turned off is then considered. Can be. More specifically, in the above-described countermeasure pattern 4-1-2, after the power is turned off in the state of the third stop press, the stop button related to the third stop press is released instead of the state of the third stop press. It is possible to consider a case in which the power is restored after that. In this case, as in the above-described countermeasure pattern 4-1-2, even if the front door unit 11 is closed after the power is restored and the door is opened, the payout is executed and the winning combination display and the winning sound output are changed. It is possible to define a process of not performing the process.

By doing so, processing that assumes more situations is performed. That is, when the power interruption is resolved in a short time such as a momentary power failure, it is relatively easy to assume a situation in which the power interruption and the power restoration occur while the third stop is pressed. However, in many cases, it is considered that even if the power is cut off during the third stop pressing, the power is restored after the stop button is released. Therefore, by adopting the countermeasure pattern 4-1-3, it is possible to deal with more situations irrespective of whether or not the opening of the door is due to fraud.
<< Correspondence to payout straddling setting value confirmation (measure pattern 4-2) >>

Next, it is possible to consider a countermeasure for the payout (step 4-2). This “payout over the set value confirmation” indicates a situation in which the processing from the formation of the small combination to the payout of the game medal is performed over the set value confirmation (set value confirmation). Further, several situations can be assumed as the countermeasure pattern 4-2.
<< Correspondence to Third Stop Press and Setting Key ON (Countermeasure Pattern 4-2-1) >>

  First, as described above, the setting value is checked when the power of the slot machine 10 is ON, the above-described door switch or the setting door switch is ON, and when the betting is not performed, the setting key is further set. By operating the setting key so that the switch 68 (FIG. 4) is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting check mode (set value checkable state). Then, as a first countermeasure (countermeasure pattern 4-2-1) in the countermeasure pattern 4-2, for example, when a bell is hit as a small role, the power is not turned off in the state of pressing the third stop, and the setting is performed. A situation in which the key is turned on can be assumed.

  Here, as a condition for setting values to be checked as described above, the setting door switch status is excluded, and the setting values can be checked if the two switches, the door switch and the setting key switch, are ON. It may be made to be in a state.

  Further, here, the front door unit 11 is assumed to be open (door is open), but the timing of opening the door may be before, simultaneously with, or after the start of the third stop and press. Then, in a situation where the third stop is pressed, the case where the third stop is released after the front door unit 11 is closed and the door opening is released (after the door is closed) can be considered. .

  In this case, the setting key remains ON, but it is possible to prevent the transition to the setting value confirmable state as described above. Further, it is conceivable that the progress of the game is made possible so that the next game and subsequent games (games after the next game) can be performed. Then, when a symbol combination other than replay is displayed in the game, the door can be opened to shift to a set value confirmable state. In other words, the transition to the set value confirmable state is performed when all of the three conditions of ON of the setting key, opening of the door, and no betting setting are satisfied, and any one of these conditions is missing. For example, it is possible to prevent the transition to the set value confirmable state.

  When the state shifts to the set value confirmable state, it can be notified that the set value can be confirmed. Examples of the notification that the set value can be confirmed include the display of the set value on the setting display LED 66 (FIG. 4) and the display of characters and images on the effect part 18 (FIG. 1) and the like. be able to. Further, when the door is opened during the game (for example, during the period from the betting setting to the winning determination), it is possible not to shift to the set value confirmable state.

  In this way, the relationship between the third stop, the opening of the door, and the check of the set value can be appropriately determined in advance, and an unexpected operation can be prevented. Then, when appropriate, it is possible to confirm the set value.

  Here, when shifting to the setting check mode (set value checkable state), it is necessary to turn on a plurality of switches, but when ending the setting check mode, only the setting key switch is checked. It has become so. That is, it can be said that the condition for ending the setting confirmation mode is relaxed compared to the condition for starting.

  Further, the following relationship can be defined for the countermeasure pattern 4-2-1. For example, in the countermeasure pattern 4-2-1, as described above, after the front door unit 11 is closed and the door opening is released (after the door is closed), there is a third stop press release. Was assumed. However, unlike this, it is possible to assume a case where the third stop is released in a state where the set value can be confirmed without the door being opened. In this case, it is conceivable that payout is performed, and after completion of the payout, the state is shifted to a set value confirmable state.

  Further, after the payout is completed, it is conceivable that the display related to the setting value confirmation is not performed in the effect unit 18 or the like, and a display (display at normal time) different from the state of the setting value confirmation is performed. Then, the game after the next game is impossible. As a mode in which the game after the next game is not possible, it is conceivable that both or one of the betting operation (bet setting operation) and the insertion of the game medal are disabled. In this case, it is conceivable that the main CPU 81 is in a state where the set value can be confirmed. When the door is opened, it is possible to display on the effect unit 18 or the like that the set value can be confirmed.

  In addition, regarding the case where the third stop press release is performed in the setting value confirmable state, the payout may be started when the release is performed. In this case, it is conceivable that after the payout is completed, the game can be performed with the setting key ON without shifting to the set value confirmable state. Then, a subsequent game can be performed, but when the door is opened, it is possible to shift to a set value checkable state.

In this case, it is assumed that the power supply is not turned off and the setting key is turned on when the third stop is pressed, for example, when a bell is hit as a small role, but when the power is turned off, the power is turned off. Since the setting key is ON at the time of return, the information indicating that the setting change device has been operated and the small role has been won is cleared, and the payout of the game medals may not be performed after the power is returned.
<< Correspondence to Third Stop Press and Notification of Set Value Confirmable State (Countermeasure Pattern 4-2-2) >>

  Subsequently, as a second countermeasure in the countermeasure pattern 4-2 (countermeasure pattern 4-2-2), similarly to the above-described countermeasure pattern 4-2-1, the front door unit 11 is closed and the door is opened. Consider a case where there is a release of the third stop after the release. After that, unlike the above-described countermeasure pattern 4-2-1, the state shifts to the set value confirmable state, but it is possible to prevent the notification of the set value confirmable state from being performed. In other respects, processing similar to the above-described countermeasure pattern 4-2-1 can be performed.

  By doing so, it is possible to achieve the same operational effects as the above-described countermeasure pattern 4-2-1. In addition, after the release of the third stop, the notification that the setting value can be confirmed is not performed, so that a person who tries to confirm the setting value illegally after the winning determination is made in the setting value confirmable state. It is possible to keep something secret.

  In the various countermeasure patterns in the countermeasure pattern 4-1 and the countermeasure pattern 4-2 described above, the processing for items such as whether payout is possible when a small combination is established, whether set value confirmation is possible, and the like are performed. I am targeting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to consider countermeasures for items such as operation of a stop button, availability of replay, and availability of set value confirmation in the event of a replay.

  For example, when the power is turned off while the third stop is pressed in the situation where the replay has been hit and the power is restored, it is possible to restore the information indicating the right to play the replay game. In addition, when the power is restored, if the setting key is ON and there is a third stop press release, the betting state is established when the replay information is restored, so that even if other conditions are satisfied, the setting is performed. It is possible to perform a process such as not to enter a value confirmable state.

In addition, the handling of such a replay is based on the various countermeasure patterns (measurement patterns 4-3 to 4-9) described below, unless a contradiction or duplication occurs. It is possible to assume a countermeasure pattern assuming that the payout is replaced by a replay, and the situation of betting is reached after the power is restored.
<< Response to door opening and payout (measure pattern 4-3) >>

Next, as a countermeasure pattern 4-3, a countermeasure against a situation related to payout during opening of the front door unit 11 (front door) can be considered. For example, when the small combination is established, if the third stop is released while the front door is open, it is possible to pay out. The timing of opening the door may be before, simultaneously with, or after the third stop press. Also in this case, it is possible to determine a process of executing a winning combination display or a winning sound output. By doing so, the relationship between the third stop, the opening of the door, and the payout can be appropriately determined in advance, and an unexpected operation can be prevented.
<< Response to Door Opening and Game Medal Insertion (Countermeasure Pattern 4-4) >>

Note that, as a situation related to the above-described countermeasure pattern 4-3, a situation relating to the insertion of a game medal while the front door unit 11 (front door) is open can be considered. For example, when a game medal is inserted while the front door is open, it is possible to detect the inserted game medals as usual, count the game medals, and turn on the insertion display LED. . Further, in this case, it is possible to perform a sound output (output of a closing sound) in accordance with the detection of the game medal. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible not to output the insertion sound in accordance with the detection of the game medal. By doing so, the relationship between the opening of the door and the insertion of the game medal can be appropriately determined in advance, and an unexpected operation can be prevented.
<Other measures related to measure pattern 4>
<< Correspondence to payout before 3rd stop press release (measure pattern 4-5) >>

  In connection with the above-mentioned countermeasure pattern 4, for example, the following countermeasures can be taken. First, in the main flow at the time of power return (game progress main processing (see FIG. 14)), it is possible to execute payout processing before confirming whether or not the third stop press is released.

  As shown in FIG. 14, in the game progress main process, a process of checking all-body stoppage (S64) and a process of paying out game medals by winning (S67) are executed. Then, as described above, in the all-round body stop check process (S64), it is checked whether or not any of the stop buttons 24L to 24R has been properly operated and the operation has been properly completed. Be done. For this reason, for example, the execution order of the all-round body stop check process (S64) and the game medal payout process by winning (S67) is changed, and the game medal payout process by winning (S67) is changed to the all-body stop mode. By performing the check before the check process (S64), it is possible to execute the payout process before confirming whether or not the third stop press is released.

  In this way, when the power is restored, the payout process is given priority over the check of the stop button, and the payout can be reliably executed regardless of the state of the third stop press. Then, it is possible to prevent an unexpected operation from being performed with respect to the operation accompanied by the third stop press release.

In this case, at the time of normal payout without any trouble, the display of the winning combination and the output of the payout sound are both performed, and the button of the third stop is provided during the power-off (or before the power-off). When the button is pressed and the third stop button is released after the power is restored, it is possible to neither display the winning combination nor output the payout sound.
<< Response to Door Opening after Third Stop Press Release (Countermeasure Pattern 4-6) >>

  Subsequently, in relation to the above-described countermeasure pattern 4-2-1, after the release of the third stop button, even if the above-mentioned setting key is ON, the subsequent game can be continuously performed. It is possible. Then, in this case, even if the game start condition including the insertion of the game medal is satisfied, the main CPU 81 can be configured not to shift to the setting confirmable state.

  More specifically, for example, after inserting a predetermined number (three in this case) of game medals, the reels (turning cylinders 51L to 51R) start rotating by operating the start lever 25 and operating the stop buttons 24L to 24R. The corresponding reel stops. Further, in games other than replay establishment, if the door is opened after the third stop button is released after the release of the third stop button, the setting key can be turned on to shift to a set value confirmable state. To On the other hand, in the game in which the replay is established, the lock is unlocked after the release of the third stop button, the door is opened, and even if the setting key is turned on, it is not possible to shift to the set value checkable state. It is possible.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent an unexpected operation from being performed with respect to the operation involving the third stop press release and the door opening.
<< Correspondence to door opening and payout sound (measure pattern 4-7) >>

Next, the relationship between the door opening and the payout sound will be described. Regarding the relationship between the door opening and the payout sound, it is possible to pay out the game medals and output the payout sound even while the door is being opened. However, when the notification sound (door opening notification sound) when the door opening is detected is output, if the door opening notification sound and the dispensing sound conflict (superimpose), the dispensing sound is not output. It is possible. It is also possible to output the payout sound, but to set the volume of the payout sound to a level that is inaudible. By doing so, it is possible to prevent an unexpected operation from being performed with respect to the operation involving the door opening and the payout sound.
<< Pattern 1 related to door opening notification sound and payout sound (measure pattern 4-7-1) >>

  FIG. 63A illustrates a countermeasure pattern 1 (countermeasure pattern 4-7-1) relating to the combination of the door opening and the payout sound as described above. The operation shown in the upper part of FIG. 63A is a normal operation (basic operation). The middle part of FIG. 63 (a) shows the interrelationship when payout occurs before the door is opened, and the lower part shows the interrelationship when payout occurs after the door is opened.

  In the basic operation shown in the upper part of FIG. 63A, the front door unit 11 (front door) is kept closed (not open), and the output of the door opening notification sound indicated by “Sound 1” is Not done. Then, in such a situation, when there is the third stop press release, the payout sound indicated by “Sound 2” is output.

  On the other hand, in the case where the payout occurs before the door is opened as shown in the middle part of FIG. 63A, there is a third stop press release in a state where the front door unit 11 (front door) is closed. The payout sound is output as shown in "Sound 2". Then, for example, if the door is opened during the output of the payout sound, the door opening notification sound is output as shown in “Sound 1”.

Further, in the case where payout occurs after the door is opened as shown in the lower part of FIG. 63A, at the stage of opening the door, no payout sound is output as shown in “Sound 2” and the sound is shown as “Sound 1”. A door opening notification sound is output. Here, the drawing is performed such that the door opening notification sound is output at a predetermined timing after the door is opened. Then, if there is a third stop press release in a state where the door is opened, a payout sound is output as shown in "Sound 2". Here, the third stop / press release is performed during the output of the door opening notification sound, and the payout sound is output during the output of the door opening notification sound. The output of the payout sound ends after the output of the door opening notification sound ends.
<< Pattern 2 relating to door opening notification sound and payout sound (measure pattern 4-7-2) >>

  Subsequently, FIG. 63B shows another example of the relationship between the door opening and the payout sound (measure pattern 4-7-2). FIG. 63B shows an example of a countermeasure pattern in which the door opening notification sound and the payout sound do not conflict (overlap) as described above. The operation shown in the upper part of FIG. 63A is a normal operation (basic operation). This basic operation is the same as that shown in FIG. The middle part of FIG. 63 (b) shows the interrelationship when the payout occurs before the door is opened, as in FIG. 63 (a). The lower part shows the payout after the door is opened. If you are interrelated.

  In the case where the payout occurs before the door is opened as shown in the middle part of FIG. 63 (b), the “front door”, “sound 1”, and “third stop press release” are as shown in FIG. 63 (a). It is the same as shown. However, the payout sound of "sound 2" accompanying the third stop press release ends when the door opening notification sound starts to be output following the door opening.

  In the case where payout occurs after the door is opened as shown in the lower part of FIG. 63 (b), “front door”, “sound 1”, and “third stop press release” are described in FIG. 63 (a). Is the same as that shown in FIG. However, the payout sound of "sound 2" accompanying the third stop press release is started when the output of the door opening notification sound ends with the subsequent door opening.

For measures to prevent the door opening notification sound and the payout sound from competing with each other, for example, in a quiet period between intermittent messages such as "the door is open" in the door opening notification sound, It is also possible to output a payout sound. Further, in order to prevent the door opening notification sound and the payout sound from competing with each other, it is conceivable to time the output period of the door opening notification sound and output the payout sound based on the time measurement result.
<< Response to Door Opening and Game Medal Clearing (Countermeasure Pattern 4-8) >>

Subsequently, in the case of performing the game medal clearing while the door is open, the payout is performed when the clearing button is pressed in the main input unit 26 (FIG. 1), and after the clearing is completed, the demonstration unit 18 and the like can perform the demonstration display. It is. It is also conceivable that even if the settlement button is pressed, no payout is performed while the door is open. By doing so, the relationship between the opening of the door and the settlement of the game medal can be properly determined in advance, and an unexpected operation can be prevented.
<< Response to a combination of opening doors, input, release, and settlement (measure pattern 4-9) >>

  Next, various possible modes of the combination of the opening of the door and the input / release / clearing will be described. Here, since the purpose is to provide a comprehensive description of various composite aspects, some of the aspects described so far are included. In this case, processing in each case is performed when a game medal is inserted while the door is open, when a game medal is paid out while the door is open, and when a game medal is cleared while the door is open. An embodiment will be described.

  First, when a game medal is inserted while the door is open, it is conceivable to perform a sound output and detect the inserted game medal (perform recognition of the game medal). Further, when a game medal is paid out while the door is open, a payout sound is output, and the payout may be started with the third stop press release. Further, when the game medal is cleared while the door is open, no sound is output and the payout may be started when the clearing button is pressed. It is conceivable to configure a slot machine combining these processing modes.

  Further, when a game medal is inserted while the door is open, it is possible to not recognize the inserted coin. Further, when a game medal is paid out while the door is open, it is possible to prevent payout. Further, it is also possible not to pay out when a game medal is cleared while the door is open.

  Further, it is possible to take measures also in the case where the settlement of the game medal is combined with the confirmation of the set value. For example, while checking the set value (during the situation where the setting key is ON), the payout is not performed even if the clearing button is pressed, but the third stop is pressed when the small role is pressed, and the setting key is turned ON. In such a situation, when the third stop button is released, the payout is performed, and thereafter, the state can be shifted to the set value confirmation mode (set value confirmable state). That is, in the normal state, the payout is not performed even if the settlement button is pressed in the set value confirmable state, but the payout is possible if the third stop is pressed because the state is before the transition to the set value confirmable state. It is possible to do. In this case, even if the setting key is ON, there are cases where payout is performed and cases where payout is not performed. As a result, even if the setting key switch is turned on while the third stop button is being pressed, the payout is performed when the third stop button is released, so that the setting key switch is turned on due to a failure or the like. Even so, a payout can be given so that the player has no disadvantage.

  As described above, the present invention has been described using the slot machine 10 as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is applicable to, for example, other various slot machines. Further, the present invention is not limited to a slot machine, but can be applied to other types of gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines. Further, the present invention can be applied to a casino machine installed in a casino facility, for example.

10 slot machine, 11 front door section, 12 housing section, 15 times body display section,
16 game medal payout exit, 17 saucer, 18 staging section, 21 game medal slot,
24L-24R 1st stop button-3rd stop button, 25 start lever,
31 sub-control board, 51L-51R 1st body-3rd body, 61 main control board,
62 setting unit, 68 setting key switch, 81 main CPU.

Claims (1)

Multiple reels,
Multiple stop switches,
Internal drawing means,
It is configured to execute power-off processing when power-off is detected,
A predetermined result is determined as the determination result of the internal drawing means, and when the remaining one predetermined reel which has not yet detected the operation of the stop switch among the plurality of reels is rotating, the predetermined reel is rotated. As a result of detecting the operation of the corresponding predetermined stop switch at a predetermined timing, the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped, and when the operation of the predetermined stop switch is no longer detected, the predetermined symbol combination is detected. Is configured to be able to provide a game medium corresponding to
The predetermined result is determined as the determination result of the internal drawing means, and when the remaining one predetermined reel which has not yet detected the operation of the stop switch among the plurality of reels is rotating, the predetermined result is determined. As a result of detecting the operation of the predetermined stop switch corresponding to the reel at the predetermined timing, the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped, and the operation of the predetermined stop switch is continuously detected. In a situation where the power is turned off, a reset wait process is executed by the power-off process, and then the power is turned on while the predetermined stop switch is operated, and the operation of the predetermined stop switch is detected. If so, the game medium corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is not given, and then the predetermined stop switch is operated. Being configured capable of imparting the game medium corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination when gone out,
The predetermined result is determined as the determination result of the internal drawing means, and when the remaining one predetermined reel which has not yet detected the operation of the stop switch among the plurality of reels is rotating, the predetermined result is determined. Despite detecting the operation of the predetermined stop switch corresponding to the reel at the predetermined timing, the predetermined symbol combination is not stopped in a situation where the plurality of reels are stopped due to detection of power-off. However, when the power is turned on thereafter and the operation of the predetermined stop switch is not detected, a game medium corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination can be provided. Machine.

Images